Home

Reference Guide

1. Shatus Ready Type HP Lazeret 4050 Seres PS Where HP4050T Comment Print to file i All Number of copies l Pages from i to 35 f Selection mud mud I Collate Cancel 2 From the Name drop down list choose the printer or plotter that you want to use WYSIWYG records the name that you choose for future reference and thereafter displays it as the default printer for layouts To print all pages of a layout select A To print select pages of a layout click Pages and then enter the range in the from and to boxes 5 If you want to print multiple copies of the pages select the value from the Number of copies list box 6 Click OK wysiwyg March 2007 y o t Images Presentation mode Introduction Images such as renderings and logos are stored in the mages tab of Presentation mode Renderings are automatically saved here when you select internal in the Output Properties Step 2 of the Render Wizard Any other image files bitmap or jpeg format may be imported To import a bitmap or a jpeg A N Right click on the mages shortcut tab and then choose New Image Type the name of your image Click OK Click on the shortcut for your new image The text No Image Available appears in the working area of the screen From the File menu choose Import Use the browser to find the image file that you want to import Click Open To export a bitmap o
2. Tile Options i Top Lett Centre Split Centre m Show page guides Select this check box if you want the printable outlines to be displayed on each sheet of paper that comprises the plot The solid outline is the chosen printer s paper size and orientation u Show page number Select this check box if you want the page numbers of the plot to be displayed in the center of each page The page numbers are for reference only and do not appear in the printed output a Tile options Click the appropriate option button to enable one of the following m op Left Click to place the top left corner of the plot in the top left corner of the first page and then arrange the remaining pages accordingly a Center Click to place the center of the plot at the center of a page and then arrange the remaining pages accordingly a Split Center Click to place the center of the plot at the corner of four pages and then arrange the remaining pages accordingly WYSIWYG Reference Guide 307 Presentation mode Release 19 0 308 Fixture Details tab Options on the Fixture Detai s tab affect the fixture data that is displayed on the plot View Options Mew Plot View Properties Tile Printing Fixture Details Fixture data shown on plot Mae E Chamel E spo E toou We lamp Focus P Gobo F ferent P Patch P Position 1 Eumpase Lene Uo Hoes Td uimme P Intensity W Use User Details n Use User Details Click to clear th
3. Custom color picking Button to access gel library Wheelz scroller selection drop down list ae cea MY S4 Colours r Colors available on color wheel Click the custom color box or use the greyscale arrow to adjust your selection The fixture s output depends on its capabilities If the fixture has CMY or color mixing capabilities the output is the exact color you selected If the fixture is only equipped with a color wheel or a non mixing scroller the fixture will output the closest color to that selected based on the available colors on the wheel The same principal works if you select a color from the library by clicking the Library button The wheel scroller selection drop down list is as discussed for the gobo wheel All of the available colors are displayed in the order in which they appear on the wheel or scroll wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode Focus tool The focus tool works with fixtures that have variable pan and tilt parameters You must focus conventional fixtures in CAD mode To use the focus tool In the focus trackpad click hold and drag the mouse to control the position of the light beam The Home button resets the fixture to pan 50 and tilt 5090 To send the fixture s beam to a specific location click the Focus button and then click in your wireframe drawing Use the focus position drop down list to focus the beams of light toward one of the focus positions that you cre
4. In this appendix SuperPro Monitoring Tool 385 383 Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool Release 19 0 384 wysiwyg b March 2007 b Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool SuperPro Monitoring Tool Introduction As part of the WYSIWYG installation a Sentinel SuperPro Monitoring Tool is included that enables you to view and track information about the dongles on your network With this tool you can keep track of how many licenses are in use on your network view the maximum number of licenses that can be obtained from each dongle and therefore the maximum number of users both local and on the network that can access WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network view the Sentinel Protection Servers that are currently installed and running on your network view the addresses and version information for each Sentinel Protection Server The Monitoring tool is a convenient tool to use to keep track of license activity on your network For example you can use the Monitoring Tool to determine whether you have purchased enough licenses based on license demand Note The SuperPro Monitoring Tool is designed for use only with SuperPro protected applications such as WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network that are being run ona network To launch the Monitoring Tool 1 Navigate to the folder where you installed WYSIWYG for example C Program Files WYSIWYG Open the Bin Sentinel folder Double click the monitor application R
5. LIU Would you like to perform one of the following actions to the block Explode Do for all Convert into Library Item Replace with Fixture Ignore block Cancel Exploding the block Exploding the block does the same thing as the explode command in AutoCAD that is it breaks the block into its components You must be careful of blocks that are made up of other blocks as WYSIWYG will only explode down one level Converting blocks into library items Converting a block into a library item imports the object and creates a duplicate of it to add to the objects library for future use Note that the block will only be available in the library of the current document To make it available globally see To create a custom library item on page 132 Substituting fixtures for blocks Converting a block into a fixture replaces the DWG DXF block with a WYSIWYG fixture of your choice If you find that you are always replacing a particular type of block with a specific fixture you can set an option in WYSIWYG so that the substitution will automatically occur each time you import the block For example if you have files in which the PAR64M block is always a PAR 64 fixture with an MFL bulb you have the option of telling WYSIWYG to automatically import the block in that way To do this select the Remember for future imports check box in the Library Browser that is displayed To change this option edit the impo
6. CAD mode 114 10 11 Release 19 0 Converting components into library items Converting a component into a library item imports the object and creates a duplicate of it to add to the library for future use Note that the component will lose all surface properties such as color and texture and it will only be available in the library of the current document To make it available globally see To create a custom library item on page 132 When you convert SketchUp files into custom library items they appear on the Library tab of the Library Browser within the SketchUp folder Substituting fixtures for components Converting a component into a fixture replaces the SketchUp component with a WYSIWYG fixture of your choice If you find that you are always replacing a particular type of component with a specific fixture you can set an option in WYSIWYG so that the substitution will automatically occur each time you import the component For example if you have files in which the PAR64M block is always a PAR 64 fixture with an MFL bulb you have the option of telling WYSIWYG to automatically import the component in that way To do this select the Remember for future imports check box in the Library Browser that is displayed To change this option edit the import lst file that is created in the Library folder usually C Program Files WYSIWYG Library once the first fixture is set to be remembered for future imports Note WY
7. Notes To change the label layout at an application level you must browse the library from the WYSIWYG Welcome window The information is stored in the Default ldb file in the WYSIWYG Library folder If you need to reinstall WYSIWYG make a backup of Default ldb and replace the installed file with the backup to ensure your changes are not lost To change the label layout for the selected fixture only select the fixture open its properties and then skip to step 5 If more than one fixture type is selected the edit layout option is not available Select the Fixtures library Navigate through the library and then select the fixture type for which you wish to change the label layout 4 Click the Property tool Result The properties dialog box for that fixture type is displayed 5 Click Edit Layout Result The Labe Layout window is displayed Label Layout for 0 66 Metre Ministrip Patch M Visible Line Weight m se Bad Colour i onor E w Position with fixture M Rotate with fixture D Italics Horizontal Justification C Let Center C Right m Vertical Justification Top Center Bottom LL Height oz Angle 0 00 Copy Shape None Size ora o Copy l Use Defaults Cancel ve wysiwyg gt March 2007 CAD mode 6 From the list on the left select the attribute that you want to edit Note To make the controls active you may have to deselect the
8. 2 End Address Select From List cwl To create a new patch domain click Create New and then type the domain in the Domain Name box for example a a To choose a patch domain from those that you have saved with your current WYSIWYG file click Select From List and then highlight the domain name Type the Start and End addresses for this patch universe Click OK Click Next and then proceed to step 13 wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 13 14 15 16 17 18 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode The Multi Patch Numbering window enables you to specify how you want to number the surfaces in your grid From the Start from drop down list choose where you want to start the numbering of the surfaces in your grid Light Emitting Surface Wizard Ee i Multi Patch Numbering Specify the Multi Patch Numbering Arrangement Numbering Style Choose the arrangement of the individual surfaces in the grid You can specify the start corner and the numbering direction Start from Top Left Preview Number along Rows lt Back Cancel From the Number along drop down list select the direction of the numbering either along the rows or columns of the grid To have the numbering progress in a serpentine pattern throughout the grid click to enable the checkbox beside A ternate direction for each row column Otherwise proceed directly to the next step Click Next Click Finish Res
9. Fixtures and lighting specific object properties are fully defined in Hanging and focusing fixtures on page 194 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 163 CAD mode 164 Release 19 0 Point tab Options on the Point tab affect how the selected point is drawn The default point type used in a document is defined on the Object Defaults tab of Show Options To ignore the default setting click to clear the Use Document Defaults check box and then select the desired point type Properties E E ae zjx General Appearance Light Emission Paint Fixture Hang Structure Truss Point type C Do Cross Square Circle Gwe oo Line tab Options on the Line tab affect how the selected line is drawn x General Appearance Light Emission Line Fixture Hang Structure Truss T Closed T Spline Shade Options lw Shade Radius Joo 500 Cancel Apply m Line Pattern Choose a line pattern for the selected lines Refer to Drawing lines on page 138 for an illustration of each type m Scale Type a value in this box to change the length and spacing of dots and dashes for the selected lines This value is applicable to center hidden or dot lines only m Closed Select this check box to quickly connect the first point of a multi segment line to the last point of that line wysiwyg gt March 2007 CAD mode m Spline Select the Spline check box to transform a line into a spline
10. In the Multiple box type the number of fixtures of that type required A Oo N Click nsert Result The fixtures are inserted below the last entry in the spreadsheet Tip If you have a shortcut created for the desired fixture you can right click on the shortcut and choose Insert or Insert Multiple Inserting focus positions in Data mode If you type a new value into the focus field of a fixture you are essentially creating a focus position That focus position is now available in the Flight Case for you to drag and drop into your drawing For more information on the Flight Case refer to The Flight Case on page 232 Inserting positions in Data mode If you type a new value into the position field of a fixture the Pick a value from the list dialog box is automatically displayed This is because a position cannot exist in WYSIWYG unless it is recorded in the Position Manager You can select from the list of positions that already exist or you can click Manager to open the Position Manager to create a new position If you are making this change to a fixture that was previously hung on a different position that fixture will by unhung and sent to the ght Case under its new position field From there you can drag it back onto the drawing If the position does not yet exist in the drawing you must draw a hang structure and assign it the appropriate position name before you will be able to hang the fixture again For more
11. Moving mirror moving head tab Options on the Moving Mirror and Moving Head sub tabs affect the pan and tilt values Properties ce ae _ x General Appearance Light Emission Fisture Hang Structure Pipe m PAL 1200 Col Goba lt Gobo gt Options General Control Moving Mirror Pan offset 0 00 Tilt offset 0 00 Swap Axes Reverse Pan Reverse Tilt m Pan offset Sets the manually adjustable pan angle m Tilt offset Sets the manually adjustable tilt angle m Reverse Pan Select this check box only if the real fixtures have an option to reverse the pan parameter and that option is set to true m Reverse Tilt Select this check box only if the real fixtures have an option to reverse the tilt parameter and that option is set to true m Swap Axes Select this check box only if the real fixtures have an option to swap the control channels for the tilt and pan and that option is set to true m Pan Only visible for certain fixtures Displays the manufacturer low mid and high pan limit values for the fixture To change a value select it click Change and then type the new value u Tilt Only visible for certain fixtures Displays the manufacturer s low mid and high tilt limit values for the fixture To change a value select it click Change and then type the new value Note The Pan and Tilt limit behavior is defined by the Mode selected on the Options tab 212 wysiw
12. Reset Duration c Pasition start and meter start Stop Save Logg If you are using WYSIWYG S Motion Control Console in the D box type the motion control ID that you selected when configuring the axis Console is sending data Note If you do not know the ID right click on the axis and then click Properties Click the Axis tab The ID appears below the Motion Patch option button In the 7rave box type the distance in meters for linear axes in degrees for rotational axes that you want the object to travel along or around the axis This can be the full length angle of the axis or only a portion of it if you do not want the object to travel along around the full path For linear axes if you type a value that is longer than the actual axis the object stops at the end of the physical axis Click the Linear or Rotational option button according to the type of movement axis that you are patching In the Mode area select the type of movement for the object a Static Select this option if you want to specify the precise location of a static object on the movement axis You can then use the position slider at the bottom of the window to adjust the position and control the movement of the object manually Bounce Select this option if you want the object to move forward and backward in a continuous loop along the movement axis Forward Select this option if you want the object to move forward along the a
13. Shortcut Close Insert Multiple u Mode Select the mode in which you want to configure the fixture This field is not applicable for certain fixtures m Dimmer f applicable select the type of dimmer for this fixture for example choose either Internal or External m Circuits Indicates the type of DMX controls for this fixture for example Control Intensity RIntensity Color and so on m Number of Channels Based on the circuit that you selected above in addition to the options selected this box indicates the number of channels for this fixture E Avallable Channels The names of the channels available for this fixture based on the circuit and options that you selected Photometrics tab Options on the Photometrics tab affect the lamp and lens settings for the fixture azil Lamp VL51K Lens Light Stipple HSF View f Beam vs Field Flood vs Spot Beam Flood vs Spot Field Field f 5 degrees E degrees Insert Multiple 7 Lamp Select the lamp to be used in the fixture m Lens If applicable select the lens setting for the fixture Changing the lens alters the photometric properties of the fixture WYSIWYG Reference Guide 207 CAD mode Release 19 0 View Select the graphical representation that you want to display in the box to the left The choices are as follows m Beam vs Field Displays a graphical representation of the beam and field angles of the fi
14. To clear a backup look Perform this procedure if you want to permanently erase a backup look from a dimmer rack 380 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSILink Link mode 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Clear Result The Se ect BackUp Look to Clear dialog box is displayed Select BackUp Look to Clear ajx Look Number il Dimmer Room OMe Node Cancel In the Look Number box type the number of the backup look that you want to clear Select the nodes for which you want to clear the backup look Click Spec fy to select the node from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be cleared for all connected nodes 4 When finished click OK To obtain a backup look status 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Status Result The BackUp Looks Status dialog box is displayed Backup Look Status FR Node List 2 View which ETCLink enabled DMX nodes have backup looks associated with them and if the looks are currently active Note Changes to backup looks will not be immediately visible You may need to wait up to 30 seconds for the change to take effect Load recording To record a load 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Load Recording and then choose Record Result The Dimmer Loads dialog box is displayed Dimmer Selection Select all non zero Specify i Cancel WYSIWYG Reference Guide 381 WYSILink Link mode Release 19 0 2 S
15. To divide a cylinder into circles 1 Select the cylinder that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Cylinders into circles Type the number of circles desired Result The cylinder is divided into equal parts by the number of circles specified The circles are stacked within the cylinder at the calculated interval To divide a cylinder into lines 1 Select the cylinder that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Cylinder into lines Type the number of lines desired Result The cylinder is divided into equal parts by the number of lines specified The lines follow the same pattern as the cylinder s existing segments but at the calculated interval To divide a line into points 1 2 Select the line that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Lines into points wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode 3 Type the number of points desired Result The line is divided into equal parts by the number of points specified The points are placed along the line at the calculated interval Note Lines may also be divided by adding vertices In this case no new objects are created the line is simply divided by marker points To add a vertex to a line 1 Select the line to be divided 2 Right click on the line segment that you want to divide and then choose Add Vertex Result The original line remains intact A marker point i
16. To insert an ellipse onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Ellipse Tip You can also use the ipse tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar Click on the page at the starting point of the ellipse and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the ellipse Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the ellipse Result The ellipse is placed on the layout To insert a polygon onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Polygon Tip You can also use the Polygon tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar m Click on the page at the starting point of the polygon and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the polygon Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the polygon Result The polygon is placed on the layout To insert text onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Text Tip You can also use the 7ext tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar T Click on the page at the starting point of the text box and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the box Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the box Result The text box is placed on the layout To type text in the new box double click the box and then delete the default text Type your custom text Click an
17. WYSIWYG Upgrade You curenth own one of these products SIPaper Wy SICAD wyslwyn 500 1000 2000 or 5000 The software that you are running now iz one of the new wys lw suite of products wyslwy Report Wwyslwyn Design wyslwyn Perform To use this new software you need to purchase an upgrade This can be done through your WYS IW rG dealer or over the phone from one of these numbers 1 416 597 2278 International 87r 989 2278 North America IF You have already done this enter your 11 digit upgrade code here Upgrade Code Example GEGHXEYNMXF Serial Code MG730K ee for Your reference The code that you type in this dialog enables your old dongle to function with the new version of WYSIWYG Type your upgrade code and then click Upgrade Proceed to To register WYSIWYG below To register WYSIWYG 1 Once you have gone through the Product Configuration Wizard and you have successfully activated your product the Register window appears prompting you to register your software SE n IiI xj Flease take a momentto register this copy of Wir SAYO ou can use an unregistered W SIW Y G far 15 days after installation of which you have this many days left 11 devs left to use Wo SIA YG unregistered Register Later Step 1 Registration Submit your registration information in one of these ways re ebail Fhone r bap 2 Validation When you have registered in Step 1 you will
18. of the circus They are more rounded in shape than the frame tent the walls comprising multiple sections each supported by as many poles as you specify The roof is held up by one center pole When drawing either type of tent you can specify many different properties including the number of poles length height or perimeter of the walls and the color of different parts of the tent You can also choose from different materials and you can choose whether you want to apply either a custom color or texture to different parts of the tent When assigning a texture you can choose your own texture such as a company logo or symbol or you can choose a texture from the WYSIWYG library The origin for both types of tents is at the center of the tent on the floor Frame tent wysiwyg March 2007 The following entries describe the parts of the frame tent New Venue Tent Description Field The height of the tent Wall height walls The length of the tent Width walls The width the tent walls Depth The height that the Height above walls center pole extends above the height of the walls The distance between the Separation center poles Circus tent The following entries describe the parts of the circus tent WYSIWYG Reference Guide New Venue Tent Description Field The number of individual Segments segments in the tent The height of the tent Wall height walls The height that the Height abo
19. I mporting floorplans If you have an existing floorplan saved in bitmap bmp JPEG jpg or Targa tga format you can import it into your drawing and then continue to customize it within WYSIWYG Note You can view your imported floorplan on either of the Drawing tabs Wireframe or Ouad only in Plan view To ensure that your drawing is accurate when you import the floorplan you must first set its scale by measuring one of its components and then telling WYSI WYG how long the line you drew really is WYSIWYG adjusts the size of the floorplan image based on the measurement that you specify To import a floorplan Note Before you perform this procedure you must know the precise dimensions of at least one of the elements in your imported floorplan For example if it contains a stage note the width of the stage before you import the graphic into your drawing 1 In either the Wireframe or Ouad tab in Plan view click File gt Import Floorplan Result The Open window appears 126 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode Navigate to your floorplan file select it and then click Open You can import floorplans that are saved in bitmap bmp JPEG jpg or Targa tga format Result The floorplan is placed in your drawing and a window appears listing instructions for setting the scale of the drawing Import Floorplan A a 2 x To set the scale of your imported Floorplan you must click
20. Q the symbol denoting that Quick Tools have been enabled 4 Click on the fixtures to which you want to add the color or gobo Note If you want to apply color to a multi source light that has multiple circuits such as the 528 Borderlight 6 4 Circuit the following window appears prompting you to select the circuit to which you want to apply the color I Do not ask this question again In this case select the circuit and then click Se ect To choose multiple circuits press CTRL and then select the desired circuits Click Se ect when you are finished 5 Right click and then select Finish Quick Tools to finish placing the color or gobo 220 wysiwyg CAD mode March 2007 To create a new shortcut to a color or gobo 1 2 Click the Co Gobo shortcut bar Right click in the open space on the bar and then choose New Shortcut Result The Co or Select or Gobo Select dialog box is displayed Select a color or gobo from the tree menu on the left side Result The color or gobo is displayed on the right side Click Select Color gobo lists Color and gobo lists are reguired for automated lighting fixtures and scrollers By default when inserted automated fixtures and scrollers are set to use the manufacturer default color or gobo list WYSIWYG contains a library of stock color and gobo lists provided by the fixture manufacturers If you are using a custom set of colors or gobos or want to generat
21. Seat f Use Custom Color f Use Texture from Library l EE 7 Use Texture from File f E Texture Position Texture Tile Dimensions Texture Rotation f Tile idth foon Degrees Stretch Height Material Fabric 1 opaque low shininess amp Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with 0 Use Custom Transparency Os Md meaning opaque Select All Select None Select an element from the ement list wysiwyg gt March 2007 Layers CAD mode If a material was chosen previously it is listed in the Materia box To choose a different material or to choose a material for the first time click the ellipsis button and then navigate to the new material Note Click Defau t to remove your selection and apply the default material to the element Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each element to which you want to apply materials When finished click OK Layers are drawing aids intended to help you organize your plot They are like transparent acetate sheets upon which you can draw In the same way that you can view several transparent sheets at once by placing them on top of each other you can hide and unhide layers by choosing which sheets are in the stack The top sheet is the layer that new objects are placed on and is called the current layer Creating layers To create new layers 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the
22. document using either the Save or Save As command from the File menu The name of your WYSIWYG file is displayed at the top left of the WYSIWYG window For more information on setting the name of your file refer to File menu on page 79 NOW The current date and System settings in Windows time Note If you will be applying the report heading globally it is important that you include the Group variable in the heading This ensures that the page numbers are not lost in those reports in which Group By has been enabled Those reports that are not grouped by will be unaffected and will display a blank cell Saving heading files 302 Heading files are separate from the reports themselves and can be saved outside of the Show document in Excel format This saved heading file can in turn be applied globally to all reports This is a great tool for using the same header across multiple documents To save a heading file Redesign the headings of the selected report as described above Before closing the Report Headings Editor from the File menu choose Save as In the File Name box type a name for the Excel format heading file Click Save Close the Report Headings Editor o fF Oo N Result The heading file is saved in the WYSIWYG library folder unless otherwise specified You are prompted to load the new heading file name Click Yes You are prompted to apply the headings to all the reports in the document Cl
23. file type or new destination such as a floppy disk To save the current document 1 2 From the File menu choose Save As In the dialog box that opens browse to the location where you want to save the file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save in box In the File name box type a name for the file In the Save as type box choose the saved file type There are a number of choices available Click Save Note WYSIWYG allows you to save an object or group of objects contained within your document as a separate file To save an object 1 2 Ensure the object s to be saved are selected From the File menu choose Save As Result The following dialog box is displayed Save As Ei x Full Document Selected Objects Eger maitit se 000 as Basenoint tal Select Beeennainit with mouse Cancel Click Full Document to save the current document to a new file name file type or new destination You are prompted to enter the destination and file name of the file Click Selected Objects to save the selected object s as a separate WYSIWYG wyg document Click Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint to align the incoming drawing at 0 0 0 with the existing drawing wysiwyg March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document 6 Click Select Basepoint with mouse to use the mouse to select the basepoint for the merge of the CAD drawings 7 Click OK Template files The WYSIWYG Save As command lists a fil
24. on page 59 Compatibility tab Options on the Compatibility tab affect the processing power for beam simulation Application Options NN a x General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface Simulation Options Number of Threads fi m Number of Threads Select the number of processors that you have available on your computer for beam simulation Modify this number only if you upgrade the number of processors Render Options tab Options on the Render Options tab affect the memory and processing power available for rendering WYSIWYG Reference Guide 89 90 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 Application Options General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface Rendering resources Number of threads i E Memar Memon Size MB E E Total memory 42 MB Memon available 137 MB Total physical memory 126 ME Physical memory available 17 ME Total virtual memory 301 ME Virtual memory available 120 ME Write log files u Number of Threads Select the number of processors available for rendering Modify this number only if you upgrade the number of processors on your computer m Memory Size Select the amount of memory the renderer can use for temporary files Eight MB is the default and should be sufficient for most computers If you are running many applicat
25. using the Point snap to align the placement of objects to fixtures snap to fixtures This is useful for dimensioning u 2 Centerpoint snap Aligns the placement of objects to the center point of circles arcs or cylinders u amp Assembly snap Use assembly snap to group multiple truss objects together as you insert them This ensures proper structural assembly Refer to Using Assembly snap with truss on page 191 for more details about truss assembly m s Pipe snap Constrains fixtures to placement on a pipe at a specific interval For more information refer to Pipe snap on page 198 amp Focus snap Orients one or more fixtures to a focus position When you choose this value you can also lock beam dragging to the incremental values of your choice as specified in the Pan and 7 lt boxes of the Draw Options tab the defaults are increments of 45 degrees for pan and increments of 10 degrees for tilt These are the values to which you want the fixture s beam to snap while manually dragging and focusing it For example if you set a value of 30 degrees when you drag the fixture s beam it will snap at 30 degrees 60 degrees 90 degrees and so on Note that any focus positions that you have set take precedence over the pan and tilt values if you drag the beam over the focus position It will automatically snap to the focus position instead wysiwyg gt March 2007 CAD mode Interactive mode Inter
26. 0 Imperial Mo Errors Prompt Selected Unused Absolute Missing Units of nap line object channels coordinates coordinate measurement and Ortho The status bar can be turned on or off from the toolbar list You can also customize the contents of the status bar from the Application Options window For more information on setting the options of your drawing refer to Application Options window on page 85 Prompt line The prompt line displays the current status of a command within your drawing If you are currently working with a command that requires multiple steps the placement of a pipe for example the prompt line displays a message indicating the next step required to accomplish that task The prompt line also displays a short description of a command when you point to it using your mouse Selected object In this display O stands for the number of objects currently selected The F stands for the number of fixtures selected and the C stands for the number of circuits currently selected EDD FE IE a Unused channels Although there is never a limitation on how many fixtures can be patched in a file there Is a limitation on the number of DMX channels that can be simulated in Live mode WYSIWYG will not simulate the DMX values being received on channels exceeding the Perform channel count of your system WYSIWYG Perform is available in 500 1000 2000 5000 and Unlimited channels WYSIWYG Unlimited has 50 000 channe
27. 1 Select the arc that you want to divide 2 From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Arcs into lines WYSIWYG Reference Guide 179 CAD mode 180 Release 19 0 Type the number of lines desired Result The arc is divided into equal parts by the number of lines specified The lines are automatically drawn from the center of the arc outward resulting in something similar to a pie chart To divide an arc into points 1 Select the arc that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Arcs into points Type the number of points desired Result The arc is divided into equal parts by the number of points specified The points are placed along the arc at the calculated interval To divide a circle into lines 1 Select the circle that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Circles into lines Type the number of lines desired Result The circle is divided into equal parts by the number of lines specified The lines are automatically drawn from the center of the circle outward resulting in something similar to a pie chart To divide a circle into points 1 Select the circle that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Circles into points Type the number of points desired Result The circle is divided into equal parts by the number of points specified The points are placed along the circle at the calculated interval
28. 176 Design 262 Tools toolbar 64 Tooltips 98 330 Tophats 219 Troubleshooting 12 Truss Distributing multiple fixtures on 195 196 Hanging truss 191 Rotating truss 192 Truss cross members 98 330 Truss snap 110 191 Type data field 240 U Undo 152 Ungrouping 153 Unit data field 240 Universe Patch 247 Universes toolbar 64 Unused channels 66 Upgrades 31 44 USB serial converter 86 USITT symbols 217 V Variables in reports 301 Vertex 176 181 adding to a linear axis 149 Vertical hang structures 310 Vertical justification of a line 165 Video patching in the patch view 248 Video source configuring new 145 controlling with a console device 352 wysiwyg March 2007 Index Video tool 265 View full screen 54 View Options Error 257 Flight Case 234 Layouts 321 Patch universe 252 Report 298 Shaded views 74 Spreadsheet 245 Wireframe views 70 View shortcuts 69 View toolbar 64 Viewer 100 Viewing moving scenery 272 273 Views tools shortcuts 56 W Wattage data field 241 Weight data field 241 Welcome window 51 Wheels 222 264 Window New 54 Wireframe views 68 Workplane 108 WYSI Link 370 WYSI Link toolbar 64 376 WYSIWYG activating 42 Design 18 Installing 33 Perform 20 24 27 Report 13 17 Starting for the first time 40 WYSIWYG Learn 24 35 WYSIWYG Network 26 WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition 13 22 WYSIWYG Viewer 100 Y Yok
29. 93 Fading between lighting looks 271 Field angle 208 File menu 79 Fillet 182 Filter Data filter 244 Find tool 242 Fixture Details tab 308 Fixture layout 214 Fixture notation 214 Fixture properties Photometrics 207 Fixture snap 110 Fixtures 194 Distribute and array feature 195 196 Distributing along pipes truss 195 Distributing between two points on pipes truss 195 Distributing from the center of pipes truss 196 wysiwyg March 2007 Distributing in a direction on pipes truss 196 Hanging multiple 195 Inserting in CAD mode 194 Using Array feature to hang 195 Flight Case 232 Floor mount 186 191 Floorplans adding 126 Hiding after importing 127 Flow control 85 Focus Design tool 265 Focus data field 240 Focus position 218 Focusing fixtures 199 Footnotes data field 241 Frame size 219 Frame tents 136 French curve 138 Front view 108 Full screen mode 54 G Gels 264 Inserting 220 Inserting multiple 243 General object properties 156 Gobo data field 240 Gobo wheels Custom 221 Gobos Custom 223 Design tool 264 Inserting 220 Graphics 343 Grid array 184 Grid options 97 Group By option 301 Group tab 153 Grouping 153 H Hang structure 186 199 Hanging 194 Hanging fixtures 194 Hanging multiple fixtures 195 Hanging truss 191 Hardware acceleration 87 Hatch style 218 Header Report 300 Hidden line 138 Hide Floorplan 127 HogPC Connecting Aut
30. Accurate simulation of conventional and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and so on AutoPatch transmits the entire show patch regardless of channel count Rendering is available in Design and Live modes but is limited to 76 800 pixels Upgrade suggestions A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation Note You cannot upgrade from WYSIWYG Report or Design to WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition You can however upgrade from WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition to WYSIWYG Perform removing any console restrictions Modes The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition CAD DATA DESIGN PRES LIVE wysiwyg March 2007 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 23 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 19 0 b WYSI WYG Learn I ntroduction WYSI WYG Learn is a special configuration of WYSIWYG that allows an educational institution to run ten instances of the softwar
31. CAD mode To rotate this second piece of truss click X for a clockwise rotation and Z for a counter clockwise direction until it aligns with the first piece of truss Tip You can also click Sto rotate the truss from one end to the other based on its center point When you are satisfied with its position click to insert the truss into the drawing 193 CAD mode Release 19 0 b Hanging and focusing fixtures I ntroduction Fixtures are objects on the plot and appear in 3D in shaded views When you insert a fixture into the plot it must be hung from a hang structure WYSIWYG has an extensive library of fixtures to choose from Inserting fixtures into your drawing Is as easy as pointing and clicking You can insert individual fixtures directly from the Library Browser or you can create shortcuts to your favorite fixtures To guickly hang multiple fixtures on a pipe or straight truss simultaneously you can use the array feature to arrange multiple fixtures along a pipe truss use the distribute tool For details see Hanging multiple fixtures on page 195 and Distributing fixtures on page 195 Hanging fixtures To insert fixtures Use this procedure to hang fixtures one by one on lengths of pipe or truss To hang multiple fixtures simultaneously use the Array feature For details see To hang multiple fixtures on page 195 After hanging the fixtures you can arrange them Simultaneously on pipes truss by
32. Click Whole Fraction mm or cm Note These choices vary based on whether you selected Metric or Imperial in step 3 To switch unit types on the fly Double click the units display on the status bar WYSIWYG Reference Guide 105 CAD mode Release 19 0 The missing coordinate The missing coordinate X Y or Z is the coordinate whose value cannot be entered by clicking on the screen The easy way to determine which coordinate is the missing coordinate in a wireframe view is to move the mouse around Look at the status bar at the bottom of the working area You will see only two values changing The value that is not changing is the missing coordinate for that view or workplane The missing coordinate is dependent on the plot type and the workplane selected In the following example Y is the missing coordinate as its value is set at 0 0 1 aa oo aa Once entered this value affects all subseguent objects inserted in the current view For example if the missing coordinate is set to 5 in a plan view all objects are placed 5 feet off the floor X Y 5 until the missing coordinate is changed again Please note that the missing coordinate is not a move tool Objects will not be moved to the missing coordinate value The missing coordinate only affects subseguent inserts To enter a value for the missing coordinate 1 Press TAB on your keyboard or click the Missing Coordinate tool on the CAD Options toolbar Enter the missing
33. Click to clear this check box and then select the desired scene from the Scenes drop down list To learn more about scenes refer to Editing objects on page 152 Tip You can also change the current scene at any time by using the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Draw Options tab Options on the Draw Options tab affect the draw defaults This tab is similar in function to the Draw Defaults tab available in User Options For more information on the Draw Defaults tab refer to Draw Defaults tab on page 96 View Options x General Draw Options View Type Show Details fw Snap To I Grid Centre Snap Size 8 MidGrid D Assembly Pants JT Pipe Midpoints JW Focus Endpoints Pan 45 Tilt 19 lw Enable Grip Dragging Units y Metric C Imperial M Cross Hairs On Precision Background Colour L C Whole Fraction a Visible Grid Grid Interval joe Origin O o oo oo Angle jo cy C Onor Grid Colour Stile Standard Open Point 7 Use Document Settings Get Document Settings Use User Defaults Select this check box to reference the options selected on the Draw Defaults tab of User Options Click to clear the Use User Defaults check box to make specific changes for the active view Get User Defaults Retrieves the values set on the Draw Defaults tab of User Options View Type tab Options on the View Type tab affect the plo
34. Due to some incompatibilities with certain motherboards MIDI Drivers are not installed with WYSIWYG even when you perform a full installation Therefore you must install them manually a wysiwyg March 2007 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Note Close WYSIWYG before starting the installation To install MIDI drivers 1 Oo Ff o N 6 From the Start menu choose Settings and then choose Control Panel Click the Ada Remove Programs icon Scroll down to WYSIWYG and then click the Change Remove button Once the installer launches click the Modify option button and then click Next From the Se ect Components window select the M D Drivers check box Click Next Result Based on your method of installation you are prompted for the installer file a If you installed WYSIWYG from a CD you must place the WYSIWYG CD in your CD ROM drive b If you downloaded the WYSIWYG installer from the Web the install file must be present on your hard drive for the installation to complete Please note that you will only be able to install the MIDI drivers from the installer that you originally used for example if you used the Web installer you will not be able to install the drivers using the CD and vice versa Click Finish when the installation is complete To set up MIDI drivers 1 Launch WYSIWYG Load the file with which you want to use AutoFocus Switch to LIVE Mode add the Hogll in the Device Manager and th
35. Edit menu choose Layers Result The Layer Database dialog box is displayed Layer Database E E Layer Hame Colour Wisible Editable J isila Fixtures Cyc ES y v l Fixtures Follow S D v ww Fixtures Fresnels __ v wv Colour Select Fixtures Macs C ww ww Fixtures Pars C v Wi Properties Pipes LX O v wv New Pipes Scenic v ww Venue v v Delete Get IELITTETIL Scenes i Select All UnSelect Al Cancel To create a new layer click New Type a new name for your layer for example Pipes and then click OK To change the color of the layer click Co or Select It is recommended that you select different colors for each layer so as to easily identify the layers on the plot To make a layer and all objects on the layer visible on the plot and in shaded views select the Visible check box If not selected the layer is not visible and is not therefore editable To make a layer and all objects on the layer editable on the plot and in shaded views select the Editable check box If not selected the layer is not editable and is not therefore visible Tip You might want to deselect a layer when you are finished working with it to avoid possible errors while working on other parts of the plot This is similar to freezing in Auto CAD To view and modify the scenes in which a layer is included select a layer and then click Scenes For details see S
36. Exit if you want to save the settings but do not want to print the pipe tape at this time wysiwyg gt WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 10 Live mode video with the console device Live mode is available only in WYSIWYG Perform In this chapter Layout tabs Connecting to consoles AutoPatch Visualization Autofocus Rendering DMX Camera Live mode is used for graphically simulating the output of a lighting control console or compatible offline editor Live mode also has rendering ability enabling you to create photo realistic pictures of the simulated lighting looks Unlike Design mode Live mode displays transitions from cue to cue allowing you to see the programmed movement of light over time If you have configured a patched video source you can use Live mode to control the progress of your 349 350 357 359 362 364 365 347 Live mode Release 19 0 ae wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 Live mode y ae Layout tabs Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These tabs provide various configurations of the views that you are working with To change layouts click the appropriate tab Live mode contains the following layout tabs m Wireframe The work area displays a full screen wireframe view E Quad The work area is divided into quadrants three of which can be modified to show plan front or side views The lower right quadrant contains a shaded view u Sh
37. If checked the EDMX address is used for the patch universe This check box is enabled if either EDMX or Conventionals for the DMX address is selected from the Universe drop down list E Name The circuit name for the selected fixture E Number The circuit number for the selected fixture m Universe Select a patch universe for the fixture a Address The starting DMX channel number for the selected fixture Fixture notation Fixture notation affects how fixtures and their properties are displayed on your drawing and consequently on your plot in Presentation mode As illustrated below two components comprise fixture notation m symbol m information layout GO Oa RS CUS Information gt layout Ie Symbols A symbol is a graphical representation of a fixture in a Wireframe view In all wireframe views except isometric symbols may be used to represent fixtures instead of three dimensional models Fixtures are associated with specific symbols by default but you can change the symbol to whatever you like To turn fixture symbols on or off 1 From the Options menu choose User Options Result The User Options dialog box is displayed Select the Show Details tab Select the Draw Symbols check box 4 Click OK To change the symbol for a fixture type The following procedure changes the symbol for all instances of the selected fixture type in the document Similar procedures change the symbol at an application leve
38. Insert round rectangle Insert ellipse Insert polygon Insert text Insert bitmap Insert plot view Insert data view Insert report view Insert spreadsheet Open bound view n o KX DBD O U U A OMC ZE Bound view properties Move to front T Move to back K Placeholders only H Print preview W Zoom window Z Zoom fit M Modify view V Mid Operations Description Hot Key Abort mode A Finish mode F WYSIWYG Reference Guide 395 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Release 19 0 Default hot keys available in Patch Views The following default hot keys are helpful when working in Data mode Patch Start Operations Description Hot Key Console modify C Unpatch U Modify view V ToolTips on off Y Mid Operations Description Hot Key Abort mode A ToolTips on off Y Appendix C Using AutoFocus with the HogPC AutoFocus is the protocol that WYSIWYG uses to talk back to a compatible console One of the consoles that is compatible with this protocol is the Hogll The offline editor for the Hogll HogPC is also compatible with the AutoFocus protocol although it requires additional setup Normally AutoFocus is enabled through the WYG it2 or other hardware interface However since the HogPC operates internally you can establish a connection through software Note HogPC and WYSIWYG must be running on the same computer to enable the connection In this appendix Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC 399 W
39. J ob Down This button enables you to move jobs down within their current status level when you have multiple jobs that are either Stopped or Queued You cannot use this button to move a queued job into the Stopped Status However you can click the top job in the Queued status area the job that is currently being processed and use this button to move it all the way to the bottom of the queue You can also click the top job in the Stopped status area and move it down within this same area If desired Delete Job Highlight any job in the Job pane those with the Rendering Oueued Stopped or Completed status and press this button to delete the job and all supporting files from the Background Rendering Manager Note that when you delete Jobs you cannot recover them and there will be no record of them Save Rendering Highlight a Completed job that you want to save and then click this button to export the rendering as a graphic file to the folder of your choice You are then prompted to choose the location for the file and the file type bmp jpg tif or gif 291 Design mode 292 Release 19 0 To pause and resume all jobs in the Background Rendering Manager To free up some CPU capacity on your computer for example if you are going to run another program you can pause the Background Rendering Manager and the job that is currently in progress When you click Resume the job at the top of the queue continues rendering where
40. Missing Color Missing Gobo Error notifications Release 19 0 Definition The dimmer field is empty The patch field is empty The channel field is empty The spot field is empty The color field is empty The gobo field is empty Error notifications occur when WYSIWYG detects an error for which an error notification trigger has been set To set error triggers 1 From the Options menu choose Show Options 2 Click the Data Error tab Show Options Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Error Status Motification Trigger Reflect in Notification Status Bar Dialog Indicator Dimmers gt Circuit Fatches gt Circuit Channels gt Circuit Patches gt Dimmer Channels gt Dimmer Channels gt Patch Spots gt Patch Missing Position Missing Unit Missing Circuit Mame Missing Circuit Missing Dimmer Missing Patch Missing Channel Missing Spot Mizsing Colour Missing Gobo VT TT TT TT 80 80 lt 1 81 81 XI I VT TTT TT 7 80 80 lt 1 5181 XI XI 3 Select the errors for which you want to trigger an error notification and or signal 4 Click OK To manage error triggers 1 When an error notification is triggered the following dialog box appears WYSIWYG Data errors have been found Catone Onn 2 From this dialog box you can perform one of the following actions wysiwyg March 2007 Data mode a Acknowledge
41. Next Navigate the library to find a suitable association gobo Note Generic association gobos are stored in the Proxy category Select the desired gobo Click Finish Result The custom gobo is placed in the gobo library as per the path specified in step 3 wysiwyg gt March 2007 CAD mode b ab Light Emitting Surface Wizard I ntroduction This Wizard enables you to guickly create a grid of light emitting surfaces If desired you can then patch the surfaces and control their color and intensity with a lighting console By patching the color and intensity of the surfaces separately you will be able to control both properties independently or together with lighting consoles and media or video servers Based on the settings that you choose the Wizard enables you to simulate lighting effects such as neon tubes LED webs LED tubes star cloth and video curtains To use the Light Emitting Surface Wizard 1 From the Draw menu choose Light Emitting Surface Result The Light Emitting Surface Wizard appears Light Emitting Surface Wizard ve Welcome to the Light Emitting Surface Wizard This Wizard enables you to quickly create a grid or mesh of light emitting surfaces with the color and intensity that you specify IF desired you can choose to patch the surfaces and control their color and intensity with a lighting console By patching color and intensity separately you can control both properties independ
42. Options x New Plot View Properties Tile Frinting Fixture Details Grid Point Size iN Tw Grid On Colour gt o Paper Size Border and O E 24 0l 36 0 W Landscape Margins Joo soo 0 500 Scale Border Thickness lo 0 063 Scale E for aw ln paper Real World Units Metric Imperial _ __ Colour Iw Follow User Scene mi Print in Black and White Cancel New Plot View Properties tab Options on the New Plot View Properties tab affect the appearance of the plot Name The name of the plot Grid On Select this check box if you want gridlines to appear on the plot view Gridlines are for reference only they assist with the layout of plot items on the page Gridlines do not appear in the printed output Point Size The size at which points are printed Paper Size Choose the desired paper size from the drop down menu If you do not find the size you want choose Custom and then specify the width and height as desired The default values are 24 0 X 36 0 imperial measurement or Al metric measurement Landscape Select this check box if you want the page to be set up in landscape format Margins The margins for the plot The default values are 1 2 imperial measurement or 1cm metric measurement Border Thickness The thickness of the plot s border The border is drawn at the margins defined above The default values are 1 16 imperial
43. Palette shortcut is updated with the new CMY values To apply a palette Applying a color palette is the equivalent of setting up color parameters for the selected fixtures except it is much faster 1 Select the fixtures for which you want to assign the specific color value 2 Click on the desired palette shortcut Result The fixtures are assigned the recorded copy value If the fixture has CMY or color mixing capabilities the output is the exact color that you selected If the fixture is only equipped with a color wheel or a non mixing scroller the fixture outputs the closest color to that selected based on the available colors on the wheel wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode b Creating looks Saving lighting looks Changes that you make with the design tools update the currently selected look The name of the currently selected look is displayed at the top of the working area Before making changes always check that the currently selected look is the one that you want to modify To create a new lighting look In the shortcuts bar click LooKs In the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look A N In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look This is the amount of time that it takes to fade to this look when you click on it from another look in the shortcut bar For more information see Cross fading between lighting
44. Plots view You must reestablish the relationship or link to ensure that changes made in CAD or Data mode are reflected in a New Plots view Reestablishing the link returns the object to its original state before the link was broken For example reestablishing the link of a fixture that has been moved off a pipe moves the fixture back to its original position on the pipe To reestablish links 1 Select the object for which you want to reestablish a link 2 From the Edit menu choose Restore Links Result The Links dialog box is displayed Links _ x Position Link Properties Link Te Atthibute ink Note The Position Link check box is deselected This means that an action occurred that broke that link To reestablish the link select the Position Link check box 4 Click OK Result The positional link is reestablished Vertical hang structures 310 In the New Plots view non horizontal hang structures such as booms and ladders can be rotated around their base to show all mounted fixtures The rotation can be top bottom left or right To rotate the position of a vertical hang structure 1 Select the hang structures that you wish to rotate 2 Right click and choose Rotate Position Result The Rotate Position dialog box is displayed Rotate Position x Please enter a dinection and angle to rotate Cancel Direction i Right Left t Top Bottom Rotation Angle a0 wysiwyg Ma
45. Release 19 0 y o gt Layouts Introduction The Layouts tab opens the layout design and storage area Layouts are created by arranging various CAD report image and other items on a defined paper size There are two default layouts included in the layouts shortcuts The Micro Layouts which is designed to print on an 8 5 x 11 piece of paper and the Big Layouts which is designed to be plotted on a 36 x 48 sheet of paper You can use either of these layouts as Is modify them to suit your needs or create new layouts from scratch Creating a new layout To create a new layout Click the Layouts shortcut tab Right click in the Layouts shortcut area and then choose New Layout Type the name of the new layout Click OK Result An empty layout is created A shortcut to your new layout is added to the Layouts shortcut bar A N Note By default empty layouts are set up to use 8 5 x 11 sheets of paper wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 Presentation mode Working with layouts To modify layout settings 1 2 Select the layout for which you want to modify the settings From the Options menu choose View Options Tip You can also use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Eal Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options Ei Ea Presentation Name Micro Layout Background Colour lw GridOn Colour T Show placeholders only Paper Size
46. Report and adds the ability for lighting professionals to explore their designs in a 3D environment 3D CAD tools shaded and isometric views and photo realistic rendering tools are added as well as the ability to create and store images of lighting looks using the integrated design tools WYSIWYG Design is also available in an educational edition This product WYSIWYG Design Educational Edition is a fully functional version of Design that is available to Students and faculty at a special price Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Report 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Extended library includes textures and materials Library objects are multi layered for realistic texturing Objects have variable translucency Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Loading and exporting of DXF DWG SketchUp Excel BMP and J PG file types Print all view types including 3D views bitmap files Jpeg files soreadsheets and logos Integrated design mode allows creation of static lighting looks without a console Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your lighting look Rendering wizard provides options for smoke shadows ambient light and so on Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces Background Render
47. Right click anywhere in the wireframe view and then choose Finish Quick Focus To assign a pan and tilt angle Note For more information on Quick Tools see Quick tools on page 208 From the Tools menu choose Quick Tools In the dialog box that opens check Focus Type values in degrees for Pan and Tilt Click OK Click on each fixture you want oriented to the specified angle o o A Oo N Right click anywhere in the wireframe view and then choose Finish Guick Tools To focus from the fixture s properties Select the fixtures that you want to focus Right click and choose Properties Click the Fixture tab Type values in degrees for Pan Ti t and Spin or select a focus position from the drop down list A o N Note For the definitions of these attributes please refer to Data fields on page 240 5 Click OK Fixture specific focusing tools All fixture specific focusing tools such as shuttering spotting flooding and lens changes are available through the selected fixture s properties on the Shutter Lens and Fixture pages respectively To make shutter cuts 1 Select the fixtures for which you want to make shutter cuts 2 Right click and choose Properties 3 Click the Fixture tab WYSIWYG Reference Guide 201 CAD mode Release 19 0 4 Click the Shutters tab Note The POV image is not available when a fixture is zoomable or articulable Properties RS E x General Appearance Lig
48. The name of the fixture color gobo accessories library or truss as listed in the library is displayed in the Type box 3 For fixtures you can modify the type of lens and lamp associated with the fixture by selecting the appropriate option from the Lens and Lamp drop down lists respectively Click Properties to view the properties of the library entry When you are satisfied with your selections click OK To apply a texture to a library object You can alter the appearance of library objects by applying textures to them You can choose from 1000s of textures in the WYSIWYG library or you can apply a custom texture that you have saved as a graphic file on your computer for example bmp or jpg Note Since most library objects are small with complex surfaces it is best to apply even plain textures to them Complicated textures containing text or other recognizable images will not display properly on small irregular surfaces 1 Once you have inserted the library object in your plot click on it to select it and then right click and select Properties 2 Click the Appearance tab wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode In the left pane highlight the elements of the library item to which you want to apply the texture and then click the type of texture file that you want to use either from the Library or a custom texture that you have saved Use Texture from Library Click this option to apply a tex
49. WYSIWYG beyond your Membership expiry date however you will not be able to access software updates until you renew your Membership Contact your local WYSIWYG dealer to purchase a renewal for your Membership Cast Software provides you with the Membership code that you require WYSIWYG Reference Guide 45 46 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 19 0 To renew your Membership 1 From the Help menu choose Renew Membership Membership How to Renew Your WYSIWYG Membership Your WY SWYD Membership is valid far a specific period of time You can continue to use WYSIG beyond the expiry date however you will not have access to the latest updates of WY SIWYG until ynu have renewed your Membership 25 Membership Expiry D ate Dec 2007 Serial Code FFLF3F JE Example CKA CFGASGF Renew Cancel More Info The date when your WYSIWYG Membership expires is displayed in the Membership Expiry Date box In the Membership Code box type the code The code is 10 alphanumeric characters long Verify that you have entered the correct information Click Renew Exit WYSIWYG and then restart the software for the renewal to take effect Note If you would like to renew your Membership but are unsure of who to contact click More nfo to obtain a list of WYSIWYG dealers wysiwyg March 2007 b Passwords Installation configuration activation and registration I ntroduct
50. You can display the columns in any order by arranging the order in this list The top of the list represents the left hand column on the page and the bottom of the list represents the right hand column To move a column up or down in the list click its name and then use the Up and Down buttons Note There is a special column in the Columns list called Count The Count column displays the total of all fixtures that meet the unique requirements of all the filters applied to all columns Filters Contains settings for the column that you selected from the Columns list You can use filters to extract specific information from reports For example you can create a report that displays all the fixtures that have notes To do so select the Notes column and the Visible check box and then select the filter Not Empty You will also have to make Position Unit and Channel visible so that you know which fixtures have these notes Sums After you select either the Count or Status column from the list select one of the following types of sums to be displayed on the report m Report Total Select if you want to include the total for the report m Group Total Select if you want to report totals for all groups a Duplicate Lines Only available if you have selected the Status column Select if you want to report the total of all duplicate lines Sort By Contains the settings for how the report will be sorted The keys sort fixtures in alphabetical
51. a 36 5 17 0 IY Landscape Interval 100 125 Units Metic amp Imperial Tile Printing lw Show page guides Show page number Tile Options Top Lef Centre Split Centre Presentation tab Options on the Presentation tab affect the appearance and printout of the layout WYSIWYG Reference Guide Name The name of the layout Background Color Sets the background color of the layout view This does not affect your printed copy Grid On Select this check box if you want gridlines to appear on the layout Gridlines are for reference only they assist with the design of items on the page Gridlines do not appear in the printed output Color Sets the color of the gridlines Show placeholders only Select this check box to display only the placeholders for the various items in the layout If unchecked both the placeholders and contents of the items in the layout are displayed This is to facilitate the layout setup and does not affect the printout Snap Select this check box to snap the items in the layout to the gridlines Interval Specify the interval between the points on the grid Units The units of measurement for the layout The coordinates at the bottom of the layout change according to the selection This does not affect the printed output Paper Size Choose the desired paper size from the drop down menu If you do not find the size you want choose Custom and then sp
52. and or moon e 54 G PM which is also affected by the geographic settings GMT Difference 00 00 configured in Show F Options Light Quality Long 0 00 Lat 0 00 defines the brightness of Light Quality the rendering Set the softness of shadows created by sunlight using the Soft Shadow slider M Soft Shadow Enable soft shadow Options in Step 6 affect the presence and quality of environmental or outdoor lighting Note that for environmental lighting to have an effect your show must not be contained within a venue b Environmental Lighting To generate a rendering that considers outdoor lighting conditions select the Environmental Lighting check box Date and Time The date and time of the rendering determines the position of the sun and or moon and the resulting amount of light available The position of the sun is also determined by the geographic settings that are configured in Show Options and the north direction that is set in CAD mode For more information on regional settings refer to Regional settings tab on page 94 For more information on setting the direction that is north refer to Drawing a compass on page 150 c Light Quality The amount of light available determines the brightness of the resulting rendering Use the Light Quality slider to adjust the quality of light d Soft Shadow Click the Enable soft shadow check box and then use the slider to set the softness of shadow
53. are in a plot view and want to determine what a particular position references click Se ect If the plot view is open and the correct layers are marked editable the hang structures that use that position name are selected To select more than one position press CTRL and then click the position Click OK to close the Position Manager Hang structure properties Options on the Hang Structure tab affect the properties of the selected hang structure s Properties 1 Eb i x General Appearance Light Emission Hang Structure Fipe Frosimity Alerts Name Py z Ea W AutoL nit r Hang Options M Shap Interval re W Use Document Defaults Number of fixtures 3 Fixture weight 22 49 lbs WYSIWYG Reference Guide Name Select a new name for the hang structure from the Name drop down list Click the ellipsis button to open the Position Manager and create new names AutoUnit Select this check box to automatically assign a number to each fixture that you hang Fixtures are automatically renumbered if you add a new fixture into the middle of a row of fixtures This option is available for pipes only and does not apply to truss Snap Select this check box to hang fixtures on the pipe at a certain interval as specified in the nterva box Interval Type the distance between fixtures in this box This option is used for pipe snaps Use Document Defaults Select this check box to use the interval for pipe
54. axes In isometric views the working axes and the missing coordinate are dependent on the workplane selected The workplanes available are E P plan E side 7 5 front we wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode If a plan workplane is selected the working axes are X and Y and the missing coordinate is Z If a side workplane is selected the working axes are Y and Z and the missing coordinate IS X If a front workplane is selected the working axes are X and Z and the missing coordinate is Y The crosshairs of your cursor change to reflect the selected workplane Note sometric views are not available in WYSIWYG Report Ortho Ortho mode constrains movement and drawing to a direction parallel to the specified axis When ortho mode is inactive objects can be drawn or moved in any direction on the workplane You can draw diagonal lines or move objects anywhere in the working area Y 2 You can activate ortho at any time by clicking the ortho tools on the CAD Options toolbar or by right clicking the Ortho label on the status bar You can also press F8 on the keyboard or double click the Ortho label on the status bar to toggle your last recorded ortho setting on or off Notes m The plot type determines the axes of movement XY for plan views YZ for side views XZ for front and back views E To select the axes of movement with the toolbar buttons click the appropriate two buttons to select both of them For example to cho
55. be given a registration validation code to be entered into Y S YG have my validation code Note You can postpone registration for a period of up to 15 days after installation 42 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Installation configuration activation and registration To register later click Register Later You must register and obtain a Registration Validation Code to continue using the product after this time It is recommended that you register as soon as possible to avoid any restrictions on using the product You can register by phone online fax or e mail To register by phone click Phone and then proceed to step 3 To register by any of the other methods select the appropriate button and follow the instructions as prompted When you have obtained your validation code click have my validation code and then proceed to step 4 If you have chosen to register by phone the Register by Phone dialog box is displayed Register by Phone Please call any one of the phone numbers below with your Registration Request Code While you are on the phone you will be given a 11 digit Registration Validation Code Simply enter this in the space provided and click the Register button 87r 989 2278 or 416 597 2278 Americas 44 011494 446000 United Kingdom 49 Dl 5254 930 69 0 Germany 03 37065611 Japan Serial Code for pour reference xG Falk Registration Reque
56. browser window wysiwyg gt March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode In the browser click the file name and then click Open Result The Se ect DWG Settings dialog box is displayed Select DXF DWG Settings For Import a 2 x Scale Layer Di w la DF iz in Meters Millimeters mewo Ji Dx FUntTe fl Feet Select the unit type used in the DWG DXF drawing Click the Layer tab Select DXF DWG Settings For Import NE 2 x Scale Layer Layer Name Import Single Sided Clear All i w Import sillon rojo dona DE Single Sided Orientation Defaut Reversed OF Cancel Highlight the layers that you want to import Note that you do not need to import all the layers at once Refer to Importing scenario on page 122 for suggestions on how to import the various layers For each layer that you want to import ensure that the mport check box is checked If you do not want to import a certain layer highlight it and deselect this checkbox To import a single sided layer highlight it and click to place a check mark beside the Single Sided checkbox Note Single sided layers use less processor time to display in Shaded views and to render in the Render Wizard However they only appear properly in each of these views if the faces of the object are drawn facing outward Unless you know how the CAD file was drawn it Is recommended that you l
57. check the appropriate box Click Next Add or modify the path Note The path is the location in the library where the item will be stored An item assigned to the path Custom Tables would be available in the custom section of the items library in a sub category named Tables Click Next Type all pertinent information including manufacturer weight and any notes Click Next Type your name Click Finish Result The custom item is placed in the item library as per the path specified in step 3 151 CAD mode Release 19 0 b Editing objects Selecting Before you can manipulate objects you must select them Selected objects are easily identifiable a white box appears at the insertion point and the lines of the object become dotted Fixtures that are selected are filled in green and their beams can be set to either on or off Use the following table to identify the selection method for objects Desired action Selection method Select a single object a Click on the object Select multiple objects Press and hold CTRL while clicking on the desired objects a Draw a box from left to right to select all objects fully within the box a Draw a box from right to left to select all objects fully within the box as well as the objects partially contained in the box Select all the objects on the a Press and hold CTRL SHIFT and type A current layer or use the Select Current Layer tool on the Selection toolba
58. creation toggle Space Repeat last command Ctrl A Select all Ctrl Shift A Select current layer Ctrl C Copy Ctrl F Find Ctrl G Group Ctrl H Replace Ctrl M Move Ctrl N New document Ctrl O Open document Ctrl P Print current view Ctrl R Rotate Ctrl S Save current document Ctrl U Ungroup Ctrl V Paste Ctrl X Cut WYSIWYG Reference Guide 391 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcut Ctri Y Ctril Z Ctrl Click Ctri Drag Alt Drag Alt Arrow keys Alt Shift Arrow keys Alt Enter Arrow keys Ctri arrow keys Page Up Page Down Del ESC Hot keys Release 19 0 Description Redo Undo Add to or remove from selection list Copy selected objects Rotate selected objects Nudges selected objects in 10 increments Nudges selected objects in 1 increments Displays properties of selected object Move target Rotates around the drawing in isometric view only Zoom in and out Erases selected object Abort command Hot keys are keyboard shortcuts that act as commands entered from menus or toolbars They are categorized according to the view and timing of usage For example certain hot keys are only operational in plot views and only in the midst of performing an operation Default hot keys available in Plot Views The following default hot keys are useful when working in CAD mode 392 wysiwyg March 2007 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Start Operations Des
59. different color a Enable Dynamic Intensity Click this check box to control the intensity of the light emitting surface in Live Mode when connected to a console Then choose the patch properties below a Maximum Intensity Select the maximum intensity value of the light emitting Surface when connected to a console and viewed in Live mode with 100 being the brightest possible intensity This value enables you to control the scale of the intensity over a series of light emitting surfaces When you disconnect from the console the intensity is fixed at the static value Note The DMX intensity value is treated as a percentage of the dynamic intensity value For example a DMX value of 127 results in 50 of the maximum intensity value that you set m Single Patch Select this value to apply a single address that controls the intensity of the surface as a whole a Multi Patch Select this value if you want to choose different addresses for each individual element in the grid With multiple addresses you can make different parts of the grid have varying intensity levels 12 Click Next Based on your patch settings a different window appears Consult the appropriate procedure below Single Patch DMX Address Light Emitting Surface Wizard y E 2 xl Single Patch DMX Address Specify the DMS address For the Single Patch Specify the single addresses For controlling color and intensity The address that ynu select for each attr
60. emitting color that the object will have in all shaded views and renderings in all modes CAD Design Live However if you set the dynamic color value as well then you can control the light emitting color of the object in Live mode when connected to a console The static value still applies in Design mode Intensity Choose the static intensity of the light emission for the selected object If you set only this value and not the Dynamic Intensity Control then this is the maximum light emitting intensity that the object will have in all shaded views and renderings in all modes CAD Design Live However if you set the dynamic intensity value as well then you can control the light emitting intensity of the object in Live mode when connected to a console The static value still applies in Design mode Dynamic Color Control Universe When you select a value from this drop down box the selected object will have light emitting properties controllable by three DMX channels red blue green The object must be patched according to the WYSIWYG patch notation universe DMX address From the drop down box select the patch universe of the selected object and then type the starting DMX address in the Address box below it If you set this value it overrides the static color control that you chose above if any in Live mode when you are connected to a console 159 CAD mode 160 Release 19 0 Dynamic Color Control Address After sel
61. fixtures on one position by dragging the entire position out of the Flight Case Selecting a fixture in your drawing and pressing the Backspace key will return the fixture to the Flight Case The fixture will retain the position assignment To insert a hang structure from the Flight Case If you drag a position from the Flight Case you will create a pipe Oo Ff o N Expand the Positions branch to see all the hang structures Click and hold on the position that you want to insert Drag the pipe onto the drawing Release the mouse button Use the pop up dialog box to answer the questions about the trim height and length of the pipe or use the nteractive button to draw the pipe in interactive mode Result If you do not choose interactive mode the pipe is inserted centered on the origin at the trim height specified Note Multiple positions can have the same name For more information about inserting pipes please refer to Drawing pipes on page 144 To insert a focus position from the Flight Case 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Expand the Focus Positions branch in the flight case to see all the Focus positions that have not yet been placed in the drawing Click and hold on the focus position that you want to insert into the drawing Drag the Focus position onto the drawing 233 CAD mode Release 19 0 4 Release the mouse button to place the focus position Flight Case properties The Flight Case properties aff
62. flip its faces so they are oriented in the opposite direction before you import the object click Reversed otherwise leave Default selected Note If the imported object does not appear correctly in the Shaded view you can change its sidedness by using the Properties window You can change it from single sided to double sided or vice versa You can also flip the object s sides if the wrong side is currently facing outward For details see To change an object s sidedness on page 161 10 Click OK Result The Block Load window appears 2x Block Found LIU Would you like to perform one of the following actions to the block Explode Do for all Convert into Library ltem Replace with Fixture Ignore block 11 If you have blocks in your drawing you have the option of exploding the blocks converting them into a library item or substituting WYSIWYG fixtures for the existing blocks Note 3D solids are automatically placed inside blocks by AutoCAD and assigned an abstract block name for example X1 The number of blocks that are found are dependent upon the number of solids that were in the AutoCAD file You will be prompted to determine what action to take for each type of block For more information on these options see Exploding the block on page 120 12 After you have made your selection click OK 13 If you decided to substitute fixtures for blocks in step 10 you are prom
63. handles the logistics it automatically generates plots schedules pipe tapes and color and gobo lists For more information on each of the three main levels of WYSIWYG see the appropriate section E WYSI WYG Report For details see WYSIWYG Report on page 17 m WYSI WYG Design For details see WYSIWYG Design on page 18 m WYSIWYG Perform For details see WYSIWYG Perform on page 20 wysiwyg amp WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 2 The WYSIWYG suite of software products This chapter describes the different levels of WYSIWYG In this chapter WYSIWYG Report WYSIWYG Design WYSIWYG Perform WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition WYSIWYG Learn WYSIWYG Network WYSI Link 17 18 20 22 24 26 27 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 19 0 wysiwyg o gt March 2007 The WYSIWYG suite of software products b WYSI WYG Report Introduction WYSIWYG Report is the basic WYSIWYG package It allows lighting professionals to create 2D plans of their productions along with all the necessary paperwork WYSIWYG Report is also available in an educational edition This product WYSIWYG Report Educational Edition is a fully functional version of Report that is available to Students and faculty at a special price Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features u 2D plotting of set and lighting designs plans sections and elevations m Comprehensive 3D
64. high quality images of your set and lighting Rendering uses a full range of effects including depth of field motion blur soft shadows and antialiasing settings to produce a photorealistic image Based on the product level that you are running when you are creating a rendering you have two choices Render Wizard all product levels except Report You can use the interactive editing and advanced visual effects of the Render Wizard to set up the look that you want to render and then create the rendering In this case you must leave WYSIWYG running while the Render Wizard finishes the image You have the choice of saving the image to an external folder that you specify or within WYSIWYG on the mages tab Background Rendering Manager all product levels except Report and Perform Console Edition You can use the Render Wizard to set up the look that you want to render and then send the render job to the Background Rendering Manager to create the rendering This feature lets you use the Windows taskbar to queue render jobs that will execute in the background without requiring WYSIWYG to run letting you do other tasks while the Render Engine works independently You can alSo pause and resume renderings without losing your render and shut down restart your computer without losing your rendering progress For details on this feature see Background Rendering Manager on page 285 To render a lighting look 1 2 In the working are
65. hung This option is available for pipes only It does not apply to truss m Snap Select this check box to enable pipe snap Pipe snap places fixtures on a pipe at a specific interval as specified in the nterval box For information on snaps refer to Pipe snap on page 198 m Enforce Spacing Select this check box to indicate that the spacing you specify in the Minimum Spacing box is enforced m Minimum Spacing Type the minimum spacing between fixtures This option prevents you from hanging the fixtures too close to one another The minimum spacing cannot be greater than the value you specify in the nterval box m Interval Type the distance between fixtures This option is used for pipe snaps m Line up symbols Select this check box to line up fixture symbols at specific angles and then select an increment from the drop down list Symbols will shift from their focused position to the nearest increment of the chosen angle For example symbols will be drawn in one of four directions when the increment is set to 90 degrees This setting does not affect the focus of the beam rather it is intended for the cleanliness of the printed plot 7 Weight Type the default weight of a line when it is printed or viewed using print preview m Manu Type the manufacturer s code for those fixtures that are autofocus compatible m Prod Type the product code for those fixtures that are autofocus compatible 7 Facet Splitting Selec
66. if you have files in which the PAR64M component is always a PAR 64 fixture with an MFL bulb you have the option of telling WYSIWYG to automatically import the component in that way To do this select the Remember for future imports check box in the Library Browser that is displayed To change this option edit the import lst file that is created in the Library folder usually C Program Files WYSIWYG Library once the first fixture is set to be remembered for future imports Note WYSIWYG creates a pipe for every imported fixture since fixtures in WYSIWYG need to hang on a hang structure If however fixtures are on a straight pipe represented by a straight line in the SketchUp file WYSIWYG will convert the entire line into a pipe wysiwyg gt March 2007 CAD mode 12 After you have made your selection click OK 13 If you chose Select Basepoint with mouse in step 5 click to place the object in the drawing 14 If you decided to substitute fixtures for components in step 11 you are prompted to select the fixtures from the WYSIWYG library Importing DWG DXF files When importing a DWG DXF file into WYSIWYG you have two options m You can open a DWG DXF file a You can merge a DWG DXF file into an existing WYSIWYG document If you open a DWG or DXF while another show document is currently open you are prompted to save changes to that document before another show document is opened Only one show document may be open a
67. in the drawing to finish placing the arc Drawing text labels To draw a text label 1 From the Draw menu choose Text Label Tip You can also use the 7ext Labe tool on the Draw toolbar T In the 7ext box type the desired text Type a height for the text This is similar to selecting a font size The default value is 2 O Click on the drawing to place the text label Note a You cannot change the font for text labels in CAD mode a The insertion point for the text label is at the intersection of the crosshairs To set alignment for a text label Oo Ff o N Select the text label for which you want to change the justification Right click and then choose Properties Click the Text Label tab Set the horizontal and vertical justification as desired Select the Align to View check box to ensure the text label is legible in all view types plan left right front back and isometric Click OK Result The text label is relocated around the insertion point based on the options selected wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Drawing dimension lines Dimension lines are 2D objects They have a start and end point and measure and display the distance covered based on the measurement mode selected The measurement modes available are X Y XY XZ YZ and XYZ The dimension will only be visible in one view type The view type is set when the dimension is drawn and is dependent on the plot type and workplane in wh
68. installation from CD the textures are automatically installed However if you performed a Typical installation the textures are not included In this case you must use the Windows Add or Remove Programs utility to run the installer again and choose Modify to load the texture files Installations from the Web If you downloaded WYSIWYG from the WYSIWYG Web site you will need to download and install the Texture Pack separately To install the Texture Pack from CD While installing WYSIWYG from CD in step 8 of the install Wizard you are prompted to choose the Setup Type If you choose Full the WYSIWYG textures are automatically installed However if you accept the default Typical installation you will have to install the Texture Pack separately as detailed below o o A O N If WYSIWYG is running close the program Click Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs Click Change or Remove Programs From the list of installed programs select WYSIWYG and then click Change Remove Insert the WYSIWYG CD into your computer The InstallShield Wizard appears In the Welcome window click Modify and then click Next Result The Select Components window appears WYSIWYG Setup Select Components Select the components setup will install Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do mot want to install M7 Program Fies in E Template Files Desc
69. items onto the layout on page 326 Printing New Plots If you have a large plot you can tile print the plot across multiple smaller sheets of paper To set up how you want the plot arranged on the sheets of paper refer to the Tile Printing tab on page 307 You can print your complete plot or specific pages of your plot based on the settings that you choose Note Objects outside the border are not printed even if they are within the margins of the page To adjust the margins refer to Modifying the properties of a plot on page 305 To print your plot 1 From the File menu choose Print Result The Print dialog box is displayed Print E4 Ea Printer Name WMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T PS Properties Shatus Ready Type HP Lazeret 4050 Seres PS Where HP4050T Comment Print to file amp All Number of copies l Pages from l to 35 Selection mud mud tollat Cancel 2 From the Name drop down list choose the printer or plotter that you want to use WYSIWYG records the name that you choose for future reference and displays it as the default printer for plots To print all pages of a plot select A To print select pages of a plot select Pages and then enter the range in the from and to boxes 5 To print multiple copies of the pages select the value from the Number of copies list box 6 Click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 319 Presentation mode
70. library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on 7 Extensive CAD tools m Excellent zooming and maneuvering abilities E Custom layers and scenes for complete control and management of information m Loading and exporting of DXF DWG SketchUp Excel BMP and J PG file types m Tabular editing of lighting information including channel dimmer color and so on m Fully integrated paperwork and 2D CAD systems E Error checking of production paperwork and hookups m Reports including instrument counts and schedules patch sheets and so on 7 Printing of plots and reports up to 36 x 48 AO m Custom report and plot content and layout E Ability to print all view types including 2D CAD reports spreadsheets bitmap files jpeg files and logos m Multi monitor support m 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions m A faster processor improves responsiveness 7 Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity Modes The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Report m CAD 2D m DATA H PRES 2D Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 17 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 19 0 b WYSI WYG Design Introduction WYSIWYG Design builds on the feature set of
71. looks below Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list Click on the shortcut for your new look oN O o Use the design tools to create your new lighting look Tip To build on an existing look without losing it clone the look shortcut and work from the copy of the shortcut For more information on cloning shortcuts refer to To clone a shortcut on page 57 Cross fading between lighting looks You can use the Looks shortcut bar to guickly set up and run timed transitions between lighting looks without the need of a lighting console When you create a lighting look you can specify its fade time in seconds This is the amount of time that it takes to fade to this look when you click on it from another look in the shortcut bar You can create multiple looks and specify different fade times for each of them Once you create the look and specify the fade time you can use the design tools to customize the look For example you can add color gobos and intensity to lighting and set the position of moving lights When you switch from one look to the next you can see the movement of the lights from one position to the next along with any changes you have made between looks such as color intensity and so on To cross fade between looks In Design mode in the shortcuts bar click Looks In the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look In
72. measurement or Imm metric measurement Scale The scale at which the plot is drawn If the scale you want to use for printing is not displayed select Custom The default values are 1 4 1 0 imperial measurement or 1 50 metric measurement On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the plot view Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On paper box For example you may want to use a scaling of one Inch in a paper copy of your plot This one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the scene that is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Click to clear the check box and then select wysiwyg March 2007 Presentation mode the desired scene from the Scene drop down list For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 174 m Units The units of measurement for the plot The coordinates at the bottom of the plot change according to the selection This setting does not affect the printed output u Print in Black and White Select this check box if you want the plot to be displayed and printed in black and white Tile Printing tab Options on the Tle Printing tab affect the printout of the plot View Options kita New Plot View Properties Tile Printing Fixture Details Tile Printing l Show page guides l Show page number
73. menu choose Key item Tip You can also click the Key tool in the Pres Layout Insert toolbar 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Key to be referenced dialog box is displayed Select Legend to be referenced Cancel symbal WYSIWYG Reference Guide 339 Presentation mode Release 19 0 3 Select the key that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result Your key appears within the placeholder as drawn By default key items are set to a scale of 1 16 1 Key Colour FZE Linit Centerstoge Focus Le Z Drg ryuel Cir Chit Patch Modifying the properties of a key To modify the properties of a key 1 On the layout select the key that you want to modify 2 From the Edit menu choose Item Properties Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Pres Layout Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties E x General Key Outline Weight E Colour L Fill None Fill Colour The Genera tab is similar for all items For more information on this tab see To modify item properties on page 327 Key tab Options on the Key tab affect the scaling and content of the placeholder di wysiwyg March 2007 Properties kita General Key mE pem hy paper Real Word Presentation mode Key Select the key that you want to be
74. minutes and Keep backup files enabled Save external textures within the document Select this check box if you want the jpeg and or bitmap used as textures to be saved within your WYSIWYG document The textures will travel with the document and will be visible regardless of the computer on which the document is opened Reload last document on startup Select this check box to ensure that the last document that you have been working on in WYSIWYG is loaded automatically when you launch WYSIWYG Default to Read Only Select this check box to load documents in read only format This format is helpful if you are loading someone else s document and you do not want to accidentally make changes to it Reset DWG import association Click this button to reset the association of specific blocks in DWG files with certain pre selected fixtures When you import DWG files one of the options is to associate a block that is found in a DWG file with a specific fixture If you decide to remember this association for future imports all blocks with that name will be imported as the chosen fixture Direct3D tab Options on the D rect3D tab affect the setting of the DirectX components to be used for graphics You can select these components manually or have them automatically detected By default WYSIWYG uses Open GL graphics technology in all simulation views If you want you can set WYSI WYG to use Direct 3D instead of Open GL in which case the follo
75. must also change it in the Background Rendering Manager on the destination computer For details see To configure the Background Rendering Manager on page 286 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Step 2 Set Camera and Simulation Type Ei Render Wizard Step 2 Set Camera and Simulation Type m General Scene r gt Simulation Options Camera Long Shot front d Aperture sizes Mn nno onn ndod Ambient Light 18 m Simulation Type WireFrame Regular C Light Up JV Pan tool moves objects Design mode lt Back Next gt Add Shortcut Finish Options in Step 2 affect the composition of your image Scene Select a scene for the rendering Scenes are groupings of layers used to organize a plot For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 174 Camera Select the camera for the rendering Cameras are set up in CAD mode For more information on cameras refer to Drawing cameras on page 149 If you select a camera you can adjust its aperture This adjustment changes the depth of field of the final image The larger the aperture the fuzzier the rendering The focus point is always the target of the camera Camera target By default the red lines of the target are visible This is to aid in the composition of the image It will not however be visible in your final rendering To turn the target off t
76. network appears in the right pane when you select a server from the server list Click on a key to obtain the following information m key number a label used only for identification purposes m key s hard limit that is the maximum number of licenses that can be obtained from the dongle and therefore the maximum number of users that can access WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network m number of licenses currently in use on the dongle m highest number of licenses issued from this dongle u number of time outs recorded by the Server for Clients using licenses from the dongle ae wysiwyg March 2007 Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool Searching for a server If a server does not appear in the list you can search for it on the network To search for a server 1 From the View menu choose Find Result The Find Server dialog box is displayed Find Server x Serer Name List of servers to find Add Server Delete Serve Cancel 2 In the Server Name box type the host name or IP address of the server that you are looking for Click Add Server to add the server to the list of servers to find Click Find Server to search for the server If the server is found it appears in the server list in the left pane Note Once a server has been added to the list of servers to search for it remains on the list until you remove it To remove a server from the list select the server and then click Delete Server Refreshing t
77. new pipe If the name is not already in the list use the Position Manager to enter the new name Repeat to draw more pipes Click OK 189 CAD mode Release 19 0 Pipe properties Options on the Pipe tab affect the mode offset and dimensions of a pipe Properties NN x General Appearance Light Emission Hang Structure Pipe Proximity Alerts Pipe Mode Start M Offset Type Noma Cx CY C2 Origin jon Length Ein Tim Height 200 m Pipe mode Select the pipe mode for the specific pipe The available modes are a Start If enabled pipes are drawn from one end to the other When start mode is used offset is measured from the beginning of the pipe in a positive direction a Centre If enabled pipes are drawn from the center out to both ends at the same time When center mode is used offset values are either positive or negative measured from the center of the pipe m Offset Type Offset is a fixture property that measures where a fixture is hung on a pipe The value depends on the pipe mode selected Pipes can also base the Offset on a specified coordinate In this case a fixture s offset value is calculated as the distance on the specified axis from the specified coordinate This is handy if you have many small pipes grouped together to form one hang position for example the Balcony Rail If this is the case choose all the pipes properties to have their Offset based abou
78. next you can see the object move from the Starting point of the first look to the starting point of the second look wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode To view moving scenery Note Before you perform this procedure you must have drawn at least one movement axis and attached at least one object to it For details see Drawing movement axes on page 146 O O N O O FP O N 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WYSIWYG Reference Guide In Design mode in the shortcuts bar click Looks In the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list Click on the shortcut for your new look Click the Moving Scenery Designer Tool icon n From the drop down list in the Scenery window select the appropriate movement axis Click the slider to advance the object to the position where you want it to start on the selected axis Note You can also use the Start box to type the object s position as a percentage of its full range of movement For example to show the object at the exact half way mark on the movement axis type 50 To create the next look in the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds f
79. one release installed skip to step 4 wy5slwyt Update InstallShield Wizard Qualifying Product s Detected Select the product to update Setup has detected the following product s an your computer that qualifies for this update Update the product selected below Install Location wsiwyn C Program Files w C Program Files Sl wy wsiwy C Program Fies C Program Files Ww Sw 2 wswyn C Program Fiese C Program Filessw Sl wad WSW rG C Program Fiesse C Program FilesswY Sl wd 2 petala new copy of this product Ehocee thie opion ihi you gynted Teather retell the update as a separate product Ihe femathing produce on pour computer wil nat be updated lnetallehreld 4 Back Cancel Select Update the product selected below From the list of WYSIWYG releases highlight the release that you want to update and then click Next On the WYSIWYG Update window select Next wy STG Update x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for wy slwy G The Installs Field Wizard will update the installed version 1 05 203 of Wr SIW TYG to version 1 6 279 To continue click Next 4 Hal Cancel March 2007 Installation configuration activation and registration 5 On the WYS WYG Update window click Yes to accept the terms of the license WYSIWYG Update o x License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to s
80. operation of the different levels of the WYSIWYG application WYSIWYG is available at the following levels WYSIWYG Report WYSIWYG Design WYSIWYG Perform WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition WYSIWYG Learn WYSIWYG Network All levels are discussed in this manual For a detailed description of the levels refer to Chapter 2 The WYSIWYG suite of software products All the levels use the same user interface described in Chapter 4 WYSIWYG user interface However you can perform different tasks in each mode For example you draw in CAD mode and edit in Data mode These modes may have different features based on the level of WYSIWYG that you are running Text conventions The following text conventions are used in this manual WYSIWYG Reference Guide Menus and menu commands appear in Arial bold For example from the Edit menu choose Layers User interface elements such as buttons tools shortcuts and dialog boxes appear in 7ahoma Oblique For example to draw a riser click the Riser tool on the Draw toolbar Keyboard keys are indicated in ALL CAPS For example press TAB to enter the missing coordinate References to manuals appear in italic font For example for additional information on working with recorded loads please refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual Introduction Release 19 0 b Troubleshooting Introduction If you have problems using your software please consult
81. options selected and the complexity of the scenery and lighting it may take some time to complete Best Add Shortcut Finish ZOOMOFF 405 5 100x75 Z Options in Step 8 affect the antialiasing settings Antialiasing is a method of Smoothing out and sharpening rough or jagged edges of images to produce a more polished result This method subsamples the pixel area and averages the results of neighboring samples to reduce the areas of high contrast edges a Antialiasing Options Choose how you want edges to appear in your final rendering The Fast method samples the pixels quickly but does not produce the highest quality 282 wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode When you click Finish the real rendering takes place The total rendering time depends on the options that you selected and the complexity of the scenery and lighting Based on the location where you chose to save the completed rendering in Step 1 your options vary upon clicking Finish Internal and External I mages If you chose to save the rendering internally or externally then you can minimize the Render Wizard window and continue working on other parts of your document as it renders You can use the arrow keys PAGE UP PAGE DOWN mouse or scroll bars to explore the picture as It Is being produced The final image is saved to the destination you specified in step l Background Rendering Manager Images If you sent the render job to the B
82. or connect to a console Presentation mode Presentation Pres mode contains all the tools necessary for creating professional printouts of your show document including reports plots and images As with all other modes the contents of the Pres mode are continually updated as you draw input data and modify your show file In addition to being able to create your own plots WYSWIYG provides a series of default plots and reports that are ready for printout These defaults can be used as is or customized to suit your preferences Live mode Live mode is used for graphically simulating the output of a lighting control console or compatible offline editor This is where you can pre cue and visualize your show Live mode also has rendering ability so that you can create photo realistic pictures of the simulated lighting looks Unlike Design mode Live mode will display transitions from cue to cue allowing you to see the programmed movement of light over time Link mode The WYSI Link Link mode becomes available when you purchase and install the WYSI Link add on for WYSIWYG WYSI Link acts as an interface to ETCLink and monitors the Sensor line of dimmers When a problem with a fixture is detected data about the fixture is logged in Link mode and the image of the affected fixture is highlighted on your plot You can also use this mode to record and play backup looks and view information on dimmers and dimmer racks in your system Availabilit
83. or numeric order When fixtures have the same value in the first sort Key the report is then sorted by the values of the second sort key and so on for the third sort key For example the standard Instrument Schedule sorts fixtures by position as Key 1 and unit number as Key 2 When a column is selected as a key the visible option will be checked and greyed out Columns that are sort keys must be visible Detail Level Specify how many rows each fixture spans For example if you select Fixtures a three cell cyc light will take up one row If you select Circuits that same fixture will take up three rows one for each cell circuit To issue a report for truss select 7russ in the Detail Level box 299 Presentation mode 300 Release 19 0 Word Wrap Select tf you want to see all the text on a line To create a new report A N Click the Reports shortcut tab Right click in the reports shortcut area and then choose New Report Type the name of your new report Click OK Result Your report shortcut is placed at the bottom of the list Tip It is recommended that you clone an existing report and modify it rather than creating a new report Redesigning headings You can customize the fonts styles and layouts used in the headings and text of your reports These settings can be applied to the headings of all reports in your document as desired To change the heading format 1 Right click the report and choose Re
84. queue or click Render ob Now to start rendering the job immediately Completed These are jobs that have been processed successfully However the actual rendering image still resides in the Background Rendering Manager To export the image to a folder of your choice highlight the completed job and then click Save Rendering Background Rendering Manager buttons The table below contains descriptions of the Background Rendering Manager buttons Use these descriptions as a guideline when managing the jobs in the queue Button Explanation Resume Rendering This button is enabled when you have paused all jobs in the Background Rendering Manager Click this button to resume the rendering process starting with the first job in the queue The rendering continues where it last left off Fe P imi Pause Rendering This button is enabled when the Background Rendering Manager is currently processing a render Job Click this button to pause all rendering activity in the Background Rendering Manager Show Log Window Click this button to show or hide the log window listing all status and error messages of the Background Rendering Manager Show Render Window Click this button to show or hide the window that shows the progress of the rendering w e Fe wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode Button Explanation x WYSIWYG Reference Guide Render Job Now When you have multiple render jobs in the queue waiting to be processe
85. size of the circle in which it will rotate To have the object rotate in a very tight circle for example a dancer doing a pirouette or a spinning object place the object directly on the center point of the axis 1 Place the object that you want to attach to the axis at the appropriate position in your drawing either by adding a new object or moving an existing object to this location Select the object right click and then choose Properties On the General tab from the Attach to Axis drop down box select the axis to which you want to attach this object 4 Click OK To add a vertex to a linear movement axis To change the path of an existing linear axis you can add one or more vertices and then drag these vertices to the new position 1 In your drawing click on the point of the axis at which you want to add a vertex 2 Right click and select Add Vertex Result The vertex Is added at the point where you clicked Tip To change the path of the axis click to select the axis and view all the vertices Click the desired vertex drag it to the new position and then release the mouse Any objects that are attached to the axis will now follow the new path Viewing moving scenery After you create the axes and attach the objects to them you can watch the objects move along the axes by using the Looks feature in Design mode J ust as you can simulate moving lights by cross fading between one lighting look to the next you can a
86. snap as defined on the Object settings tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Object Settings tab on page 92 Number of fixtures The number of fixtures on the hang structure Fixture weight The total weight of fixtures on the hang structure The weight measurement accounts for fixture weight only and does not consider cable or other safety ratings 187 CAD mode Release 19 0 Drawing pipes Pipes are single member hang structures Pipes can be set to be drawn from the center or from the start The first pipe drawing mode Draw from Start requires pipes to be drawn by specifying the start point and the end point from one extremity of the pipe to the other The second pipe drawing mode Draw from Center requires that the pipe be drawn by specifying the center point and one end point or extremity of the pipe Although it is only necessary to enter all points when drawing in interactive mode the pipe drawing mode will affect the insertion point of the pipe when drawing using the pipe dialog box The drawing mode will also affect how the fixtures are hung when using pipe snap how the fixture offset distance is measured and how pipe tape prints are labelled To set the pipe drawing mode 1 From the Options menu choose User Options 2 Click the User tab User Options FIR User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Current Scene Pipe drawing mode Draw from start
87. so on Easy hook up to consoles and other DMX sources Auto Focus protocol lets WYSIWYG send color and focus data to console Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your cue or lighting look Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces Background Rendering Manager that enables you to gueue up multiple renderings to run in the background without even requiring WYSIWYG to run Animated renderings available though certified service providers Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions Modes A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation The working modes available in WYSIWYG Network depend on your product configuration Refer to the WYSIWYG Report Design or Perform sections accordingly Detailed explanations of each of the various modes are included in this guide 26 wysiwyg March 2007 The WYSIWYG suite of software products lt gt WYSI Link Introduction WYSILink is an add on for WYSIWYG Report Design or Perform and inserts a mode button Link to the base product when installed It acts as an interface to ETCLink and monitors the Sensor line of dimmers When a problem
88. steps above 2 Click and drag one tool on top of another When you release the mouse the selected design tool lines up under the other Repeat step 2 for as many tools as will fit in a column If you overlay tools so that they are not completely visible click on the triangle in the tools title bar This expands or contracts the tool s window 5 If you click and drag a tool s title bar off the column it expands into its own window Using the Design tools Begin by selecting the desired fixtures To select fixtures Select a fixture or fixtures You can select multiple fixtures by holding the CTRL key while clicking on the fixture symbols You can also use concepts as described in Concepts on page 268 Tip You can also right click and drag a box around a section of your drawing to select fixtures This displays a context sensitive menu displaying all the fixture types contained within that box You can then easily select All Mac500 for example Result The selected fixtures are highlighted in green I ntensity tool To use the intensity tool The intensity tool provides many options for setting intensity levels Dial___ oft Full Intensity ineb fua Box al Click the buttons for the extreme settings of intensity Fu 10090 and Off 0 Use the dial to achieve any of the settings in between To use the dial click and hold the dial while you move the mouse up or down The chosen intensi
89. the Wireframe view To patch fixtures in the patch view 1 Click and hold the desired fixture in the Wireframe view 2 Drag the fixture to the desired patch location 3 For re patching repeat the above steps or click and drag the fixture s patch information to the new location To unpatch fixtures in the patch view 1 Select the fixture by clicking on the first channel start cell for that fixture It should become highlighted 2 Right click and choose Unpatch Result The fixture is unpatched the value in the patch field for that fixture is deleted To patch the control of a video source In WYSIWYG you patch the control of a video source not the actual video This means that you can use the console device to control the progress of a live video stream or a video file by making the video play pause or rewind you cannot use WYSIWYG to change different aspects of the video itself To control the video source the DMX patch is allocated three channels For details on controlling the video with the console device in Live mode see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 352 1 In the shortcut area click the Patch tab 2 Click the patch shortcut to which you have linked control of the video source Result The video patch appears in the patch universe 3 Open the console device that you have connected to the video DMX patch Using the console controls set the appropriate levels for the three ch
90. the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list o o A O N WYSIWYG Reference Guide 2 1 Design mode 2 2 Release 19 0 Click on the shortcut for your new look Use the design tools to create your new lighting look You can set the color intensity zoom iris and add gobos If you are using moving lights you can also set the position of the lights 9 To create the next look in the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look 10 Inthe Name box type the name of the new look 11 In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look 12 Click OK 13 Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list 14 Click on the shortcut for your new look 15 Use the design tools to create your new lighting look You can set the color intensity zoom iris and add gobos If you are using moving lights you can also set the position of the lights 16 Ensure that the Fade looks button is enabled so the look fades instead of jumping directly to the next look Tip If the button is not enabled then you can jump from one look to the next by clicking the look shortcuts in the shortcut bar Even if the button is enabled you can always jump to the next look by right clicking the look shortcut and selecting Jump to 17 To watch the fade from the first look to the second look click the shortcut for the second look The ima
91. the component of a multi circuit fixture or other device such as a scroller for example intensity control Purpose The purpose is a custom note that is most commonly used to describe how this fixture is being used in your show For example SL Side Diagonal Backs Purpose is an attribute of the fixture It is not possible to assign multiple purposes for multi circuit fixtures Color This is the assigned gel color number or scroller identification Gobo This is the assigned gobo number Focus This is the fixture s focus position Patch This is the fixture s assigned DMX channel number This field is mandatory for simulation activity in Live mode One show can have multiple DMX universes A patch entry must be notated universe where universe is a letter number or other label identifying the universe or output and is the DMX channel number For example A 1 or Dim 26 Circuit Name This is an identifier note for the circuit box or multi cable Circuit Number This is the assigned circuit or multi cable tail number Dimmer This is the assigned dimmer number Offset This field identifies the fixture s location on the hanging structure It is a distance measurement referencing the pipe s end or center point or another point as specified Pan A focus attribute measured in degrees defining the positioning of the fixtures yoke Tilt A focus attribute measured in degrees defining the posi
92. the following resources 7 the contents of this manual or the online Help available from within WYSIWYG u the wysiwyg Web site at www wysiwygsuite com If these resources are insufficient please contact Technical Support Help from Technical Support For assistance with a problem contact Technical Support directly at one of the offices identified below When calling for help please have the following information ready m the level of WYSIWYG that you are using Report Design or Perform m software version from the Help menu choose About WYSIWYG a the kind of computer that you are using processor and speed amount of memory graphics card operating system 5 DMX interface type if applicable North America Cast Software Technical Support 35 Ripley Avenue Unit 1 Toronto ON M6S 3P2 Canada Phone 1 877 989 2278 Fax 1 416 597 9594 E mail techsupport ocast soft com Web site www cast soft com United Kingdom A C Lighting Ltd Technical Sales amp Support Centauri House Hillbottom Road High Wycombe Bucks HP12 4HO UK wysiwyg March 2007 Introduction Phone 44 0 1494 446000 Fax 44 0 1494 461024 E mail wysiwyg oaclighting com Web site www aclighting com Germany ARCUS GmbH Obermeiers Feld 2 4 33104 Paderborn Germany Phone 49 0 5254 93069 O Fax 49 0 5254 93069 29 E mail support arcus lighting com Web site www arcus lighting com Japan Theater Engineering Phon
93. the justification for the text This is in relation to the insertion point or shape a Height Increase or decrease to modify the font size m Angle Specifies the attribute or label alignment in relation to the fixture symbol a Shape Associate a shape with the label or attribute if desired You can choose from none circle square octagon or diamond a Size Increase or decrease the size of the shape as desired wysiwyg March 2007 Presentation mode 3 Set the position of the attribute or label by clicking and dragging on the label or attribute in the preview window You can also select an attribute by clicking on it in the preview window 4 The key as it will be drawn on the layout is displayed in the preview window Once all the attributes are set as desired click Finish Result The Wizard shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar with the name you specified in the Title box Editing a key To make changes to the information that is displayed in the key open the Key Wizard by double clicking on the key shortcut and then make any necessary modifications Once a key has been defined it does not change until you make modifications to its settings To rename delete or clone the shortcut follow the steps defined in Working with shortcuts on page 56 I nserting a key into a layout Once the key has been created using the Key Wizard you can place it on the page To insert a key into a layout 1 From the Insert
94. the line Drag the next vertex to its end point and click Continue to place vertices of the line as needed O o A O To end the line at its last end point right click and choose Finish Line To abort the line entirely choose Abort Line This erases the whole line from the drawing Drawing points Points are identifiers of a specific coordinate in 3D space Points are inserted as references or as scenic elements m wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode To draw a point 1 From the Draw menu choose Point Tip You can also use the Point tool on the Draw toolbar w 2 Click on the drawing to place the point Note Points can be drawn as a dot a cross a Square or a circle To set the point type default From the Options menu choose Show Options Click the Object Defaults tab Select the desired point type Click OK A N Drawing circles There are two ways in which you can draw circles m non interactive mode in which you type the exact radius of the circle m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the radius To draw a circle in non interactive mode 1 From the Draw menu choose Circle Tip You can also use the Circle tool on the Draw toolbar i Result The New Circle dialog box appears 2 In the Radius box type a radius for the circle and then click OK The default value is 4 0 Click on the drawing to place the circle 4 Click elsewhere in the drawing to finish placing the new circle To
95. the sidedness of any of the objects that come with WYSIWYG either library objects or default venues By default all objects in the WYSIWYG library are double sided which means that when you rotate them in Shaded views all sides display equally Conversely the default venues that come with WYSIWYG are single sided which allows you to see into the venue when you rotate them in Shaded views 1 Select the object that you want to edit 2 Right click on the object and then select Properties Tip At any time to access an object s properties you can click on the Properties tool on the Fait toolbar P Result The Properties dialog is displayed Click the Sidedness tab Click the appropriate option button either Double Sided or Single Sided To leave the single sided object s faces oriented in the same direction in which they were drawn proceed directly to step 6 To change the direction of the faces see step 5 5 If you are changing a double sided object to single sided and you want to change the direction in which the object s faces are oriented either outward or inward click the Flip Normal check box Click OK Review your changes in the Shaded tab and make adjustments as required WYSIWYG Reference Guide 161 CAD mode 162 Release 19 0 Properties NN x General Appearance Light Emission gt idedness Set Piece Sphere Single Sided F Fip Hormel Cancel dee Double Sided Sele
96. the toolbar around the screen They can be placed on the edges of the work area top bottom left or right and can also be dragged off the edge of the work area and into their own window This window remains on top of the WYSI WYG screen and can be dragged anywhere on your display The following toolbars are available listed in alphabetical order WYSIWYG Reference Guide 59 WYSIWYG user interface 60 CAD Options toolbar Plan Left a tw Right g Front 6m Back i Isometric Ed WorkPlane Plan da WorkPlane Side 2 WorkPlane Front 4 Missing coordinate 5 Interactive a Grid snap Points Mid Points End Points 23 Center Assembly Pipe Focus Ortho X Y Ortho Y zZz Ortho Camera toolbar Click to reset Select the the camera camera from when you this list choose Hone T Click the Properties button to change the camera properties ComEdit toolbar Data toolbar Fixture Ti E Color select Gobos Accessory ith Find Le Replace Quick tools Release 19 0 wysiwyg March 2007 Design toolbar Intensity and focus Intensity designer tool Focus designer tool Iris designer tool oom designer tool Color designer tool ODA ER Gi Gobo designer tool Prism designer tool Video designer tool S Render wizard xf Fade looks Da Moving Scenery designer tool Draw toolbar F Point w Solid line a Center line w Hidden line
97. to manually restore the application lt Back Cancel 9 Choose the startup mode for the Background Rendering Manager You can choose one option or both Run at Windows Startup Select this option to have the Background Rendering Manager automatically start every time Windows starts up With this option the application immediately begins rendering submitted jobs as soon as you start up your computer unless it was paused on last exit m Start Minimized Select this option to have the Background Rendering Manager appear as a minimized taskbar icon every time it starts Double click the icon to manually restore the application to its full size If you select only this option the Background Rendering Manager starts when you send a render job to it from a Render Wizard that is installed on this same computer However if you are sending render jobs from a different computer then you WYSIWYG Reference Guide 287 Design mode Release 19 0 will have to manually open the Background Rendering Manager on this computer before it will accept render jobs 10 Click Next 11 Click Finish Result The Background Rendering Manager is now ready to use Tip To change these settings at any time you can run the Configuration Wizard again by clicking Tools gt Configuration Wizard You can also click Tools gt Options to change these settings on one window Background Rendering Manager taskbar icons Based on the settings that you chose w
98. w Dotted line Spline O Circle Arc T Textlabel 7 Dimension Surface Riser 3 Cylinder Sphere 2 Library Pipe E Truss Tm Fixture Accessory Focus position Ky Light Emitting Surface Wizard Edit toolbar P db Item properties Cut Copy Paste Delete Undo Redo Repeat last command Cos At WYSIWYG Reference Guide WYSIWYG user interface 61 WYSIWYG user interface 62 Edit Pres toolbar P Item properties Th Bring to front Send to back fel Content properties i Open contents Format toolbar Format cells Bold Italic c mx Underline Align left Align center Align right Insert Pres toolbar Line Rectangle Round rectangle Ellipse Polygon Text Bitmap CAD item Spreadsheet item Report item Worksheet item Legend item Key item New plot item AEH HOO OD Layers toolbar Current layer Live toolbar Intensity and focus Intensity designer tool Focus designer tool lris designer tool Zoom designer tool Color designer tool eB5hA e amp Gobo designer tool Prism designer tool Release 19 0 wysiwyg gt March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Message Log Options toolbar F IB Message log options Display log options Export Print Print preview New Plots Options Solid line Center line Dashed line Dotted line Circle Are Text label Symbol Grid snap MidPoints EndPoin
99. which means that when you rotate them in Shaded views all sides display equally Conversely the default venues that come with WYSIWYG are single sided which enables you to see into the venue when you rotate it in Shaded views You can however change the sidedness of objects that you have drawn in another program and imported into WYSIWYG i e dwg dxf files or SketchUp files or objects that you have drawn in WYSIWYG such as custom venues surfaces or custom objects that you have added to the library For these objects you can use this tab to change the sidedness from single to double sided or vice versa For example if you have drawn a venue as double sided you can select it and change it to single sided so that it behaves in the same manner as the default WYSIWYG venues i e you can see into the venue as you rotate it in Shaded views If you prefer to have an outside view of the custom venue then the double sided option is best as it prevents you from seeing through the walls You can also use this feature to flip the faces of a custom surface from one direction to the other if you do not like the way the object appears in the Shaded view To change an object s sidedness You can use this procedure to change objects from single to double sided and vice versa You can also flip the faces of a single sided object so that they are oriented in the opposite direction either inward or outward Note You cannot change
100. with a fixture is detected data about the fixture is logged in Link mode and the image of the affected fixture is highlighted on your plot Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features m Add on to the features of WYSIWYG Report Perform or Design System diagnostic fixture data is written to a Message Log m Ability to record and play backup looks m Loads can be recorded for specific dimmers WYSIWYG Reference Guide 27 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 19 0 28 wysiwyg gt Chapter 3 Installation configuration activation and registration This chapter provides instructions on how to install configure activate and register the WYSIWYG software You must activate and register the software before you can start using WYSIWYG In this chapter Installation 31 Configuration activation and registration 40 Upgrades 44 Memberships 45 Passwords 47 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Installation configuration activation and registration 30 Release 19 0 wysiwyg o gt March 2007 b Installation Installation configuration activation and registration Introduction Follow the procedures in this section to install the level of WYSIWYG that you have purchased Minimum hardware requirements for WYSIWYG Report Pentium or compatible processor 1 GHz or better Windows XP operating system 256 MB of RAM NTFS formatted hard drive Note You cannot install WYSIW
101. 2007 CAD mode To view fixture properties that are common to all fixtures A Oo N 5 From the Library menu choose Browse Library Click the Fixture tool at the bottom of the browser Browse to the desired fixture and highlight it Right click on the fixture name and then click Property Tip You can also click the Property tool at the top of the Library Browser Result The properties window for the selected fixture appears with a shaded view and an image of the fixture s symbol displayed in the two boxes An example is shown below 3 5 4 amp Axial Ee ax 3D View Plan Side Front Change Symbal Edit Layout View Type Static Moving Insert Multiple Shortcut Hew window Close Click Plan Side or Front to view the fixture in the different views The Wireframe view changes based on the view type that you select Version tab Options on the Version tab are read only and are set when the fixture is added to the library 3 5 x 8 Axial ES xi Version ii Status Author Cast Software Ltd Mantes y WYSIWYG Reference Guide Version The release number of the fixture Status The status of the fixture For example Beta indicates that the fixture is completed but not verified Release indicates the fixture has been tested and is accurate A status of Preliminary indicates that the fixture has minimal functionality Author The individual or com
102. 262 268 2 0 271 274 285 experimentation Use it as a troubleshooting tool or as a creative tool to help you come up with cue concepts In Design mode you can create static lighting looks 299 Design mode Release 19 0 eon wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode y ae Layout tabs Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These layouts provide various configurations of the views you are working with To change layouts click the tab that corresponds to the layout you wish to use The Design mode contains the following layout tabs m Wireframe The work area displays a full screen wireframe view m Quad The work area is divided into quadrants three of which can be modified to show plan front side or isometric views The lower right quadrant contains a shaded view m Shaded The work area displays a full screen shaded view Note The wireframe views in Data mode are used for fixture selection only To make any drawing modifications you must return to CAD mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 261 Design mode Release 19 0 Design tools 262 Introduction The design tools are available in the Design and Live modes You must have your venue scenery and fixtures drawn in order to use the design tools however you do not need to have all the data entered for the fixtures in Design mode Design mode is intended so you do not need channel numbers or a patch The design tools allow
103. 9 0 To modify the properties of a view shortcut 1 Right click on the Views shortcut icon that you want to modify and then select Properties Result The View Shortcut Properties dialog box is displayed View Shortcut Properties x Mame Plar Open Location f Curent Window Pop Up Window In the Name box type the new name of the shortcut To open the shortcut in the current active window enable the Current Window option button To open the shortcut in a pop up frame enable the Pop Up Window option button For more information on popup frames refer to Popup frames on page 53 Modifying wireframe views The properties of a wireframe view affect how objects are drawn and how much information is visible These settings are modified in the View Options To modify a wireframe view 1 2 Ensure the wireframe view that you want to modify is active From the Options menu choose View Options Result The View Options window appears View Options x General Draw Options View type Show Details w Follow User Scene Scene Tip You can also use the View Options tool E on the Standard toolbar to open the view options Modify options as desired Click OK wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the current scene Name Name of the wireframe view Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the currently selected scene
104. Arch dialog box is shown below New Venue Proscemum Arch FE STAGE width Depth nn Stage We is Jaco ep Eoo Hedhi a o rust myn Thrust mu i myn Depth fe width 35 Fly Height Eo ARCH Width aa 0 Depth 2 Height 200 AUDITORIUM BOH ite ie i ie wfidth li oo h Depth l oo h Height a5 FOH yi ol mu iddl ee ope hzo Units Metric Imperial Accept the defaults or choose custom properties Click OK Result The selected venue is inserted into the drawing 133 CAD mode 134 Release 19 0 The venue types are defined as follows Proscenium Arch A proscenium arch venue is a basic theatrical space with a stage proscenium arch and an auditorium The origin is set at the intersection of the center line and the proscenium line on the stage floor The following entries describe the parts of the proscenium arch A The stage width the dimension from the extremity of the SR wing to the extremity of the SL wing In WYSIWYG the default value is 90 0 B The stage depth the dimension from the proscenium line to the back of the stage space In WYSIWYG the default value is 50 0 C The stage height the dimension from the auditorium floor to the stage deck In WYSIWYG the default value is 4 0 D The thrust depth the dimension from the edge of the stage to the proscenium line In WYSIWYG the default value is 8 0 E The thrust width the dimension from the extremity of the
105. Browser Navigate to the desired object Click the nsert tool at the top of the Library Browser Tip You can also double click on the object name Note Fixtures may only be placed on hang structures Please refer to Hanging and focusing fixtures on page 194 for more information 129 CAD mode 130 Release 19 0 4 Click in your drawing to insert the object 5 Click away from the object to deselect it To create a shortcut for a library object In the Wireframe and Quad views you can create shortcuts for frequently used objects Shortcuts are tools found on the various shortcut bars to the left of the working area Clicking a shortcut for an object is the same as finding the object in the Library Browser and using the nsert command 1 Open the Library Browser Navigate to the desired object Click the Create Shortcut tool at the top of the Library Browser aj Result A shortcut to the object will appear on the appropriate shortcut bar Tip You can also right click on the object name and then select Create Shortcut To modify a shortcut for a library object 1 Right click on the shortcut and then select Properties Result The Properties dialog box appears An example of the accessories Shortcut Property dialog box is shown below Shortcut Property FT x Name Fari Slide Holder 24 mm Type Fani Slide Holder 240mm Properties Cancel 2 In the Mame box type a new name for the shortcut
106. Cast ee Reference Guide software Lighting Design Software Manage Design and Simulate wysiwyg gt gt Reference Guide Product Release 19 0 March 2007 cast see software Cast Group of Companies Inc 2002 2007 All rights reserved WYSIWYG Cast Software WYSIWYG Report WYSIWYG Perform WYSIWYG Design and Autofocus are trademarks of the Cast Group of Companies Incorporated All other trademarks and logos are the property of their respective owners March 2007 b Summary of changes Summary of changes The following table summarizes the changes included in the Release 19 WYSI WYG Reference Guide March 2007 Change location Chapter 6 pages 111 117 Chapter 6 pages 130 131 Chapter 6 pages 166 167 Chapter 6 page 195 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Description of change Added content on new SketchUp feature Added procedure on applying textures to library objects Added procedure on installing the WYSIWYG Texture Pack Added note about End Point snap and distributing fixtures between two points Summary of changes vi Release 19 0 wysiwyg gt March 2007 Contents amp ab Contents 1 Introduction 9 About this manual s sa esie bob ob RR OD A DDN tek GU Dd DSR ED EEE 11 MVOUDIESHOOUNG Y a ENOC CN CANA FEN Geeeasaa hee oe 12 Welcome to WYSIWYG saaana aaa a I GG y 14 2 The WYSI WYG suite of software products 15 WYSIWYG REDON wv
107. Clear All lw Import Single Sided Onentation we Defaut C sened cae On the Layertab highlight the layers that you want to import a lf there is more than one layer listed you can select multiple layers simultaneously by pressing Ctrl on your keyboard and clicking on the desired layers For each layer that you want to import ensure that the mport check box is checked If you do not want to import a certain layer highlight it and deselect this checkbox For example If you have drawn both a venue and elements in SketchUp and you have put them on separate layers you can choose to only import a particular element into the WYSIWYG file by selecting the appropriate layer in this window To import a single sided layer highlight it and select the Single Sided checkbox Note Single sided layers use less processor time to display in Shaded views and to render in the Render Wizard However they only appear properly in each of these views if the faces of the object are drawn facing outward Unless you know how the SketchUp file was drawn it is recommended that you leave Single Sided deselected by default when importing the layers so that the object appears correctly Note that you will not be able to see through the walls of an imported double sided venue when you rotate the image around in the Shaded view unlike the WYSIWYG venues which are single sided If the imported object does not appear correctly in the Shad
108. Guide From the Insert menu choose Worksheet Tip You can also use the Worksheet tool from the Layout Pres nsert toolbar Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Select Spreadsheet to be referenced dialog box appears Select Spreadsheet to be referee i FT x Title Black Cancel Select the worksheet that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected worksheet referenced from Pres mode appears within the placeholder as drawn 325 Presentation mode Release 19 0 To insert New Plot items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose New Plot 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect New Plot to be referenced dialog box appears Select New Plot to be referenced x Cancel Theatre Left Section View 3 Select the New Plot item that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected New Plot item referenced from Pres mode appears within the placeholder as drawn To adjust the contents that are displayed within the placeholder refer to Adjusting the contents on page 330 for further details Content and Item properties As with all objects in WYSIWYG the objects that you have placed on your page have unique properties There are two types of properties m Content Properties m Item Properties Content
109. Note Alternatively to perform a convert command you can use the Convert tool on the Tools toolbar az To convert using the Specify dialog 1 Select the object that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Specify Convert x onvert emeles tate fe Arce Cancel Surfaces Dont convert Humor Porat 10 lw Lines into pipes Pipes mite lines Focus positione inte ponte Ponts mta focus positions lw Delete original objects T Put new objects on current layer 3 Select the desired conversion type from the available options by selecting the appropriate option buttons Select the Don t convert option button if you do not want to convert the circle into either an arc or a surface Note For circles select the Arcs or Surfaces option button and then type the number of points as discussed above 4 Select the Delete original objects check box if you want the original object to be replaced with the new converted one 5 Select the Put new objects on current layer check box if you want the new converted objects to be placed on the current layer as opposed to the selected object s original layer if different 6 Click OK Divide The divide command separates objects into egual parts The initial object is left intact if not deleted and the parts are identified by newly created objects such as points or lines To divide an arc into lines
110. Paste Bazepoint Interactive object creation Draw from center lw Automatically group truss lw Prompt to put deleted fixtures in flight case IY Shaw fisture notes when inserting Focus mode None Focus after hang Focus towards origin Missing Co ordinate Use only one missing coordinate Automatically adjust with command line CAD joo Focus joo 3 In the Pipe Drawing Mode section select Draw from Center or Draw from Start Tips a You can change the default setting for a pipe in mid command by right clicking and choosing the drawing mode for that pipe just before inserting it into the drawing a You can change the pipe mode for a specific pipe at any time in the pipe s properties For more information refer to Pipe properties on page 190 To draw a pipe 1 From the Draw menu choose Pipe Hew Pipe x Length B0 0 Trim Height por O Cancel Interactive 188 wysiwyg gt March 2007 5 Tip CAD mode In the New Pipe dialog box find the name of the pipe If you need to create the name of the pipe click the ellipsis button to open the Position Manager Click New and then type the name of the pipe In the Length box type the length of the pipe if different from the default The default value is 60 0 In the 7rim Height box type the desired trim height for the pipe The default value is 20 0 Note Pipes ignore the missing coord
111. Point type C Do f Cross Square Circle Region profile North America Reset Label Layouts Set Default Font for Presentation Views m Point type Indicates the default point type in your show document You can choose to display points as dots crosses squares or circles m Region profile The geographical region where the show will be occurring This setting establishes the profile for voltage and consequently what will be used for such items as light bulbs in a fixture H Reset Label Layouts Click to reset all fixture labelling to the default settings E Set Default Font for Presentation Views Click to select a default font for presentation views Object Settings tab Options on the Object Settings tab affect how various objects are placed or drawn in CAD mode wysiwyg gt March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document Show Options E E Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Hang Options Tw AutoLnit lw Snap Interval j e lw Enforce Spacing fro Minimum Spacing Symbol Alignment l T Line up symbols r Line eight Emission Autofocus MH tl weight 0 015 ae r Shading Options Facet Splitting LLU Facet resolution S ns Cylinder Sphere Segments 15 Segments fe Caneel m AutoUnit Select this check box to automatically assign a unit number to each fixture that is
112. Positions Purpose Fixture Type Colour Circuit Hame Circuit Number wattage Gobo 3 Select the data item that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected data sheet referenced from Data mode appears within the placeholder as drawn To insert report items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Report Tip You can also use the Report tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar wysiwyg gt March 2007 Presentation mode Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Report to be referenced dialog box appears F Cancel Select Report to bijte i z Instrument Count Patch By Dimmer Gobos By Positon Purpose Cheat Sheet Channel Cheat Sheet Patch By Spot Circuit Hookup Patch By Chari Channel Schedule Lamp bulb Count Moving Light Court Colour Count Select the report item that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected report referenced from Pres mode appears within the placeholder as drawn Note If the Group By option has been set for a report the report cannot be added to a layout Setting the Group By option creates page breaks within the report and layouts do not support reports with page breaks For more information on this option refer to Report tab on page 299 To insert worksheet items onto the layout 1 WYSIWYG Reference
113. Properties Content Properties affect the content of the presentation item When you open these properties you open a similar or identical dialog box to the View Options dialog box that appears when you are working on the original item in CAD Data or Pres mode In this dialog you can modify the information to be displayed and control how it is displayed To modify content properties 1 Select the presentation item that you want to modify 2 From the Edit menu choose Content Properties Tip You can also click the Content Properties tool on the Edit toolbar Eal Result The View Options dialog box is displayed Note Content properties for CAD items are discussed in CAD items on page 327 Item Properties Item Properties affect the placeholders and the scaling of the contents Options here include the outline s weight and color and various printing options for the contents such as scale aan wysiwyg March 2007 Presentation mode To modify item properties 1 2 Select the presentation item you want to modify From the Edit menu choose Item Properties Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties 21 General CAD Rotation CAD Printing Outline Weight E Colour L Fill None Fill Colour Note The first page of the properties dialog is identical regardless of the type of presentation item Option
114. Properties tab 306 New Plots 304 Attribute layout 311 Creating a new plot type 304 Drawing objects 313 Editing objects 314 Inserting into layouts 326 331 Manipulating object properties 316 Modifying properties of a plot 305 Objects 308 Objects drawn in New Plots 317 Printing 319 Reestablish links 309 Relationship with objects in CAD 309 Relationship with objects in Data 309 Selecting objects 314 Updating 305 Working in 304 New Right Section Plot 305 New Show 79 Node Manager 378 Number of color frames data field 241 Number of data channels data field 241 Number of lamps data field 241 O Object representation in New Plots 308 Object specific properties 163 Offset 190 Offset data field 240 wysiwyg March 2007 Open a show document 79 Open GL tab 88 Opening a new window 54 Options 85 Origin 97 104 Ortho 67 109 Owner data field 241 P Palette shortcuts 270 Pan data field 240 Paperwork 298 Passwords 47 Patch 247 changing width of cells in 253 Patch data field 240 Patch universe 247 Patch views Hot keys 396 Patching movement axes DMX 249 movement axes motion control system 249 Patching fixtures 248 Photo quality pictures 274 Photometrics 194 207 Pipe 144 198 Pipe snap 110 Pipe tape 345 Pipes Distributing multiple fixtures on 195 196 Plan view 108 Plot type 108 Points 138 Popup frames 53 Ports console 350 Position 186 Position dat
115. Purpose ParyTilt Lens Notes Spn Dimmer Use User Details Select this check box to reference the options selected on the Show Details tab of User Options Click to clear the Use User Defaults check box to make specific changes for the active view wysiwyg March 2007 y WYSIWYG user interface Shaded views Introduction Shaded or open GL views offer a 3D perspective view of your drawing Surfaces truss and fixtures are filled in or solid rather than outlined as in wireframe views Shaded views are not available in WYSIWYG Report Shaded views will follow Scenes just like any other view Keyboard and mouse control To modify the point of view Use the arrow keys to move the position of the virtual target PAGE UP PAGE DOWN will zoom you in and out Holding down CTRL and using the arrow keys or the PAGE UP PAGE DOWN will move the position of the virtual camera At any time you can use the SHIFT key in combination with any of the movement keys to move in smaller increments The mouse pan tool can be set up to rotate the model or the camera around the target You can also use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out The arrow keys will continue to move the target position as you do this Modifying shaded views The properties of a shaded view affect the view point fixture beam quality and ambient light These settings are modified in the View Options WYSIWYG Reference Guide 73 WYSIWYG u
116. Reh ewe ENED e eh ee BA EOS Ou Oe ES BRA 85 WYSIWYG Viewer 0 a a 100 6 CAD mode 101 LoVo TODS a Gueaee I wesc AEE hee See ee eee hae ee 103 The CAD environment me RG EU RO boB hM OU HR Y ea cee chek we eS 104 The Library Browser 24 chew eaden du OPE eS De bee eee ee wee ee 128 Drawing ODJECU wie eetiedn ceuees eG eee Phone Ge eae teen eee Shane ee we 133 E OO BO US ea sa ew oer ewe bee PG ee oe ye ea ee ee TANO Gee ex 152 CAD TOO saan ueu 5 ebeoe yea ee eee wee eee Oe Bees SEES aOIe 176 Meme SUMICIULCS u aog i a kav aeaeodewe anes oak Gee eae ee ee ot 2 ares Gee do 186 Hanging and focusing fixtures auaa aaa es 194 Color gobos and accessori S FF GG GG GG GG GG GG GG y 219 Light Emitting Surface Wizard FF FF a 225 Whe REC Gog SR 10 cap dr aa Ua SAU Ged dae be FO Byd Ree ae SL OS Fy eee SEEN DAE A 232 RENGEN a n cf kaa een dui Gb dB A we bea AU Bw hyd O yh AU O A O EE Md Ob Se o EUR 235 7 Data mode 237 EU ain 9 steven cheese woe a CN DC RC CE RAE AU e a y 239 WYSIWYG Reference Guide vii Contents viii 8 9 Spreadsheets a eC My ss ie ser ae AG a ei A Dw we BD EMOS y a Soa Ow a a a Design mode Layout taDS a Ed a ata caw tad DESIGN COOlS ax eau Shae EES Ee ee O CONCCDIG 25 4 donee Re on See eee eee DIO Pale uc epee et un GG tienda whae ea Creating looks Rendering Gu RG Background Rendering Manager Presentat
117. Right click on the accessory name and then click Insert You can add the correct frame size to a fixture using Add Accessory 219 CAD mode Release 19 0 To create a new shortcut to an accessory Refer to To create a new shortcut on page 56 Placing color and gobos You can drop color and gobos onto fixtures by using the Library Browser or the Quick Tools method Colors and gobos from many manufacturers are included tn the library You can preview the color or gobo by double clicking on the name Note For more information on Quick Tools see Quick tools on page 208 To insert colors and gobos using the Library Browser Open the Library Browser Click the Color or Gobo section tool Find the color or gobo that you want to insert A N Right click the color gobo name and then click Insert Result The cursor shows a Q the symbol denoting that Quick Tools have been enabled Click on the fixtures to which you want to add the color or gobo Right click and then select Finish Quick Tools to finish placing the color or gobo To insert colors and gobos using the Quick Tools 1 Click Tools gt Quick Tools Result The Quick Fixture Tool appears 2 Under the Accessories heading at the bottom of the window click the ellipsis button beside the feature that you want to add either color or gobo and then choose the color or gobo in the resulting window 3 Click OK Result The cursor shows a
118. Room OMe Mode NO i e Online Yes Ambient Temperature 78F 25 8C Type SFA 2 Number OF Modules li 2 DM Part A Enabled Phase A volts i 21 Dh Part B Disabled Phaze B volts ii 22 ii 22 Advanced Features Enabled Phase C volts Frequency BG 2 Select a node the rack number and then click About Node Manager In Live mode WYSI Link includes the Node Manager tab on the Device Manager dialog box In this dialog box you need to discover connected nodes before other functions will work To access the Node Manager 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Node Manager Tip You can also use the Node Manager tool on the WYSILink toolbar Result The Node Manager dialog box is displayed Node Manager Curent Node Name Colour IP Address Online 10 101 1 14 10 101 1 14 Discover 100 101 130 101 100 101 130 101 BEE 10 101 50 103 10 101 50 103 Colour Select 10 101 50 106 Booth Input DMX No Catwalk DMX Node Dimmer Room DHX ETC Video Node ETCNet2ContigEditor Expression 3 800 Untitled Emphasis C 10 101 50 106 10 101 50 107 10 101 50 104 10 101 50 105 10 101 50 102 10 101 1 142 10 101 45 101 10 101 130 101 a n ME S lt S S808 08 lt 2 Click the Discover button to view the nodes that are currently online and to set a color for the display of channels that are owned by each node 3 To set the color for a node double click the color box to the right of the node s name or click th
119. SIWYG Welcome screen save your file to the WYSI WYG Templates directory In the File name box type a name for the file In the Save as type box choose WYSIWYG Template files wyt Click Save Merge command The Merge command is used to combine multiple show documents into one AIl file types that can be opened directly by WYSIWYG can also be merged Therefore an existing WYSIWYG document can be merged with other WYSIWYG documents m DWG DXF files 7 Lightwright2 files a SketchUp files To merge WYSIWYG documents 1 Open or create the destination document From the File menu choose Merge In the dialog box that opens choose the source file Note You can change the types of visible files using the F e type box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 91 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 4 Click Open Result The file you selected is merged with the current file Note For information on merging DWG DXF or SketchUp documents see Merging a DWG DXF document on page 120 and To merge SketchUp files on page 114 Close command The Close command closes the current show document and returns you to the We come window To close a show document 1 From the File menu choose Close 2 When prompted to save changes to the current show document click Yes to save changes and close the document Note Click No to skip saving and close the document Click Cance to skip saving and keep the document open Print comman
120. SIWYG creates a pipe for every imported fixture since fixtures in WYSIWYG need to hang on a hang structure If however fixtures are on a straight pipe represented by a straight line in the SketchUp file WYSIWYG will convert the entire line into a pipe After you have made your selection click OK If you decided to substitute fixtures for components in step 9 you are prompted to select the fixtures from the WYSIWYG library To merge SketchUp files This procedure merges the SketchUp file into the current WYSIWYG document placing the object in the location you specify Note Before you begin this procedure you must have the SketchUp file saved on your computer 1 Open the WYSIWYG file into which you want to add the SketchUp file From the File menu choose Merge From the Files of tyoe drop down list select SketchUp Files Files of this type appear in the browser window In the browser window click the file name and then click Open Result The Merge dialog box opens Merge EIK Basepoint Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint f Select Basepoint with mouse Cancel wysiwyg gt March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode Click one of the options to choose the base point for the merged object and then click OK Result The Se ect SKP Settings For Import dialog box is displayed Select 5KP Settings For Import o x Layer Import Directories Layer Name Import Single Sided Select All
121. SR edge of the thrust to the SL extremity of the thrust This dimension cannot be greater than the Arch width G Im WYSIWYG the default value is 350 F The Fly height the dimension from the stage deck to the top of the fly house In WYSIWYG the default value is 60 0 G The proscenium arch width In WYSIWYG the default value is 40 0 H The depth of the proscenium arch wall In WYSIWYG the default value is 20 wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode m I The height of the proscenium arch the dimension of the opening of the proscenium arch In WYSIWYG the default value is 200 m J The back of house BOH width the dimension of the auditorium from the extremity of house right to the extremity of house left at the back of the house In WYSIWYG the default value is 100 0 m K The auditorium depth the dimension from the proscenium line to the back of the house In WYSIWYG the default value is 100 0 m L The auditorium height the dimension from the ceiling of the auditorium to the floor of the auditorium at the edge of the stage In WYSIWYG the default value is 450 m M The front of house FOH width the dimension of the auditorium from the extremity of house right to the extremity of house left at the front of the house In WYSIWYG the default value is 680 7 N The auditorium slope height In WYSIWYG the default value is 120 Black Box A black box venue is an empty rectangular room The orig
122. Select this check box to set the object s color for wireframe views to be the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 172 Click to clear the check box and then use the color button to set a specific color for the object m Use Layer Line Thickness Select this check box to set the object s line thickness to be the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 172 Click to clear the check box and then type a thickness in the box below to set a specific line thickness for the object The line weight is used to determine how thick the pen should be when printing a copy of the document The applied line thickness is only visible in Print Preview mode and when printed wysiwyg gt March 2007 Presentation mode Objects that are drawn in New Plots Objects such as lines arcs symbols circles and text that are drawn in a New Plots view have general properties that are inherited from the layer on which they are drawn Along with the general properties a tab appears in the properties dialog box for each type of object that is selected When you select multiple objects of different types tabs appear for each type of object selected For more information refer to Drawing objects on page 133 New Plot Object tab Options on the New Plot Object tab affect the sel
123. Static Color and Intensity select the static intensity of the surface or group of surfaces for viewing in Design mode Note that if you do not enable dynamic intensity control the static intensity is valid in both Design and Live modes To set dynamic values for color and intensity proceed to the next step If you do not want to set Dynamic values click Next and then skip to step 21 To control color and intensity independently with a console device in Live mode choose the appropriate dynamic color and intensity settings 22 CAD mode Release 19 0 m Enable Dynamic Color Click this check box to control the color of the light emitting surface in Live Mode when connected to a console Then choose the patch properties below Note If you enable dynamic color you override ONLY in Live mode the static color settings that you chose a Single Patch Select this value to apply a single address that controls the grid as a whole For example if you choose red on your console every surface in the entire grid will be red You could use this setting to create a string of holiday lights with the same color and then control the intensity of the llghts as one string to turn them all on or off simultaneously a Multi Patch Select this value if you want to choose different addresses for each individual element in the grid By choosing multiple addresses you can make the grid multicolored by using different channels on your console each with a
124. UA A als te Bal Unused Channels SNAP i TT Working in the patch view You can view one patch universe at a time As you add new patch universes in either a spreadsheet view or a CAD drawing using Ouick Tools their shortcuts are created automatically You can also create new patch universes directly from the shortcut bar To create a new patch universe 1 Click the Patch layout tab 2 Right click in the patch shortcut area and choose New Patch Result A dialog box Is displayed prompting for the type of universe that you want to create and the name of the new universe Enter new Patch Universe name Patch Universe Type w DMX Motion Control Cancel WYSIWYG Reference Guide 247 Data mode Release 19 0 248 3 Type the name of the patch universe Patch universes can be named anything For example A Dimmers Dim Movers Scrollers and so on 4 Select the type of patch universe based on the type of console or system that you are using either a DMX console or a motion control system 5 Click OK Result The patch shortcut appears in the Patch tab Notes o change delete or modify a patch universe right click the shortcut icon for the universe that you want to change Click on the command that you want to perform To display the contents of a patch universe click on the appropriate shortcut icon The name of the universe Is displayed at the top left corner of
125. Use Defaults check box 7 Modify the individual properties Note When you make a change to an attribute the results are previewed in the box on the right a Select the Visible check box if you want the attribute to be displayed around the fixture symbol in your plot b Select the Use Body Color check box if you want the attribute label to use the Same font color as the fixture symbol Leave the box unchecked and choose a color to set a specific color for that attribute c Adjust the line weight to increase or decrease the density of the label font d Select the ta ics check box to italicize the label font Note there are no options to change the font e Select the Position with fixture check box if you want the attribute s label to maintain its position in relation to the fixture symbol regardless of where the fixture is focused f Select the Rotate with fixture check box if you want the attribute s label to maintain its alignment in relation to the fixture symbol regardless of where the fixture is focused Note This option is only available if Position with fixture is selected g Set the horizontal and vertical justification for the text This is in relation to the insertion point or shape h Increase or decrease the height to modify the font size I Set the angle to specify the label alignment in relationship to the fixture symbol j Select a shape to be associated with this attribute if desired You can ch
126. YG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system 400 MB of free disk space 1024 x 768 or better resolution free USB port Minimum hardware requirements for WYSIWYG Design Pentium or compatible processor 1GHz or better Windows XP operating system 256 MB of RAM NTFS formatted hard drive Note You cannot install WYSIWYG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system 400 MB of free disk space 1024 x 768 or better resolution OpenGL accelerated display adapter with 16 MB video memory Free USB port Minimum hardware requirements for WYSIWYG Perform Pentium or compatible processor 1GHz or better Windows XP operating system 256 MB of RAM 512 MB preferred NTFS formatted hard drive Note You cannot install WYSIWYG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system WYSIWYG Reference Guide 400 MB of free disk space 1024 x 768 or better resolution OpenGL accelerated display adapter with 16 MB video memory WYG it 2 DMX reception device except when used with certain consoles contact the console manufacturer for details 31 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 19 0 m MIDI output port to use with AutoFocus E Free USB port Minimum hardware requirements for WYSI WYG Network WYSI WYG Learn H Pentium Ill or compatible processor 300 MHz or better m Windows XP operating system m 64 MB of RAM n NTFS formatted hard drive Note You
127. YSIWYG Reference Guide 315 Presentation mode Release 19 0 Object properties In a New Plots view object properties are inherited from the original object in CAD mode but can be manipulated independently of that mode For example manipulating the properties of an object that is brought into a New Plots view does not affect the object s properties in CAD mode It does however break the properties link for the modified object Objects can also be drawn in a New Plots view These objects inherit the properties of the layer on which they are drawn You can modify these properties as required Since these objects are not added to the drawing in any other mode modifying the properties in a New Plots view has no external affect Objects that are brought into New Plots from CAD mode 316 There are general properties for each object that is brought into a New Plots view from CAD mode You can modify these general properties as required General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the selected object s color and line thickness properties Properties E x General Layer Cyc ERS T Fixtures Follow Spots H F ieee aU M Use Layer Line Thickness Macs jom Fig lw Use Layer Colour Pipes Scenic Venue Cancel Apply u Layer A list of the layers in your document is displayed Click on a list item to change the layer on which the object will be drawn a Use Layer Color
128. YSIWYG Reference Guide 397 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Release 19 0 oe wysiwyg March 2007 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC b Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC Introduction To establish a connection between AutoFocus in WYSIWYG and the HogPC you must install and configure two additional pieces of software called MIDI YOKE and MIDI OX After this software has been configured you can set up the HogPC and WYSIWYG to work with the new software Additional software WYSIWYG can only send out MIDI data streams through the MIDI device set up in the Windows Sound Devices Control Panel Similarly HogPC can only listen to MIDI data streams that are fed into the computer through the MIDI device assigned by the same Control Panel To establish a connection between WYSIWYG and HogPC you must set up a third party method One solution would be to use an external physical device that can loop the MIDI signal through it That is the device would take the signal coming from the computer on one port and feed it back into the computer on another port A second solution would be to use a software driver that emulates the MIDI signal s looping the MIDI drivers that come with Windows do not support this feature This driver is called MIDI YOKE MIDI YOKE is a MIDI patch cable driver that enables you to establish a connection between applications that output MIDI data streams and those that receive MIDI data stre
129. a To filter messages 1 2 3 Click the Display Log Options tool on the Message Log Options toolbar m Click the Display Log Options tab Click the Filter tab 21x Display Log Options Message Log Options Filter Sort Column Manager Current Display Option Default r MessageData 0 Sequence_Number Select the column that you want to filter Set the type of filter using the options Click OK Result The Message Log will refresh with the newly filtered data March 2007 WYSILink Link mode Exporting the Message Log You can export the Message Log to a comma delimited text file that you can view in most spreadsheet applications This feature is useful if you are having system problems and need to get the Message Log to Cast Software Technical Services To export the Message Log 1 Click the Export Message Log tool on the Message Log Options toolbar an 2 Use the browser to set the name and destination of the exported file and then click Save Note The file must have the log extension Printing the Message Log To print the message log From the File menu choose Print Tip You can also use the Print tool on the Message Log Options toolbar To print preview the message log From the File menu choose Print Preview Tip You can also use the Print Preview tool on the Message Log Options toolbar ES WYSIWYG Reference Guide 375 WYSILink Link mode Release 19 0 y ETCLink f
130. a Par 1 Select the PAR fixture that you want to focus 2 Right click and choose Properties WYSIWYG Reference Guide 203 CAD mode Release 19 0 3 Click the Fixture tab 2 General Appearance Light Emission Fixture m Acclaim Cyc 4 Way General PointofView amp B c D Postion SCE Layout Spt 0 Pan ooo Unt mw foo o Ost Spin ooo o Pupe Focus Poston Nee y Lamp FEL a Angle 0 00 Leng None Angle 0 00 Cancel Apply From the Lamp drop down list select the lamp that you want to focus In the Ang e box for the lamp type the rotation angle The angle determines the degree of rotation of the lamp within the housing 6 Click OK when finished Fixture properties All fixtures in WYSIWYG have properties Properties are the characteristics or attributes that shape and define a fixture Fixture properties can be divided into two categories m the properties that are common to all fixtures in WYSIWYG m the properties that you define by assigning attributes to a fixture Fixtures also have many non visible attributes some of which can be edited These include Alias found as Type in the reports Cost Weight and AutoFocus codes General fixture properties In WYSIWYG there are five tabs that appear in the properties dialog box for every fixture Appearance E Version E Data 5 Options m Photometric Each tab is explained in this section 204 wysiwyg March
131. a field 240 Position Manager 186 POV Point of View 211 Precision 97 166 Presence option 278 Presentation items 322 Presentation views Hot keys 395 Print 82 Printing layouts 342 Processors 89 Product Configuration Wizard 40 Properties Dimension 165 Errors 257 Focus position 200 General 156 Layouts 321 Legend 335 340 Library item 130 Line 164 Patch universe 252 Pipe 190 Point 164 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Index Report 298 Spreadsheet 245 Symbol 218 Text label 165 Wireframe view 70 Proscenium Arch 134 Purpose data field 240 Q Quick focus 200 Quick Light Emission Tools 160 Quick Tools using to apply color to multi source fixtures 209 Quick tools 208 209 R Radiosity 280 Reading the patch 251 Redesigning 300 Redesigning headings 300 Redo 152 Regional profile 86 Regional settings 94 Relative 154 Relative coordinates 67 Rename fixture type 206 Render options 89 Render shortcuts 283 Rendering 235 274 364 Replace tool 242 Replacing fixtures 196 Report headings 300 Reports 298 Reset origin 104 Resizing Spheres 155 Right view 108 Riser 141 Rotate 315 Rotate tool 154 Rotating 154 Rotation axis 147 S Saturation 282 Save 80 Save As 80 Saving a lighting look 271 Scenes 174 Scenes toolbar 63 Schedules 298 Screen layout 51 Screens drawing 144 Scrollbars 72 Scrollers 222 264 Scrolls 221 407 Index Selecting obj
132. a of the screen display the lighting look that you want to render From the Design menu choose Render Tip You can also click the Render Wizard icon in the Design toolbar Result The Render Wizard opens and guides you through a Series of options wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Design mode Step 1 Set Output Destination and I mage Size E Render Wizard Step 1 Set Output Destination and Image Size Rendered Image Dimensions Width 640 Height 480 Destination ht wheat Siw External Image File name New View bmp Background Rendering Manager Job name fimage Add Shortcut Finish Click in the right pane to arrange the image that you want to render You can click and drag the image around zoom in and out with the mouse wheel or PAGE UP PAGE DOWN keys or set up your shot accurately using a camera Note Make sure you use the appropriate aspect ratio height vs width for the output device that you will be using to present the pictures For example TV is 4x3 normally 640x480 HDTV is 16x9 a Dimensions Type a value in pixels for the width and height of the final image b Destination Choose where you want to save the final image and whether you want to use the Background Rendering Manager to create it a nternal Image View Select this option to have the Render Wizard create the image and store it on the mages tab in Presentation mode a Exter
133. ackground Rendering Manager 3 When the job is successfully sent a WYSIWYG message box notifies you The next step differs based on where you sent the Job either to your own computer or another computer on the network Background Rendering Manager residing on your computer If you have sent the job to the Background Rendering Manager residing on the same computer as the Render Wizard it automatically starts processing the rendering if there are no Jobs currently being rendered if it is currently processing a Job the new job is placed in the active queue Background Rendering Manager residing on a network computer If you have sent the job to the Background Rendering Manager residing a network computer you must first ensure that the Background Rendering Manager is started before it will process the job The act of sending a rendering job does not start the Background Rendering Manager when it is installed on a network computer 4 Open the Background Rendering Manager to check the progress of the rendering and arrange the rendering queue For details see Managing jobs in the Background Rendering Manager queue on page 290 Note You can shut down your computer while the Background Rendering Manager is processing the job without losing the rendering progress You can also pause and resume the program When you restart your computer or resume the program the rendering continues where it last left off You might need to open the Ba
134. ackground Rendering Manager then a status window appears showing the progress as the render Job is sent to the Background Rendering Manager on the destination computer either your own or another server in the network When the job has been sent successfully you can open the Background Rendering Manager to check its progress You can close the Render Wizard and WYSIWYG queue jobs pause and resume them and shut down restart your computer without losing the rendering progress For details see To use the Background Rendering Manager on page 289 Note If this is the first time you are using the Background Rendering Manager you must first configure it before the rendering process will begin Upon clicking Finish in the Render Wizard the Configuration Wizard appears enabling you to configure settings such as the Network Port the default folder for storing rendering files and other Manager settings For details see To configure the Background Rendering Manager on page 286 Saving render settings You can save the options that you set in the Render Wizard as a shortcut for guick access to these settings at a future time There are two ways of saving a Render shortcut E from the Render Wizard E from the Render shortcut bar in a similar manner as other shortcuts The Render shortcut bar is prepopulated with two shortcuts Quick Render and Full Render Quick Render shortcuts provide settings for a small lower quality render w
135. active mode is an alternative method for drawing objects Objects are typically drawn using a dialog box to set the object s size width depth and height for example The full size object is then attached to the cursor so you can place it in the drawing An Interactive button enables you to switch modes Interactive mode allows you to click an Insertion point for the object first and then drag to create the scope of the object as allowed by the view XY for plan view XZ for front view and so on Once those dimensions are set a dialog box may open to allow you to set the third dimension if required Interactive mode works with Risers Cylinders Circles Arcs Spheres and Pipes There are some special considerations when drawing pipes in interactive mode as explained in Drawing pipes on page 144 To set interactive as the default drawing mode 1 From the Options menu choose User Options 2 Click the User tab 3 In the Options area of the window click the nteractive object creation check box To set interactive mode on the fly Press F11 on your keyboard or click the Interactive tool on the CAD Options toolbar I mporting SketchUp files SketchUp is a modelling tool that enables you to create realistic 3D models of many different types of objects and then save the files with an skp extension You can import these SketchUp files into WYSIWYG in much the same way as you import DWG DXF files Before you import SketchUp f
136. ade time use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to customize the look by selecting the appropriate movement axis and the object s starting position on it Then create a second look repeating the same procedure to set the object s starting position on either the same axis or a different one if there is more than one axis attached together When you switch from one look to the next you can see the object move from the starting point of the first look to the starting point of the second look within the time period that you define as the fade time To use the Moving Scenery tool After drawing movement axes and attaching objects to them you can use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to make the object move along each axis For details on drawing axes see Drawing movement axes on page 146 For information on attaching objects see To attach an object to a movement axis on page 149 Select the appropriate movement axis from this list Use these buttons to move the Use the Slider to move the ition object to object along i the selected inl a the path Type the object s position Click to apply the as a percentage of its total percentage that range of movement you have typed wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode 1 In Design mode click the Moving Scenery Designer tool icon to open the tool Note You can also open the tool by clicking Design gt Moving Scenery tool From the drop down
137. aded The work area displays a full screen shaded view Note The wireframe views in Live mode are used for fixture selection only To make any drawing modifications you must return to CAD mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 349 Live mode Release 19 0 y o t Connecting to consoles Introduction To use Live mode you need to insert and connect to a control console or compatible offline editor If you use a DMX console you require a DMX interface device to connect to WYSIWYG You must ensure that the patch you have created in WYSIWYG and the patch in your console are exactly the same for simulation to work properly Connecting to a console To connect to a console 1 Connect the console to the computer with the appropriate hardware 2 From the Live menu choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Device Manager E x Device Manager Status Connect on load Propenies meet onnect Selecta ii Ema ube Rice P onnect onload 3 Click New Result The console library is displayed 4 Navigate through the console library until you find the console or device that you are connecting to Click the console name to highlight it Note If you are connecting to a console with a Wyg it or Wyg it2 you can select either the console or the Wyg it device The Address box discussed below must contain the name of the Wyg it 5 Click nsert Result The console appears in the D
138. aled blocks are not supported Blocks to be converted to library items cannot imbed other blocks Blocks to be replaced by a fixture cannot imbed other blocks Tips It is recommended that you do not import 2D 3D solids whenever possible Instead use 3D Face and 3D Surface entities It is recommended that you explode Polyface Mesh or Polygon Mesh entities in AutoCAD before importing to WYSIWYG so you can access each face in WYSIWYG Opening a DWG DXF document Before you begin Clean up the CAD file by removing all unnecessary layers such as doors windows and architectural details Generally you want to remove items that you do not need to see or will not use in the plot Use the Purge command in AutoCAD to remove layers blocks and so on that are not wanted or needed You may want to do this several times since layers and blocks are sometimes linked to other parts of the drawing and the Purge command might not pick them up the first time The more unwanted items you can remove the smaller the file size will be and the easier faster it is to import To open a DWG DXF document This procedure creates a new WYSIWYG document from the imported DWG DXF file If you are already working in a document you are prompted to save any changes and close the document before you import the file into WYSIWYG 1 2 From the File menu choose Open From the Files of type box select the DWG or DXF type Files of this type appear in the
139. all the features of WYSIWYG Report and Design 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Live mode for real time lighting visualization DMX camera to allow you to dynamically reposition your point of view in Live mode Accurate simulation of conventional and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and so on Easy hook up to consoles and other DMX sources Auto Focus protocol lets WYSIWYG send color and focus data to consoles Integrated design mode allows you to create lighting looks without a console Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your cue or lighting look Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces Background Rendering Manager that enables you to gueue up multiple renderings to run in the background without even requiring WYSIWYG to run Animated renderings available though certified service providers Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is exce
140. amed To delete a color gobo list A GQ N a From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Custom Select the color gobo list that you want to remove Click Delete Result The list is removed from the color gobo list To insert custom scrolls into scrollers o mB Oo N Select the fixtures with scrollers for which you want to assign a custom scroll From the Edit menu choose Object Properties Select the Fixture tab In the fixture list highlight the scroller Select the Scro tab wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Select the desired list from the pull down list Note Only custom lists that have the appropriate number of slots and media type are available Click OK To insert custom wheels into automated fixtures o mB Oo N Select the fixtures for which you want to assign a custom wheel From the Edit menu choose Object Properties Select the Fixture tab Select the appropriate tab for example Color 1 Gobo lt Gobo gt From the drop down list select the desired list Note Only custom lists that have the appropriate number of slots and media type are available Click OK Custom gobos You can generate custom gobos if you have the artwork in either bitmap or jpeg format The Gobo Wizard walks you through the steps of making a custom gobo Custom gobos are stored in the gobo library under the Custom category Custom gobos require an association with an e
141. ample CEAY CFGs SGRQ 7FJ KPPP Cancel More Info The current level of WYSIWYG installed on your computer is displayed in the Current Level box The serial code of your dongle is shown in the Serial Code box In the Upgrade Code box type your upgrade code and then click Upgrade Exit WYSIWYG and then restart your computer Launch WYSIWYG Result The new level of software is displayed in the upper right corner of the WYSIWYG user interface Note If you would like to purchase an upgrade but are unsure of who to contact click More Info to obtain a list of WYSIWYG dealers 44 wysiwyg gt March 2007 Installation configuration activation and registration y Memberships I ntroduction Your Membership to WYSIWYG is valid for a specific period of time You can easily view and renew your Membership from within WYSIWYG Obtaining Membership details Details of your Membership are stored within WYSIWYG To obtain details From the Help menu choose About WYSIWYG Result The month and year that your Membership expires is displayed in the Membership Expiry Date box About License Agreement WYSIWyYRD Version 1 19 106 5 Release 13 i Cast Software Ltd Copyright c Cast Group of Companies Inc 1994 2007 All nights reserved Serial Code Membership Expiry D ate Renewing your Membership Your WYSIWYG Membership is valid for a specific period of time You can continue to use
142. ams without the need for an external MIDI device To obtain additional information on MIDI YOKE refer to http www midiox com myoke htm MI DI OX is the application used to configure the MIDI YOKE port mappings assignments It is also used to monitor MIDI data that passes through the MIDI YOKE driver In the case of WYSIWYG this is the MIDI data coming from WYSIWYG into the MIDI YOKE driver and out to the HogPC To obtain additional information on MIDI OX refer to http www midiox com Installing and configuring the additional software MIDI YOKE To install MIDI YOKE 1 Based on your operating system download the MIDI Yoke installer from the appropriate link at the following Web site a Windows ME XP http www midiox com zip myokent exe Follow the instructions at http www midiox com midiyoke_ instxp htm to install MIDI YOKE in a Windows XP Home environment For all other operating systems refer to the Installation section of the main MIDI YOKE Web page http www midiox com myoke htm WYSIWYG Reference Guide 399 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Release 19 0 Notes 1 Do not change any of the settings in the configuration window that appears after installation is complete 2 _ You must restart your computer to finalize the installation To configure MIDI YOKE Once your computer has restarted from the Start menu choose Settings and then choose Control Panel Click the Audio Devices icon or its equivalent
143. an extruded surface or 3D solid WYSIWYG Reference Guide 181 CAD mode 182 Release 19 0 To extrude a line 1 Select the line that you want to extrude From the Tools menu choose Extrude and then choose Lines into Surfaces Type the distance to extrude the line The extrusion will occur parallel to the axis of the missing coordinate For example a line shown in plan view will extrude vertically For splines you must specify the number of segments for the new Surface in the of Points box To extrude an arc Select the arc that you want to extrude From the Tools menu choose Extrude and then choose Arcs into Surfaces Type the distance to extrude the line The extrusion will occur parallel to the axis of the missing coordinate For example an arc shown in plan view will extrude vertically Type the number of segments for the new surface You cannot type the number 1 The higher the number the more circular the surface To extrude a surface into an extruded surface Tip Select the surface that you want to extrude From the Tools menu choose Extrude and then choose Surface into Extruded Surface Type the distance to extrude the surface The extrusion occurs parallel to the axis of the missing coordinate For example a surface shown in plan view will extrude vertically You can also use the Extrude tool on the 7oo s toolbar i Fillet The Fillet command joins two lines sharing the same end point or two
144. annels For details see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 352 5 Save your settings 6 In the Shaded tab of Live mode you can now use the console device to control the progress of the video For details see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 352 wysiwyg March 2007 Data mode To patch a movement axis to a DMX console device In WYSIWYG you can patch a movement axis to which one or more objects has been attached and then use a console device or a motion control system to control the progress of the objects along the axis You have the choice of patching the axis to either a DMX patch universe or a motion control universe based on the type of console or system you will be using to move the objects For details on patching the axis to a motion control universe see To patch a movement axis to a motion control system on page 249 To control the object s movement with a DMX console device the DMX patch is allocated two channels one each for coarse and fine movement The DMX value represents the object s percentage of movement For example if it is at O then the object is at 0 of its range of motion if it is at 100 then the object has moved 100 of its range of motion For details on controlling the object with the console device in Live mode see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 353 Note Before performing the followi
145. apparent intersecting lines with an arc A fillet radius must be specified to achieve the desired fillet angle Apparent Intersecting Lines Lines sharing End Point Resulting Fillet with a 5 radius Resulting Fillet with a 5 radius wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode To set the fillet radius 1 From the Tools menu choose Fillet and then choose Specify fillet radius 2 Type a radius measurement for the resulting fillet Note All subsequent fillet commands will follow this value until it is modified again To fillet two lines 1 Select the lines to be filleted 2 From the Tools menu choose Fillet and then choose Fillet Result The lines are joined by an arc based on the value set for the fillet radius Notes 1 You must set a fillet radius before you can perform this command 2 If the fillet radius is O the lines will be extended and joined at their intersection If they are already intersecting nothing occurs Array The Array command is used to make multiple copies of an object distributed evenly along a line arc in a grid pattern or in the case of fixtures along a pipe or straight length of truss Note For details about array fixtures along a pipe or truss see Hanging multiple fixtures on page 195 To perform a linear array 1 Select the object that you want to array 2 From the Tools menu choose Array and then choose Array Linear Click a point on your drawing or type in coordinates to spe
146. apter Layout tabs 369 Setting up WYSILink 370 WYSI Link mode 371 ETCLink functions 376 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 367 WYSILink Link mode Release 19 0 cae wysiwyg March 2007 WYSILink Link mode y ae Layout tabs Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These tabs provide various configurations of the views in which you are working To change layouts click the appropriate tab Link mode contains the following layout tab m Message Log The work area displays a spreadsheet of ETCLink error messages WYSIWYG Reference Guide 369 WYSILink Link mode Release 19 0 b Setting up WYSI Link I ntroduction WYS Link combines WYSIWYG visualization software with ETC s Sensor Advanced Features to perform system diagnostics When Sensor detects a problem WYSI Link logs it posts a detailed alert and highlights the image of the affected fixture along with lamp and dimmer data WYSI Link highlights affected fixtures in Data and Wireframe views in CAD Data and Live modes giving you the most complete information about the problem You can also use the message log to track problems by fixture over time WYS I Link resides on a PC connected to an ETCNet2 network and gives you access to all ETCLink features You can record and play backup looks view which console is controlling which dimmers and obtain information from any dimmer or dimmer rack in your system Hardware reg
147. ar is the order in which they are populated a f you require more than 512 addresses the standard DMX universe then you must add additional patch domains to meet your requirement The addresses can be split over universes Type the addresses manually b C In the box provided type the required addresses in the format DomainName StartAddress EndAddress for example a 1 169 Use the arrow buttons to adjust the order of the patches the order in which they appear is the order in which they are populated Click Next and then proceed to step 13 Use Auto I nsert to create the addresses automatically e Click the Auto nsert icon to automatically create the domain with the proper number of addresses that you need for your grid In the resulting Auto Insert window type the Patch Domain Prefix for example a In the Number of Channels Per Domain box accept the default value or type a new value based on the number of channels that you can control In the Start Address box type the start address for the patch domain Click OK to have WYSIWYG populate the End Address based on the number of channels reguired Click Next and then proceed to step 13 Select the addresses from a list If you do not want to manually type the addresses click the New icon and then click ellipses button The Patch Universe window appears 2 x Patch Universe Patch Universe Domain Mame Start Address 1
148. ase or decrease the size of the You may want to add a legend to your layout to provide a definition of the symbols used in the layout To add a legend to a layout you must first use the Legend Wizard to create the legend The legend that you create can consist of the symbol name wattage count and any other special notes You can create multiple legends per layout To create legend items 1 Right click in the Wizards shortcut bar and then select New Legend Result The Enter new Legend name dialog box is displayed ln wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Presentation mode Type a name for the legend and then click OK Result The legend shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar and the Legend Wizard opens Step 1 Legend Layout Legend Layout x W Display Title Title fitue lw Display column headings Cancel Options in Step 1 affect the layout of your legend a Title Select the Display Title check box if you want to display the name of the legend Type a title in the Title box if you want a title other than the default name to be displayed b Columns Select the Display column headings check box if you want columns to be displayed in the legend Choose the columns that you want displayed by selecting the appropriate columns from the list The Symbol and Name columns are displayed by default Order the display of columns by clicking the Up and Down buttons Step 2 Legend Symbo
149. assign or change light emission properties for the selected object without opening the Properties window You can enter repetitive information as well as incremental information for each object as you click on it To use the Quick Light Emission Tool 1 From the Tools menu choose Quick Light Emission Tool 5 Tip You can also click the Quick Light Emission Tool from the Tools toolbar 4 Quick Light Emission Tool x Select the light emission properties you want to modify and specify what changes should be made Static color and intensity Modify static color Modify static intensity Dynamic color and intensity olor patch Po 4 suto Increment Clear All Cancel Select the light emission properties for the selected object For details on each of the options see Light Emission tab on page 158 If you want the value to auto increment for color make sure you select the Auto ncrement check box WYSIWYG will assign the next sequential number based on the properties and requirements of the previous patch When you have chosen all desired values click OK wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Sidedness tab Options on the S dedness tab affect how the selected object appears in Shaded views and Renderings You cannot change the sidedness of any of the objects that come with WYSIWYG either library objects or default venues By default all objects in the WYSIWYG library are double sided
150. ate system of 3 working axes X Y and Z The point where the 3 axes meet is called the origin and the value of X Y and Z is O respectively 0 0 0 By default the origin is set at the center point of the WYSIWYG venue that you insert Inserting venues is discussed in Drawing a venue on page 133 You can reset the origin to another point in your drawing you can set a user origin so that a different point will assume the values 0 0 0 To set the user origin 1 From the Tools menu choose Set User Origin Tip You can also use the Origin tool on the 7oolstoolbar n 2 Click a point on your drawing or type in the coordinates X Y Z that will assume the values 0 0 0 This point will remain 0 0 0 until you change it again To reset the user origin From the Tools menu choose Reset User Origin Result This resets the origin back to the WYSIWYG default Coordinate notation When entering coordinates in WYSIWYG you can specify a location or distance in either inch fractions to the sixteenth of an inch or millimeters For example you can specify a measurement of 1 6 3 16 which translates to 1 foot 6 and 3 16 inches To set default options 1 From the Options menu choose View Options 2 Click the Draw Options tab 104 wysiwyg e March 2007 CAD mode 3 Clear the Use User Defaults check box to modify the default setting for Precision View Options E x General Draw Options Flot type Show Details W SnanTn M Gr
151. ated in CAD mode Focus position drop down list Note The Focus tool does not take into account the current viewing position or fixture settings In one orientation dragging to the right on the trackpad results in the beam moving left but rotating the fixture 180 degrees and dragging to the right should cause the beam to move to the right This effect occurs with both moving mirror and moving head fixtures Video tool Streaming video enables you to bring a live or pre recorded video stream into WYSIWYG and play it back while you set looks in Design mode and while you precue in Live mode To do so you must first use CAD mode to draw the screen upon which the video will play Note You can only incorporate live video if you have WYSIWYG Perform you cannot select a video from a live capture device if you have WYSIWYG Design After you draw the screen and attach the video source you use the Video designer tool in Design mode to start the playback or stream You can view the video in any of the Shaded views using the controls on the Video designer tool to pause fast forward rewind or stop the video To use the Video tool Once you have the video source attached to the screen you must use the Video designer tool to control it For more information on attaching the video source to the screen see To draw a screen on page 145 and To configure a new video source for streaming video on page 145 Note If the video contro
152. before you can start using it To activate the WYSIWYG software involves entering an 11 digit activation code To register the software involves entering a validation code This section is broken down into the following three steps m starting WYSIWYG for the first time and running through the Product Configuration Wizard E activating the software E registering the software To start WYSIWYG for the first time Note Before you perform this procedure ensure that you have the correct dongle installed on your computer or that the network dongle is installed on a computer that you can access from your PC 1 On your desktop click the shortcut icon to start WYSIWYG or click Start gt All Programs gt WYSIWYG gt WYSIWYG Result The WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard appears WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard E ajx Welcome to the WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard WySTWYn is available in a number of license configurations This wizard will help you to configure your WYSIWYG installation You may change these settings in the future by accessing Application Options under the Options menu IF ynu have a dongle please connect it to your computer before proceeding To continue click Mext wysiwyg gt March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Installation configuration activation and registration To ensure that the Wizard appears the next time you launch WYSIWYG leave the check mark in the box bes
153. ble Plot Colour W Editable W Opaque T Use Document Line Weight Line Weight 0 077 lw Use Plot colour for rendering Render Colour OR Cancel E Visible Select this check box to make the selected layer visible on the plot and in shaded views If you modify the property here it is changed on the Layer Database dialog box m Editable select this check box to make the selected layer editable on the plot and in shaded views Modifying the property here changes it on the Layer Database dialog box m Opaque Click this check box if you want all objects on the current layer to be opaque beams of light will not pass through any of these objects m Plot Color Sets the layer s color for wireframe views This is the color that is used for objects that reside on the selected layer when printing the document unless otherwise modified To modify the object color refer to the General tab on page 156 m Use Document Line Weight Select this check box to set the layer s line thickness to the default value specified in Show Options For more information refer to the Show Options window on page 91 wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Click to clear the check box and then type a thickness in the Line Weight box below to set a specific line thickness for the layer The value is used as the line thickness for all the objects that reside on the specified layer unless otherwise modified To modify the line thickn
154. buted over the length of the pipe truss around the point that you have specified Result The selected lights are evenly spaced around the point To replace fixtures Select the fixtures that you want to replace Right click and choose Replace Fixture Select the new type of fixture from the Fixture Selection dialog box A N Click nsert Result All the fixtures that you selected in step 1 are replaced with the fixture type chosen in step 3 Some fixture attributes may be modified as a result of the replacement wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Custom fixtures To create a custom fixture You must create custom fixtures on the WYSIWYG welcome screen with all files closed If you are currently working on a document save and close it Note You do not have to complete all fields Fill in as much information as you can You cannot delete or edit custom fixtures once saved 1 o Ff o N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 WYSIWYG Reference Guide On the WYSIWYG welcome screen from the Options menu choose Create new conventional Result The Fixture Wizard opens Select the type of fixture that you want to create In the Name box type a name for the new fixture Click Next From the 7ype drop down list select the circuit type The default REGDIM is a regular dimmer Click Next Add or modify the path Note The path is the location in the library where the fixture w
155. cannot install WYSIWYG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system m 2 MB of free disk space m Windows XP USB or ECP parallel port 7 Network interface card running TCP IP For WYSIWYG Perform workstations E Use a WYG it 2 or compatible DMX reception device except when used with certain consoles contact the console manufacturer for details m MIDI output port to use with Autofocus enabled consoles Minimum hardware requirements for WYSI Link E Sensor dimmer rack with Control Electronic Module CEM software version 3 11 or later m ETCNet2 DMX Node with RFU Link option software version 2 1 1 or later I nstalling WYSI WYG The installation procedure for WYSIWYG is the same regardless of the level that you have purchased The WYSIWYG install panel appears when the CD is inserted into your PC s CD drive or when you double click the install file if you have downloaded the software This guide displays buttons for all the installation options E Install WYSIWYG E Install WYSIWYG Network Server see Installing WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network on page 35 m Quick Start Guide 7 Quick Start Tutorials u Reference Guide m Release Notes m Install Adobe Acrobat Reader os wysiwyg March 2007 Installation configuration activation and registration To install WYSIWYG 1 Insert the installation CD into your PC s CD drive OR double click the install file if you have downloaded the sof
156. ccessible from the CAD Options toolbar The following definitions identify the working axes X Y and Z and the missing coordinate for each plot type The missing coordinate can be defined as the axis for which a value cannot be set simply by clicking on the work space For details see The missing coordinate on page 106 Plan View Plan views display the plot from above looking down This is similar to a plan view drawing on paper In plan views the working axes are X and Y and the missing coordinate is Z f Left View Left views display the plot looking from the left side through the venue This is similar to a section on paper In left views the working axes are Y and Z and the missing coordinate is X Y Right View Right views display the plot looking from the right side through the venue This is similar to a section on paper In right views the working axes are Y and Z and the missing coordinate is X g Front View Front views display the plot looking from the front side through the venue This is similar to an elevation on paper In front views the working axes are X and Z and the missing coordinate is Y aa Back View Back views display the plot looking from the back side through the venue This is similar to an elevation on paper In back views the working axes are X and Z and the missing coordinate is Y i Isometric View An Isometric view is a 3D perspective drawing Despite this you are still limited to two working
157. ce tool 2 From the Edit menu choose Replace Tip You can also use the Rep ace tool on the Data toolbar 3 Type your search criteria Enter a value to find and a value to replace it with Select the Match whole word only check box to search for data matching exactly what you have typed as opposed to data containing parts or all of what you have typed Select the Match case check box to enable a case sensitive search where uppercase and lowercase letters will affect the results 4 Click Find Next Replace or Replace All Result a If you click Find Next cells that match your search criteria are highlighted with the first match active a If you click Replace cells that match your search criteria are highlighted and the first match is replaced with the value specified in step 3 You can continue clicking Rep ace to replace each match in turn 242 wysiwyg amp March 2007 Data mode a If you click Replace All all matches are replaced with the value specified in step 3 and no cells are highlighted Inserting fixtures in Data mode Any fixtures inserted in Data mode are assigned the status unhung and are placed in the Flight Case The Flight Case allows you to drag and drop unhung fixtures onto your drawing For more information about the Flight Case refer to The Flight Case on page 232 To insert fixtures in Data mode Click the Fixture tool on the Data toolbar Navigate to the desired fixture
158. cel Type or select the multiple patch addresses to control both color and intensity The number of addresses required depends on the number of elements in your grid and the type of patch intensity color intensity reguires one channel per surface color reguires 3 channels per surface This window offers you three choices for entering multiple DMX addresses m Type them manually in the box For details see Type the addresses manually on page 230 a Click the Auto Insert icon to have WYSIWYG automatically create all the addresses that you need for the grid For details see Use Auto Insert to create the addresses automatically on page 230 a Click the New icon F and then enter the address in the box that appears For details see Select the addresses from a list on page 230 Notes Before typing addresses consult the figures shown under Addresses required and Addresses in poo for an up to date listing of the number that you will need for your grid and the number that you have already provided a Create the patch domain in the address pool box following the format DomainName StartAddress EndAddress for example a 1 169 229 CAD mode 230 Release 19 0 You can type multiple patch domains for example a 1 160 and b 1 20 If you assign more domains than are required the extra domains are ignored Use the arrow buttons to adjust the order of the patches the order in which they appe
159. cenes on page 174 To view the properties of a layer for example name color and inventory of objects drawn on the layer click Properties For more information on these properties refer to Layer properties on page 172 171 CAD mode Release 19 0 172 9 Before closing the dialog set your current layer by highlighting it and then clicking Set Current The current layer is the layer that you are working on at the moment any object that you draw is placed on this layer and assumes the layer s default properties when it is drawn An asterisk appears beside the name of the current layer 10 Click OK to close the Layers dialog Note To quickly sort the layers within the layer database click the appropriate column heading in the Layer Database dialog box For example click the Editable column heading to sort the layers by edit setting that is those layers marked as editable appear at the top of the list in alphabetical order Layer properties All layers have properties that describe the appearance of the layer Objects that reside on the layer inherit the properties of the layer by default unless you decide to override the values For more information on overriding object properties refer to General object properties on page 156 General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the selected layer s color line thickness and visibility Layer Properties General Object Counts Narre x W Visi
160. changes For details see Updating plots on page 305 Keyboard and mouse control Navigating in a New Plots view is similar to navigating in CAD mode The arrow keys are available to help you move in the direction that is noted on the key As well scroll bars along the side and bottom of the window will move you horizontally and vertically along the window For a complete list of the navigation tools that are available refer to Keyboard and mouse control on page 68 Command line The ComEdit toolbar is available to help you enter coordinates when placing objects such as lines in a New Plots view For more information on command line refer to Command line on page 107 Creating a new plot Plots are 2D schematics of your CAD model for printout You can generate as many plots as you like Once generated the view type of the New Plot or schematic is set and cannot be changed There are five plot types available Plot Type Description Plan Plot Generates the schematic from above looking down _ wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Presentation mode Plot Type Description Left Section Plot Generates the schematic looking from the left side through the venue Right Section Plot Generates the schematic looking from the right side through the venue Front Elevation Plot Generates the schematic looking from the front side through the venue Back Elevation Plot Generates the schematic look
161. choose Define North Click to place the starting point of the compass Click to place the end point of the compass The end point must be directly north of the start point Result A compass is drawn centered on the start point and pointing towards the end point Notes To remove the compass from the drawing choose Clear Direction from the Tools menu a To redefine north repeat steps 1 3 You do not need to remove the compass from the drawing when redefining north as there can be only one compass in a file Saving custom library items Custom library items are made of one or more objects including existing library items Save a custom library item for a complex object that you have drawn and think you might want to use again Note You cannot save fixtures hanging structures such as pipes and truss and Splines as components of custom library items To create a custom library item 1 2 N O O Ff 10 11 12 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the objects to be saved as a custom item From the Library menu choose Create New Library Item Tip If the menu item is greyed out one or more of the objects selected cannot be included in the custom library item Pick a base point for the item This will become the insertion point for the item Result The Library Item Wizard opens displaying a rotating shaded view of your new item Type a name for the new library item To make this item available to other documents
162. choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Select the console that you want to remove Click Delete Result The console is removed and all patch binding information is lost To control a DMX patched video source with a console Note If the video control is patched and DMX connected in Live Mode then you will not be able to control the video using any of the Video Designer Tool commands in Design mode Video sources can only be controlled by a designer tool when the DMX source is disconnected therefore you must first disconnect the applicable console device from Live Mode before using any of the Video Designer Tool commands After you have patched the control of a video source in Data mode you can use the applicable console device to control the progress of the video in Live mode In WYSIWYG you patch the control of a video source not the actual video This means that you can use the console device to control the progress of a live video stream or a video file by making the video play pause or rewind you cannot use WYSIWYG to change different aspects of the video itself wysiwyg March 2007 Live mode To control the video source the DMX patch is allocated three channels with the following controls First channel Intensity The video is off if the value is set between 1 128 below 50 it is on if the value is between 128 255 above 50 Second channel Control The video is contr
163. cify the direction and interval for the linear array For example to place a copy of the selected object every 5 at a 45 degree angle type the following and then press ENTER 5 lt 45 4 In the dialog box that opens type the total number of copies desired this includes the original object Adjust the value for the interval If reguired 5 Click OK Note The interval is defined as the distance between the copied objects To perform a polar array 1 Select the object that you want to array From the Tools menu choose Array and then choose Array Polar Click a point that will represent the center of the circle around which the objects will be arrayed 4 In the dialog box that opens type the total number of copies desired this includes the original object 5 Specify the total angle in degrees to fill with copied objects WYSIWYG Reference Guide 183 CAD mode Release 19 0 6 Select the Rotate object check box if you want the copied objects to rotate as they are pasted around the center of the circular array as shown below lt lt y l gt lt A N 4 lt Polar array with Object rotation Polar array without Object rotation 7 Click OK To perform a grid array Perform this procedure to array the selected object in a grid pattern in the direction and at the distance that you specify 1 Select the object that you want to array 2 From the Tools menu choose Array and then choose Array Grid Resul
164. ckground Rendering Manager manually before it will resume rendering WYSIWYG Reference Guide 289 Design mode Release 19 0 Managing jobs in the Background Rendering Manager queue The Job pane shows you all jobs that have been successfully sent to the Background Rendering Manager While you can send multiple jobs the Background Rendering Manager processes only one job at a time the job at the top of the queue Once this job is finished it will then automatically proceed to the next queued job and so on As shown in the Status column in the following graphic rendering jobs can have one of four statuses Queued Stopped Completed 100 00 audience Completed 100 00 Rendering This is the job that is currently being processed Only one job can have this status at any given time The values in the Progress and Time Left columns indicate when the job will be finished Queued Jobs with this status are waiting to be processed These can be new jobs or those that have already started but have been interrupted by moving them down in the queue In this latter case when the job is moved back to the top of the queue the rendering automatically resumes where it left off Stopped Jobs with this status have been manually dequeued This means that they will not automatically move up in the queue as jobs are completed To process jobs with this status you have to highlight them and click Queue to move them back into the active
165. click Show Options Document Summary tab Options on the Document Summary tab affect the document information such as name of the person who created the document and the name of the person who last modified the document The date stamps are not editable but will track the creation and modification dates of the file Show Options x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Created By Thursday September 12 2002 11271 Last Modified By New Wig Saturday September 14 2002 8 1 34 Put your comments here Comments Colour Ja Show Info tab Options on the Show nfo tab affect the venue show Designer and Assistant s names that are displayed in your show document Show Options E x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Venue PO Show iC Designer Po Assistant PO WYSIWYG Reference Guide 91 92 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 Object Defaults tab Options on the Object Defaults tab affect the default settings for the regional profile The profile that you choose determines items such as the type of bulb to use in a particular fixture This also sets how points will be displayed as crosses dots sguares or circles Show Options x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults
166. coordinate z kd Fa CAD coordinate foo Focus coordinate joo Head height oor Use only one missing coordinate Automatically adjust with command line Show head height circle Cancel In the CAD coordinate box type the value for the CAD coordinate In the Focus coordinate box type a value for the focus coordinate if you want to focus fixtures while inserting objects 4 If you want to use only the CAD coordinate for focusing and placing editing objects select the Use only one missing coordinate check box 5 To automatically adjust the missing coordinate with any 3D coordinate value that you enter on the command line select the Automatically adjust with command line check box 6 Select the Show head height check box to display the coverage of beams at the head height selected in the Head height box 7 In the Head height box type a value to check the light coverage at a certain height the height of the performer Note This box is enabled when the Show head height circle check box is selected 8 When you are finished with your selections click OK Example 1 Change to the plan view in your drawing Press TAB and then type a value of O for the missing CAD coordinate Insert a few objects on the stage All of these objects are drawn resting on the stage 4 Change the missing CAD coordinate to a height of 10 PE wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 CAD mode Insert a riser by clicking the Riser button o
167. cription Hot Key Insert line Insert riser Insert cylinder Insert pipe Insert truss Insert text label Insert fixture Snap to grid Snap to midpoints Snap to endpoints Zoom window Modify view ToolTips on off o lt lt NN mM 2 QO T7 0D FH VDA r Insert dimension Mid Operations Description Hot Key Abort mode A Finish mode F Close line C Quick increase Quick decrease Snap to grid Snap to midpoints Snap to endpoints Previous zoom Next zoom Rotate truss counter clockwise Rotate truss clockwise n KX N 2 om lt o OJ Truss rotate from one end to the other end ToolTips on off Y WYSIWYG Reference Guide 393 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys 394 Default hot keys available in Simulation Views Release 19 0 The following default hot keys are helpful when working in Design and Live modes Start Operations Description At last and focus Focus At full intensity At 50 intensity Intensity off Intensity specify Iris wide Iris tight Iris specify Zoom window Zoom fit Modify view ToolTips on off Mid Operations Description Abort mode Finish mode ToolTips on off Hot Key T 4A g o o WRF T lt lt Z N Hot Key wysiwyg gt March 2007 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Default hot keys available in Presentation Views The following default hot keys are helpful when working in Presentation mode Plots Start Operations Description Hot Key Insert line Insert rectangle
168. ct another and then press the Space bar to perform the same operation repeatedly Alter the missing focus coordinate to focus fixtures at different heights When focusing fixtures you can click and drag in the wireframe view If you are using WYSIWYG in the theatre launch this command and then look to the stage to position your lights Working in an Isometric view you can use the snap tools to focus fixtures to points on your set pieces If you set the intensity to a specific value the right click menu option At Full and Focus changes to At and Focus where is the specific value that you set Select multiple fixtures by dragging a window around them If you drag the window from right to left across projected beams you can select the fixtures that produced the beams To select fixtures by type draw a box using the right mouse button You will be prompted to isolate one or more types of fixtures Use the Concept shortcuts to create and select groups of fixtures Use the Palette shortcuts to save and send color commands 363 Live mode Release 19 0 y ab Rendering Introduction At any time in Live mode you can generate a rendering of a lighting cue or static look The Render Wizard calculates the rendering based on the DMX values being received at the moment when you click Finish To render a lighting look 1 In the working area of the screen display the lighting look that you want to render 2 From the Desig
169. ct this option to turn the single sided object into a double sided object Note that you cannot change WYSIWYG S default venues from single to double sided Single Sided Select this option to turn the double sided object into a single sided object For example if you have created a custom surface wall venue and have imported it as a double sided object into WYSIWYG you can select it and make it Single sided so you can see into the venue when you rotate it in Shaded views Note that you cannot change any of WYSIWYG S library objects from double to single sided Flio Normal If you have imported a custom drawn object or drawn an object in WYSIWYG and you see in the Shaded view that it appears incorrectly the faces showing the texture color are pointing inward select this check box to flip the faces in the opposite direction and then look at the object in the Shaded view again wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Set Piece tab Options on the Set Piece tab affect the facet properties for the selected surfaces or set pieces and consequently how they will respond during simulation in shaded views when the beam quality is set to Light up Facet Splitting splits surfaces or set pieces into small triangles for the purposes of smooth beam fallout Properties a a 1 General Appearance Light Emission Sidedness et Piece Sphere T Facet Splitting Facet resolution OF Cancel Apply u Use Doc
170. cted fixture m Pipe drawing mode Sets the preference for drawing pipes either from the start or from the center For more information on drawing pipes refer to Drawing pipes on page 144 m Missing coordinate Sets missing coordinate options For more information on missing coordinates refer to The missing coordinate on page 106 m Focus mode Allows you to choose to focus a fixture as you hang it in your drawing Specify one of the following options to set how a fixture will react after you hang it in a plot m WNone This setting indicates that you can continue to hang fixtures uninterrupted m Focus after hang If enabled you will be prompted to focus each fixture as you hang it Once the fixture is focused you can continue hanging other fixtures m Focus towards origin If enabled the fixtures that you hang are automatically focused towards the user origin as you hang them You can continue to hang other fixtures uninterrupted Draw Defaults tab Options on the Draw Defaults tab affect general preferences for snap grid and units settings wysiwyg March 2007 User Options User Managing your WYSIWYG document 2 x Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation W SnapTo I Grid Centre SnapBox Size HE MidGrid D Assembly Paints Iv Focus lw Midpoints 1 Fipe T Endpoints Pan 45 Tilt 19 lw Enable Grip Dragging Units y Metio C Imperial M Cross Hairs On Precision C W
171. cursor press and hold the CTRL key Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the copied item to the desired location Release the mouse button 341 Presentation mode Release 19 0 Ordering To facilitate overlaying and underlaying placeholders use the Bring to Front and Send to Back tools Think of placeholders as being piled on top of each other Bring to Front moves the selected placeholder and its contents to the top of the pile Send to Back moves the selected placeholder and its contents behind all of the others To overlay a placeholder 1 Click to select the presentation item 2 From the Edit menu choose Bring to Front Tip You can also use the Bring to Front tool on the Pres Layout Edit toolbar Th To underlay a placeholder 1 Click to select the presentation item 2 From the Edit menu choose Send to Back du Tip You can also use the Send to Back tool on the Pres Layout Edit toolbar Printing layouts 342 If you have a large layout you can tile print the layout across multiple smaller sheets of paper To set up how you want the layout arranged on the sheets of paper see Working with layouts on page 321 You can print a complete layout or specific pages of a layout based on the settings that you choose when printing To print a layout 1 From the File menu choose Print Result The Print dialog box is displayed Print Ea Frinter Name WMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T PS Properties
172. d The Print command varies from mode to mode In general this command prints the active view to the selected printer To print a document From the File menu choose Print Result Based on the mode you are in the program may print the document directly or it may open the following dialog box so that you can set printing options Print 7 x Printer Name SSMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T Setup Print to file Print what Estentz i View C window f Latin for y fi B6 0 0 Wh paper Real Wong Paint Size re Preview Cancel Considerations when printing from CAD mode The Print command opens the Print dialog box _ wysiwyg March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document Print Ea Printer Name SSMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T Setup Print to file Print what Scaling lv Fit 1 16 Extents ie View Window f Lash ayindoy Hn paper Real Wino Paint Size fre Preview Cancel This dialog box displays the printer that is used to print your WYSIWYG document The printer shown is the default printer that you have set up in Windows Click Setup to change the printer or printer settings Select the Print to File check box to print your WYSIWYG document to a file instead of to a printer When you print WYSIWYG prompts you to enter a file name and path The Print command prints the active window using the options you specify Print What options Extents prin
173. d highlight any rendering job with the Oueued status and press this button to move the job to the top of the queue The current rendering is paused and moved down one position and the new render job starts immediately Queue Job This button is enabled only when you have selected a degueued job it is stopped but its rendering progress is retained Highlight the stopped job and then click this button to move it back into the queue If there is a Job being processed the newly queued job is placed below it Dequeue J ob Highlight a job with the Queued status and then press this button to give the job the Stopped status You can dequeue any job in the queue those that are waiting to be processed as well as the job that is currently being rendered When you dequeue a job the Background Rendering Manager retains its rendering progress and resumes the rendering when you move the job back up to the top of the queue Move Job Up This button enables you to move jobs up within their current Status level when you have multiple jobs that are either Stopped or Queued You cannot use this button to move a stopped job into the active queue However you can click the bottom job in the Queued status area and use this button to move it all the way to the top of the queue so that it starts being processed click Render ob Now as a shortcut You can also click the bottom job in the Stopped status area and move it up within this same area if desired Move
174. d custom library items you are given the option to make the item or gobo available to other documents in which case the item or gobo is saved to the application s library If you do not choose to make the items available to other documents the items are only saved within the one document In either case the items are saved and visible in the document regardless of which computer or application the document Is opened in Custom conventional fixtures must be created from the WYSIWYG welcome screen and are saved directly to your application s library The new conventional fixture is available for you to use in all documents created using this application If used in a show document the custom conventional fixture is available in the document regardless of which computer or application the document is opened in Custom color gobo wheels and scrolls are only saved in the document and cannot be saved to the application s library They travel with the document but if you need to use the same wheel or scroll on another show you must regenerate it every time Note Once created custom library items custom gobos and custom conventional fixtures cannot be deleted The only way to delete them is to delete the appropriate cdb file saved in the WYSIWYG library folder This file is generated for each category of custom item it is not generated for each item When you delete the gobos cdb file for example you delete all your custom gobos T
175. d in the New Plots view supports both absolute and relative moves in a manner similar to CAD mode For more information on this command refer to Moving on page 153 When you move a pipe you also move all its attached fixtures and accessories You also break the positional link between the pipe in CAD mode and the pipe in the New Plots view All fixtures and accessories that are attached to that pipe still maintain their link to the original objects in CAD mode even though they have also moved When you move a fixture off of a hang structure you fix its location in relation to the hang structure For example if you move a fixture off a pipe and then move the pipe 10 feet the fixture also moves with the pipe This action breaks the positional link of the fixture to the hang structure Note You can nudge objects up down left or right a certain distance by using specific key combinations Use the ALT arrow keys to nudge an object a specific distance use the ALT SHIFT arrow keys to nudge an object a tenth of that distance Rotate The Rotate command in a New Plots view works in a similar manner as it does in CAD mode For more information on this command refer to Rotating on page 154 Note Rotating an object breaks its positional link Fillet The Fillet command in a New Plots view works in a similar manner as it does in CAD mode For more information on this command refer to Fillet on page 182 W
176. d motion control patch universe that you have created in Data mode Note For information on creating a patch universe see To create a new patch universe on page 247 Click to select the axis that you want to attach to the patch universe Right click and select Properties Click the Axis tab Click the Motion Patch option button From the Universe drop down box select the motion control patch universe to which you want to attach the axis Oo mB Oo N 6 From the D drop down list select the ID on the motion control system with which you want to associate this axis Note The motion control system must be connected to your computer for the ID to appear in this drop down list If the system is not currently connected you can also type the ID directly into this drop down list box 7 Click OK wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode To attach an object to a movement axis Notes m You can attach one or more objects to each axis however each object can be attached to only one axis at a time a When you attach an object to a linear axis the distance from the axis to the object does not affect the object s movement the object will always follow the path of the axis regardless of where you have placed the axis or object a When placing the object to be rotated in your drawing note that its position relative to the rotational axis is important The distance from the central point of the axis to the object represents the
177. d on an angle This feature is helpful for printing booms CAD Printing tab Options on the CAD Printing tab affect the scale for the drawing View Options x General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View Type Showy Details Print Options Scaling Type Fit Fixed C vate BE 01 RE Oh paper Real Wino Point Size i 6 T Hide Zero Intensity Fizture m Fit If you select this option the entire CAD drawing is scaled to fit inside the placeholder m Fixed If you select this option the CAD item is printed at the specified scale To determine which portion of the CAD item is displayed inside the placeholder choose Open Contents Inside this view you can move around a white rectangle wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 Presentation mode that represents the placeholder See Adjusting the contents on page 330 for details on the functionality available with Open Contents m Variable If you select this option when you open contents you will be able to change the size of the white rectangle without affecting the original placeholder The portion of the drawing contained within the white rectangle is scaled to fit in the placeholder See Adjusting the contents on page 330 for details on the functionality available with Open Contents m On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the layout m Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that
178. d printing has been disabled Users cannot edit files nor can they insert items into a file For more information on preparing your file in Presentation mode refer to Chapter 9 Presentation mode You can download the WYSIWYG Viewer from the Cast Software Web site at www cast soft com wysiwyg WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 6 CAD mode CAD mode is where you create your show drawings This includes drawing your venue set pieces lighting positions focus positions and lighting fixtures CAD mode operates like many other CAD programs so many of the concepts will be familiar to those who have used a computer aided drafting program before WYSIWYG adds features that are specific to the entertainment industry such as a comprehensive 3D library containing truss lighting equipment lighting accessories props musical instruments and various human figures In this chapter Layout tabs The CAD environment The Library Browser Drawing objects Editing objects CAD tools Hang structures Hanging and focusing fixtures Color gobos and accessories Light Emitting Surface Wizard The Flight Case Rendering 103 104 128 133 152 176 186 194 219 225 232 235 101 CAD mode Release 19 0 March 2007 CAD mode y ae Layout tabs Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These layouts provide various configurations of the views you are working with To change layouts click t
179. de b ab AutoPatch I ntroduction AutoPatch is a protocol by which WYSIWYG can transfer the patch hookup to a compatible console AutoPatch is only available in WYSIWYG Perform You must be connected to a compatible console for this feature to be enabled All ports for which you want the patch information to be transferred must be properly bound Only the hookup information in patch universes bound to the console s outputs will transfer The patch information is transferred over Ethernet To perform an AutoPatch 1 Connect to the console as described in To connect to a console on page 350 2 From the Live menu choose AutoPatch Result The AutoPatch dialog opens AutoPatch Ea Clear Patch Send Patch Close 3 Click Send Patch Result WYSIWYG assembles the patch information for all the fixtures in the plot and then attempts to send the relevant patch information to each connected AutoPatch capable device Notes m A fixture s patch information is transmitted to a console only if the following conditions are met a the fixture has at least one part that is patched to a patch universe m the patch universe is bound to the console m the console is connected to WYSIWYG through the Device Manager a Some fixtures might have parts patched to two or more different consoles In this situation both consoles will receive the patch information for that fixture but the port numbers given for each part will b
180. de The individual menus are explained within the context of each mode chapter The menu bar is dockable It has a grab bar on the left that is used to move the menu bar around the screen It may be placed on the edges of the work area top bottom left or right It may also be dragged off the edge of the work area and into its own window This window remains on top of the WYSIWYG screen and may be dragged anywhere on your display Menu commands can be accessed using a mouse keyboard or by using hot keys To access menu commands using the keyboard 1 Press ALT n where n is the underlined letter in the menu name Result The menu will be displayed 2 Press the key corresponding to the underlined letter in the command that you want to execute Note Some commands have shortcuts that do not require menu selection In those cases the shortcut keys are listed to the right of the command in the menu Example To undo the last command press CTRL Z Toolbars Toolbars provide button access to most commands This is in lieu of selecting the commands through the menus in the menu bar Toolbars like menus are mode sensitive However unlike menus you can customize how the toolbars are displayed and which toolbars are open for each mode Toolbars that are greyed out in the toolbar selection list are not used in the current mode Toolbars are typically found directly under the menu bar and have a grab bar on the left that is used to move
181. de 155 CAD mode Release 19 0 5 Release the mouse button to set the shape Tip As you move the mouse the current coordinates appear at the bottom of the screen Object properties All objects in WYSIWYG have properties Properties are the characteristics or attributes that shape and define an object Modifying object properties is a form of editing and is the only way to make changes to objects once they have been drawn some exceptions exist To edit object properties 1 Select the objects that you want to edit 2 Right click on the object and then select Properties Tip At any time to access an object s properties you can click on the Properties tool on the Fait toolbar P Result The Properties dialog is displayed Note All objects have general properties that affect the color and layer on which they are drawn Objects also have properties that are particular to that type of object For example fixtures have unit numbers but do not have a radius When an object is selected and its properties are displayed a tab appears in the properties dialog box for that type of object When you select multiple objects of different types tabs appear for each type of object selected General object properties In WYSIWYG there are three tabs that appear in the properties dialog box for every object These three tabs are the General Appearance Light Emission and Sidedness tabs For 3D solids and surfaces the Set Piece tab als
182. de them convert them into a library item or substitute WYSI WYG fixtures for the existing components See below for details Note You will be prompted to determine what action to take for each component To apply the same treatment to each component in the drawing select the option and then click the checkbox beside Do for all Exploding the component Exploding the component breaks it into its sub components You must be careful of components that are made up of other components as WYSIWYG will only explode down one level Converting components into library items Converting a component into a library item imports the object and creates a duplicate of it to add to the library for future use Note that the component will lose all surface properties such as color and texture and it will only be available in the library of the current document To make it available globally see To create a custom library item on page 132 When you convert SketchUp files into custom library items they appear on the L brary tab of the Library Browser within the SketchUp folder Substituting fixtures for components Converting a component into a fixture replaces the SketchUp component with a WYSIWYG fixture of your choice If you find that you are always replacing a particular type of component with a specific fixture you can set an option in WYSIWYG so that the substitution will automatically occur each time you import the component For example
183. dering a Atmospheric Options The options that you set here affect the atmospheric conditions that are visible in your final rendering To simulate atmospheric dust or fog select Haze For additional opacity select Smoke b Density Use the slider to set the visibility of the haze particles A setting of 0 indicates that the particles cannot be seen c Granularity Use the slider to set the granularity of the smoke This setting affects how fine smoke particles are This option is available only if you choose Smoke under Atmospheric Options Step 4 Select How Shadows Will Be Simulated Select Objects to have objects cast shadows Choose Atmospheric for a true representation of how light behaves shadows are cast on objects and through smoke Use the Presence slider to adjust the realism of shadow intensity and colour Subtle gives a more realistic look Bold is less realistic but renders faster Shadows projected on objects M Presence Subtle Bold lt Back Next gt Add Shortcut Finish Options in Step 4 affect the projection of shadows in your rendering a Shadows Select how you want shadows to be projected in the final rendering If you choose None then no shadows are calculated by WYSIWYG that is _ wysiwyg gt March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Design mode objects in the path of the light beam do not create shadows Instead all
184. design headings Result The Report headings editor dialog box is displayed showing the headings variables and a new menu and toolbar for formatting text Report headings editor File Edit Format Help 1127 2003 11 26 Veo boy s MD esigner gt i Ved ssistant s nHeadings n SeLata e From the Format menu use the alignment font border edit and color controls to customize the heading text Modify or add variables as reguired Save your changes and close the window Result You are prompted to apply the headinos to all the reports in the document Click Yes to indicate that all reports will be modified Click Wo to change only the chosen report wysiwyg March 2007 Using variables in reports Presentation mode Variables can be used in reports and worksheets to ensure that the same type of information is displayed in each report These variables are found in the report headings of each report and can be globally shared among all the reports in your document The variables you can use and the information they store are described in the following table Variable Title Venue Designer Show Assistant9o Headings Data Scene Group WYSIWYG Reference Guide Definition The name of the report The venue for the show The lighting designer for the show The name of the show The assistant lighting designer for the show The column headings t
185. displayed on the layout A list of all the keys that you have created is displayed in the drop down list Scale The scale ratio in inches and feet at which the key should be printed If the scale that you want to use for printing is not displayed select Custom On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the layout Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On paper box For example you might want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of your layout However this one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet Layout Tools Placeholders You can move and resize placeholders at any time To resize a placeholder 1 2 Click to select the presentation item Click and drag the marker points of the placeholder to resize it Note Resizing a placeholder affects the content that is displayed You might have to edit the scale of the contents or revisit open contents To move a placeholder 1 2 Click to select the presentation item When a small grey rectangle appears on your cursor click and hold the left mouse button and drag the placeholder to the desired location Release the mouse button Tip Use the gridlines of the presentation view to line up placeholders To copy a placeholder and its contents 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Click to select the presentation item When a small grey rectangle appears on your
186. dongle installed to launch the program and then click Next Result The program verifies that you have the correct dongle attached and the Product Configuration Successful window appears WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard Ed Ea You have successfully configured WYSIWYG To close this wizard and proceed with the choice you selected click Finish You may change these settings in the Future by accessing Application Options under the Options menu Click Finish The product that you chose launches and the Activate or Register window appears based on the level of product that you have purchased a If you have purchased a new box product containing a new version dongle skip to the product registration process For details see To register WYSIWYG on page 42 41 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 19 0 a If you are upgrading from WYSIWYG 3 X continue with the next procedure To activate WYSIWYG on page 42 To activate WYSIWYG Note This procedure is only applicable if you are upgrading from WYSIWYG 3 X If you are upgrading from a newer release or If you have just purchased the latest release then you can skip directly to the registration process For details see To register WYSIWYG on page 42 1 If you previously owned WYSIWYG 3 X and have just upgraded to the new version of the product the first window that appears is the WYS WYG Upgrade dialog box
187. draw a circle in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar 1 From the Draw menu choose Circle Tip You can also use the Circle tool on the Draw toolbar i 2 Click to place the center of the circle Click to set the radius for the circle Drawing arcs There are two ways in which you can draw arcs m non interactive mode in which you type the exact radius start and end angles of the arc m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the arc WYSIWYG Reference Guide 139 CAD mode 140 Release 19 0 To draw an arc in non interactive mode 1 N O O FP O ND From the Draw menu choose Arc Tip You can also use the Arc tool on the Draw toolbar p In the Radius box type a radius for the arc The default value is 4 0 In the Start Angle box type the start angle The default value is 0 00 In the End Angle box type the end angle for the arc The default value is 180 00 Click OK Click on the drawing to place the arc Click elsewhere in the drawing to finish placing the arc To draw an arc in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar o Ff N From the Draw menu choose Arc Tip You can also use the Arc tool on the Draw toolbar W7 Click to place the start point of the arc Click to place the end point of the arc Click to place the middle point of the arc Click elsewhere
188. e EDM Source Untitled Emphasis Console EDM Level 255 Level Source DMX Port A Output Level 255 Node Name Dimmer Room OMe Mode Type D20 amp F Rack H li Slot H li Scale ji Actual Load Recorded Load 0 To obtain dimmer information type or select the dimmer number and then click About Dimmer Tip You can also access the About Dimmer command in CAD Data and Live modes by right clicking on a fixture symbol This will open a slightly different dialog box Properties FR About Dimmer Intensity Dimmer E Ownership Wie Eras aK Status EDMX Source Ne EDMX Source EDMXLevel D Level Source Dix Part A Output Level n Node Name Type D20AF Rack St B a Scale nis Actual Load 0 Recorded Load Cancel Note The Ownership box lists all network devices such as consoles and nodes that are attempting to control the specified dimmer About Dimmer Rack The About Dimmer Rack dialog box allows you to choose a specific dimmer rack on a specific ETCNet2 DMX node The status of the input ports A and B number of dimmer modules on the rack and the dimmer type are displayed on this dialog box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 377 WYSILink Link mode Release 19 0 To access rack information 1 From the WYSILink menu choose About Rack Tip You can also use the About Rack tool on the WYSILink toolbar W Result The About Dimmer Rack dialog box is displayed Mode List Enter Rack i 5 Dimmer
189. e 5 To print show information such as venue lighting designer and show name select the Show nfo check box Show information is entered in Show options as described in Show information on page 303 6 To display a graphic in the header and or footer type a file name in the Bitmap File box or use the file browser to locate the file To display correctly the graphics selected must be monochrome bitmaps 7 _ To print a total count of the fixtures on the selected pipe select the Fixture Count check box The total count is broken down by fixture type 8 _ To print a total count of the circuits used by the fixtures select the Circuit Count check box 9 _ To display text in the footer and or header of the pipe tape type a text file name in the 7ext File box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 345 Presentation mode 346 10 11 12 13 14 Release 19 0 To print a total count of the number of lenses mounted in the fixtures select the Lens Count check box The total count is broken down by fixture type To print the weight of the fixtures on the pipe select the Weight check box To display tick marks on the pipe tape select the Show Tick Marks check box Tick marks are placed every foot or half meter based on the unit of measurement imperial or metric The tick marks are for reference purposes only When you have finished making your selections click Print to send the print job to the pipe tape printer Click Save and
190. e 81 0 3 3706 5611 Fax 81 0 3 3706 6766 E mail info thea eng co jp Web site www thea eng co p Support for WYSI WYG Perform Console Edition For assistance with a problem related to WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition contact the manufacturer of the console to which you are connected The console manufacturer is listed on the Welcome page that appears when you launch the application WYSIWYG Reference Guide 13 Introduction Release 19 0 Welcome to WYSIWYG Introduction The WYSIWYG suite of software products designed specifically for lighting professionals offers a range of solutions to meet the needs of designers assistants electricians console operators teachers and students WYSIWYG is the essential tool if you are looking to E increase creative freedom H save time win more contracts m cut costs Within the WYSIWYG suite of products any higher level product contains all the features of a lower level product WYSIWYG Report Design and Perform are the core products with WYSIYWG Report offering basic CAD and paperwork solutions and WYSIWYG Perform providing an end to end solution including CAD paperwork rendering and pre visualization In less than one day of training you can begin working with WYSIWYG and see your lighting design without actually installing any lights You can even see what a new lighting fixture can do before you rent buy or install it Once your design is complete WYSIWYG
191. e Draw menu or the New Plot Options toolbar The available line tools are as follows a lt Solid a es Dot m p Center E ps Dash You can create a double line from a single line by modifying the properties of a line For more information on creating double lines refer to page 318 After you have drawn a line you can choose to add arrows to one or both ends of the line The default is none For more information on adding arrows refer to page 319 Note When you add objects such as lines to your plot they are not added to your drawing in CAD mode Drawing text Drawing text in a New Plots view is similar to drawing text in CAD mode You can access the Text tool from the Draw menu or on the New Plot Options toolbar T For more information refer to Drawing text labels on page 140 Notes m When you add an object such as text to your plot it is not added to your drawing in CAD mode m True type fonts are not supported in New Plots WYSIWYG Reference Guide 313 Presentation mode Release 19 0 Inserting symbols You can insert symbols that are not associated with any object in CAD mode This allows you to represent the fixtures when you draw a key or want to show the position of a boom in a plan view for example You can access the Symbol tool from the Draw menu or from the New Plot Options toolbar Ey To learn how to insert symbols see To insert objects from the library on page 129 In the New Plots vie
192. e Fill Colour L__ The General tab is similar for all items For more information on this tab see To modify item properties on page 327 Legend tab Options on the Legend tab affect the scaling and content of the placeholder WYSIWYG Reference Guide 335 Presentation mode 336 Release 19 0 Properties FER Keys Legend Print Options General Legend fine 01 fieo hy paper Real ond Legend Select the legend that you want to be displayed on the layout A list of all the legends you have created is displayed in the drop down list Print Options The scale ratio in inches and feet at which the legend should be printed If the scale that you want to use for printing is not displayed select Custom On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the layout Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On paper box For example you might want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of your layout However this one inch measurement translates to a more realistic measurement for example 3 feet You may want to add a key to your layout to provide a definition for the fixture notation used in the layout To add a key to a layout you must first use the Key Wizard to create the key The key you create consists of the symbol of one given fixture and identifiers for the various attributes notated around the symbol You can create multip
193. e Live drop down menu select DMX Camera Patch 2 In the nter DMX Camera Patch window enter a new patch for example type Camera l where the 1 indicates the first channel number that the camera attributes will patch into Enter DMX Lamera Patch 3 In the Device Manager bind the appropriate output of your selected console with the camera s patch universe and then connect to the console 4 In Live mode click the Shaded tab Result The position and focus point coordinates and roll and zoom angles of the camera display on the status bar CamPosi 164 1 164 1 164 1 CamFocus i 1641 164 1 164 1 R oll 180 000 Zoom 5 000 From the Options menu choose View Options Select the Options tab From the Camera drop down menu select DMX control Click OK Result You should now have direct control over the DMX camera It may be helpful to record the camera patch as a pop up frame in data to view the attributes that you are modifying O N O ol ST a Da i eas SE g Fi i i E ma _ WYSIWYG Reference Guide 365 Release 19 0 To provide a fairly neutral starting point it is recommended that the majority of the sixteen DMX Camera channels initially be set at a level of 50 per cent The exceptions are camera Y coarse which should be set at 40 per cent and target Y coarse which Should be set at 60 per cent Adjusting these two attributes will ensure that the camera and the target are not occupying the sam
194. e a scroll for a color scroller you will need to create a custom color or gobo list To view an existing library list 1 From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists Colour Gobo Lists E x Add 16 Colour Scroll Insert eal our 518 Colours Ee 518 Gobos set at e Acrobat FE Colours 1 Irizar Ciota Eere Acrobat FE Colours 2 4 e Acrobat PE Colours riser Erien Acrobat PE Gobos 3 Delete Altman 10000 Colour 1 6 Remove Altman 10000 Colour 2 f Altman 10000 Colour 3 0 Up Altman 10000 Colour 4 a Altman 10000 Colour 5 roo Altman 10000 Colour 6 Altman 902 Colour 1 Altman 902 Colour 2 Altman 902 Colour 3 Altman 302 Colour 4 Altman 902 Colour 5 Show Altman 902 Colour 6 D Cuim Altman Comet Colour 1 Altman Comet Colour 2 Stock Altman Comet Colour 3 In the Show section click Stock Scroll to find the list you want to view Click on the list name A list of slots and the color or gobo for each slot is displayed in the slot window If OPEN appears in the Name column for a slot the color gobo or prism has not been assigned or is intentionally left OPEN Click on a slot to see the preview of that color or gobo in the box below the slot window Click C ose when you are done To create a custom color gobo list o o Ff O N WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Custom Click Add Type the name of the new list Type the number o
195. e choice of patching the axis to either a DMX patch universe or a motion control universe based on the type of console or system you will be using to move the objects For details on patching the axis to a DMX patch universe see To patch a movement axis to a DMX console device on page 249 When controlling the object s movement with a motion control system the patch indicates the ID on the motion control system that corresponds to the WYSIWYG axis ID the axis name and the position of the object on its path When connected to a system or to WYSIWYG s Motion Control Console you can watch the object s position change in patch view as it moves along its path Note Before performing this procedure the movement axis must already be linked to the patch universe For details see To attach a movement axis to a motion patch universe on page 148 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 249 Data mode 290 Release 19 0 In the shortcut area click the Patch tab Click the patch shortcut to which you have linked control of the moving object Result The motion control patch appears in the patch universe Open the console device or motion control system that you have connected to the motion control patch for example the Motion Control Console shown below MCConsole Tee w Linear Trawel Retational meters Made Update Axi Reape iE C Static Hew Axis bounce Delete Axis Forward Delete All t Backweare
196. e column name and the available filters Specify Filter x Filter Filter column Unit Text g Contains text Exact match Select the value that you want to filter You can also type in a value and choose whether you want to filter that specific text or filter for entries that contain that text Result The spreadsheet refreshes displaying only fixtures that meet the filter criteria To remove data filters Right click on a column heading Choose Remove Data Filter Result The spreadsheet returns to its unfiltered state Customizing spreadsheets There are different ways to sort and view your data First consider the different spreadsheets available on the Columns shortcut bar Alternatively you can modify a spreadsheet to suit your needs Customizing a view allows you to change how the data is displayed and sorted wysiwyg March 2007 Data mode To modify a data sheet 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Options menu choose View Options You can also click the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Bl Click the Data View Options tab View Options x General Data View Options Columns Detail Level Show Fietures C Ghan Accessorie i Show Circuits Channel lw Show Selection Always lw Enable Heading Click Sort T Show Only Selected I Word Wrap M Show Gridlines lw Show Edit Bar Filter Filter column No
197. e comma period semicolon colon or slash Note that the co ordinate separator cannot be the same as the decimal separator Region profile for new documents The profile to be used for such items as voltage and which default lamp should be used in a fixture Look for network dongle 1f you have a WYSIWYG Network product installed for example WYSIWYG Learn Network AWT or CSP you must click this check box to ensure that the program looks for a network dongle when you launch WYSIWYG If you do not have WYSIWYG Network installed leave this check box deselected Note that if you choose Network product in WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard then this check box is automatically selected Show WYSIWYG configuration wizard in startup Click this check box if you want to see the product configuration wizard each time you launch WYSIWYG The wizard enables you to choose the level of WYSIWYG that you want to run for example it gives you the option of launching a standard version of WYSIWYG such as Report or Design or a network version of WYSIWYG If you leave this check box deselected the same level of WYSIWYG that you chose when running the program for the first time appears by default File Options tab Settings on the File Options tab affect your file saving settings It is important to save your work often during your work session WYSIWYG has an Auto Save function that will help to Keep your data safe however it is always a good
198. e commands relative and absolute WYSIWYG Reference Guide 153 CAD mode 154 Release 19 0 Absolute coordinates are relative to the origin of the drawing An absolute move is defined as moving an object from one specific point to another A relative move is defined as moving an object to a destination relative to its original position To move an object using the mouse 1 Select the objects to be moved Hover the cursor over the object until a grey box appears and then click and hold Drag the object to the new position and then release the mouse button to finish the move To move an object using absolute values 1 2 Select the objects to be moved From the Edit menu choose Move Tip You may also use the Move tool on the 7oolstoolbar e Click to set the base point for the move or type the coordinates of the base point and then press ENTER Note When you start typing a box appears at the bottom left hand corner of the window showing the value that you enter Type the new coordinate location for the base point and then press ENTER To move an object using relative values 1 2 Select the objects to be moved From the Edit menu choose Move Tip You may also use the Move tool on the Tools toolbar Type 6 followed by the distances to move the object and then press ENTER For example to move an object 2 0 stage right X axis and 3 0 off the floor Z axis type the following and then p
199. e current scene Is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar and in the Scene Database dialog box from the File menu choose Scenes To filter your show information based on the scene selected click to clear the check box and then select the desired scene from the Scene drop down list Only fixtures on the active layers or layers in the scene are displayed in the report Tip You can change the current scene at any time by using either the Scene toolbar or the Scene Database dialog box For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 174 wysiwyg o gt March 2007 Presentation mode Report tab Options on the Report tab affect the appearance of the report View Options Ei Ea General Report Detail Level View Fistures and Accessories Fistures Circuits Truss T Word Wrap ceu Printing Pant for arau Visible Sume fio Report Total E Group Total Duplicate Lines Filters None Empty Not empty Equals Not Equals Above or equals Below or equals Between And Not between And WYSIWYG Reference Guide Group By Select a data field for grouping the data These groups appear as separate tabs pages at the bottom of a report In the case of an Instrument Schedule fixtures are grouped by hanging position Each position appears on a separate page Columns Displays the columns available for inclusion or exclusion in a report
200. e node s name and then click Co or Select 4 To remove an entry from the list click Hide You can use the Node Manager to reconcile the configurations between your show document and the actual ETCNet2 Nodes that are connected to your ETCNet2 network 378 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSILink Link mode To reconcile nodes 1 In the Node Manager dialog box click Reconcile Result The Reconcile Options dialog box is displayed Selecter Using Both MAC and IP addre Only MAC addres Only IP address i Cancel 2 Select whether you want to reconcile all nodes or only currently selected nodes Use CTRL Click to select multiple nodes in the Node Manager 3 Select whether you will use Media Access Control MAC addresses or Internet Protocol IP addresses 4 Click OK Backup looks You can record play back stop and clear backup looks from within WYSILink For more information on backup looks refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual To record a backup look 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Record Result The Record Backup Look dialog box is displayed Look Number il Nodes fe All Specific Dimmer Room OMe Mode Record f Snapshot of dimmers All manually set dimmers Cancel 2 In the Look Number box type a number for the backup look that you want to record Select the nodes for which you want to record the backup look Click Specify to select the n
201. e on a Local Area Network The workstations can be configured to run any combination of WYSIWYG Report or WYSIWYG Design In addition one workstation can run WYSIWYG Perform Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Report Design or Perform 2D and 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Accurate simulation of conventional and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and so on Easy hook up to consoles and other DMX sources Auto Focus protocol lets WYSIWYG send color and focus data to consoles Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your cue or lighting look Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces Background Rendering Manager that enables you to gueue up multiple renderings to run in the background without even requiring WYSIWYG to run Animated renderings are available though certified service providers Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions Modes A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the sh
202. e point in three dimensional space The camera s initial position will be dictated by the document origin not to be confused with the user origin which can be altered at any time Live mode Personalities may be created to reflect this The 16 camera parameters are as follows 1 camera X coarse 2 camera X fine 3 camera Y coarse 4 camera Y fine 5 camera Z coarse 6 camera Z fine 7 target X coarse 8 target X fine 9 target Y coarse 10 target Y fine 11 target Z coarse 12 target Z fine 13 roll coarse 14 roll fine 15 zoom coarse 16 zoom fine Notes m step m step m m m 366 The coarse parameter is defined as 100 metres 256 steps or 0 39 metres per The fine parameter is defined as 100 metres 65536 steps or 0 0015 metres per The zoom function of the DMX camera has a range of 5 to 100 The coarse zoom parameter is defined as 95 256 steps or 0 37 per step The fine zoom parameter is defined as 95 65536 steps or 0 00145 per step wysiwyg gt Chapter 11 WYSI Link Link mode WYSI Link Link mode becomes available when you purchase and install the WYS Link add on for WYSIWYG WYSILink acts as an interface to ETCLink For further details on ETCLink refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual In this mode you can view diagnostic information about the fixtures in your system You can also record and play back backup looks and view dimmer and dimmer rack information In this ch
203. e real fixtures The effect of the wheel rotating 360 degrees rather than snapping in steps will be shown p Select the Spin Wheels check box to simulate spin wheel fixtures Some automated fixtures have wheels that spin continuously Gobo wheels often take a lot of processing power and can slow down the refresh rate of other fixture s updates unnecessarily g Select the Beam Angles check box to display the photometrics of the fixture s beam angle instead of the field angle The angle that is displayed is the measurement in degrees from the center of the beam to where the light level drops off to 50 of the peak For more information on photometrics refer to Photometrics tab on page 207 r Select the Bitmap Gobos check box to simulate bitmap gobo fixtures Custom gobos that have a bitmap image attached will be simulated This selection provides a realistic simulation Note Also noteworthy are the properties of shaded views These are discussed in Shaded views on page 73 361 Live mode b o t Autofocus 362 Release 19 0 Introduction Autofocus is the protocol that WYSIWYG uses to talk back to a compatible console Using the mouse in a Wireframe view or using the concept shortcuts and design tools at any time you can direct the console to select fixtures set focus and control intensity iris and color Autofocus is connected through MIDI Serial or Ethernet The following consoles are compatib
204. e rotation axis Is important The distance from the center dot to the object represents the size of the circle in which it will rotate with the dot marking the center of the circle To have the object rotate in a very tight circle for example a dancer doing a pirouette or a spinning object place the object directly on the center dot By default all rotation axes have an arrow on one end signalling the direction in which the object will rotate While you cannot adjust the size of the arrow head directly you can click and drag the circle to the desired size which adjusts the arrow head proportionately To change the direction of the object s rotation switch views and then drag the center point to the new orientation To draw a linear movement axis 1 In Wireframe view select the view in which you want to draw the axis plan front back side or isometric Click Draw gt Axis gt Linear Axis In the window that appears type a name for the axis and then click OK In your drawing click in the position where you want to start the axis and then move your cursor to the next point of the axis and click To create an axis with multiple segments continue clicking at each point vertex of the axis When you are finished creating the axis right click and choose Finish Axis To draw a rotation movement axis Note Unlike linear axes rotation axes cannot have multiple vertices Instead when you draw one of these axes the objec
205. e set appropriately for each console a t is recommended that you click C ear Patch prior to sending the patch to clear out the existing patch 4 Click Close To clear the patch 1 Connect to the console as described in To connect to a console on page 350 2 From the Live menu choose AutoPatch Result The AutoPatch dialog opens WYSIWYG Reference Guide 357 Live mode Release 19 0 3 Click Clear Patch Result WYSIWYG prompts each AutoPatch capable device to clear the patch for each port that is bound to a WYSIWYG patch universe 4 Click Close ee wysiwyg March 2007 Live mode b o t Visualization I ntroduction There is a limitation on the number of DMX channels that can be simulated in Live mode This limitation is based on the level of WYSIWYG Perform that you have installed on your computer WYSI WYG Perform is available in 500 1000 2000 5000 and Unlimited channel variants With each of these variants the following channels of simulation are available E WYSIWYG Perform 500 512 channels 7 WYSIWYG Perform 1000 1024 channels E WYSIWYG Perform 2000 2048 channels E WYSIWYG Perform 5000 5120 channels m WYSIWYG Perform Unlimited 51 200 channels In Live mode WYSIWYG will not simulate the DMX values being received on channels that exceed the Perform channel count of your system The unused channels display on the status bar tracks the remaining channels for simulation based on the level of y
206. e that is attached to your computer click Video Capture and then use the drop down arrow to select the appropriate device This option is available only if you have WYSIWYG Perform installed Note The video capture device must already be configured on your computer and must be using WDM drivers 4 To play the video with a DMX control click DMX Patch and then use the drop down arrow to select the appropriate patch universe to control the video In the box to the right of the drop down list type the starting DMX address Note You must have a named patch already configured on your computer 5 To mute the sound of the video click Mute to play the sound of the video ensure that Play Sound is selected 6 Click OK In the Video Manager ensure that the status of the video source is Connected If it is not then press Connect Tip To ensure that the video source is connected to the console every time you start WYSIWYG click to select the check box beside Connect on load 8 Click OK to save your changes and close the Video Manager Notes 1 For details on patching the video control in Data mode see To patch the control of a video source on page 248 2 _ For details on using the Video Designer Tool to play the video in Design mode see To use the Video tool on page 265 3 For details on using a console device to control the video in Live mode see To control a DMX patched video source with a console
207. e the separation between the columns of the grid This value must be positive This distance is from the center to center of each of the surfaces both rectangular and circular This value is disabled if you have chosen to create only one column a Offset rows Click this check box if you want to stagger alternating rows of Surfaces in the grid If you leave this box unchecked all surfaces are aligned in each consecutive row Click Next Light Emitting Surface Wizard Color and Intensity Specify Light Emission Controls Select the static color and intensity of the grid For viewing in CAD or Design mode Mote that the dynamic color and intensity iF enabled override the static color and intensity in Live mode Static Color and Intensity Intensity 100 Choose the values controlling color and intensity in Live mode Single patch applies to the entire grid while multi patch assigns different addresses For each element in the grid Dynamic Color Control Dynamic Intensity Contral Enable Dynamic Color Enable Dynamic Intensity Maximum Intensity Single Patch f Single Patch Multi Patch Multi Patch Cancel Under Static Color and Intensity click the color box to choose the static color of the surface or group of surfaces for viewing in Design mode Note that If you do not enable dynamic color control the static color is valid in both Design and Live modes Under
208. e tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar Click on the page where you want to start drawing the line and holding the mouse button down drag it to the end point of the line Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the line Result The line is placed on the layout To insert a rectangle onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Rectangle Tip You can also use the Rectangle tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar H Click on the page at the starting point of the rectangle and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the rectangle Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the rectangle Result The rectangle is placed on the layout wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Presentation mode To insert a rounded rectangle onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Round Rectangle Tip You can also use the Round Rectangle tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar Click on the page at the starting point of the rectangle and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the rectangle Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the rectangle Result The round rectangle is placed on the layout Note You can only see the rounded corners of the rectangle if you zoom in on the drawing
209. e type called WYT WYSIWYG template files are similar to the type of template file you may use on your word processor to set up fax cover sheets memos or letters Once you have drawn your venue with all of its lighting positions and everything else that is common to all shows save it as a WYT file in the Templates directory Each time you start a new drawing that file will be available as a template to start from You can also enter all your lighting equipment inventory into the Flight Case and save that as a template When users start their drawings with your template they will not have to choose from an endless list of fixtures but rather just what you have in stock This is also the ideal option for saving your preferred working settings Template files save all the shortcuts including custom reports plots and so on However toolbar settings are not saved in template files since they are saved by the application A list of most recently opened template files appears under the heading Create New Plot on the WYSIWYG welcome screen The more link will prompt you to open a template file from the WYSIWYG Templates directory To save a template file 1 In an active view and with no objects selected from the File menu choose Save As 2 In the dialog box that opens browse to the location where you want to save the file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save jn box To ensure that your template file is available on the WY
210. eave the default double sided selected when importing the layers so that the object appears correctly Note however that you will not be able to see through the walls of an imported double sided venue when you rotate the image around in the Shaded view unlike the WYSIWYG venues which are single sided If you Know how the single sided object was drawn and you would like to flip its faces so they are oriented in the opposite direction before you import the object click Reversed otherwise leave Default selected Note If the imported object does not appear correctly in the Shaded view you can change its sidedness by using the Properties window You can change it from single sided to double sided or vice versa You can also flip the object s sides if the wrong side is currently facing outward For details see To change an object s sidedness on page 161 Click OK 119 CAD mode 120 10 11 12 Release 19 0 If you have blocks in your drawing you have the option to explode the blocks convert them into a library item or substitute WYSIWYG fixtures for the existing blocks Note 3D solids are automatically placed inside blocks by AutoCAD and assigned an abstract block name for example X1 The number of blocks that are found are dependent upon the number of solids that were in the AutoCAD file You will be prompted to determine what action to take for each type of block x Block Found
211. eave the screen blank click the Blank Screen option button To show a Static image on the screen click the mage File option button and then click Browse to locate the graphic The image must be saved in either bitmap or JPEG format To attach a video source to the screen click the Video Source option button and then choose the video source from the drop down box or click Create New to configure a new video source with the Video Manager For details on creating a new video source see To configure a new video source for streaming video below 4 Click OK To configure a new video source for streaming video To create a new video source for streaming video you use the Video Manager There are a couple of ways of opening the Video Manager for example from the New Screen window or from the Tools menu the following procedure lists one possible way WYSIWYG Reference Guide 145 CAD mode 146 Release 19 0 Note You can only incorporate live video if you have WYSIWYG Perform you cannot select a video from a live capture device if you have WYSIWYG Design 1 Click Tools gt Video Manager 2 Click New Result The Video Source window opens 3 In the Name box type a descriptive name for the video a To play a video from a file click the Video File option button and then click Browse to locate the file To capture a live video stream from an external source such as a web cam or a video capture devic
212. ecify the width and height as desired Landscape Select this check box if you want the page to be set up in landscape format 321 Presentation mode 322 Release 19 0 Show page guides Select this check box if you want the printable outline to be displayed on each sheet of paper that comprises the layout The solid outline is the chosen printer s paper size and orientation Show page number Select this check box if you want the page numbers of the layout to be displayed in the center of each page The page numbers are for reference only and do not appear in the printed output Tile options Select one of the following option buttons m op Left Places the top left corner of the layout in the top left corner of the first page and then arranges the remaining pages accordingly a Center Places the center of the layout at the center of a page and then arranges the remaining pages accordingly a Split Center Places the center of the layout at the corner of four pages and then arranges the remaining pages accordingly Arranging items on layouts Objects can be inserted from the following categories basic shapes lines rectangles ellipses polygons and text images bitmap and Jpeg CAD items data items report items worksheet items includes the default Title Block legend items key items new plot items To insert a line onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Line Tip You can also use the Lin
213. ect which fixture attributes are shown To modify the Flight Case properties 1 From the Options menu choose View Options Tip You can also use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Fal Click the Show Details tab Select the fixture attributes that you want displayed in the Flight Case Note The Unit Number is displayed by default however you can select all the attributes if you want 234 wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode y ab Rendering I ntroduction At any time in CAD mode you can generate a rendering of your set Note that renderings in CAD mode are primarily intended for rendering your set with environmental lighting but without theatrical lighting However if there are any fixtures selected on your plot they are displayed in your rendering Note To gueue your render jobs and process them independently you can use the Background Rendering Manager all levels of WYSIWYG except Report and Perform Console Edition For details on this feature see Background Rendering Manager on page 285 To render a lighting look 1 In the working area of the screen display the lighting look that you want to render Result The Render Wizard opens and guides you through a series of options Click Next and Back to navigate through the Render Wizard 3 Click Finish Result WYSIWYG generates the rendering of your lighting look or cue If the rendering is saved internally it is available as an image in Presen
214. ected object s color and line thickness properties Properties el E4 New Plot Object Line Layer Cyc Fixtures ERS Fixtures Follow Spots Fistures Fresnel Istures Te 3 lw Use Layer Line Thickness jom le lw Use Layer Colour Pars Pipes L gt Pipes Scenic Venue Cancel Apply For a detailed description of the options available on this dialog box refer to the General tab on page 316 Object specific properties Similar to objects in CAD mode objects that are drawn in a New Plots view have properties that are specific to that object u Text label For a description of text label properties refer to the Text label tab on page 165 a Symbol For a description of symbol properties refer to Symbol properties on page 218 m Line Options on the L ne tab affect how the line is drawn WYSIWYG Reference Guide 317 Presentation mode 318 Release 19 0 Properties FR New Plot Object Line Line Pattern Solid Center Dashed Dot Scale 3 3 5 16 Arrows Located at Start l End Araw sieer Hel Fel Double Line T Double Line Distance B 11 15 m Line Pattern Choose a pattern for the selected line Refer to Drawing lines on page 138 for an illustration of each type u Scale Type a value in this box to change the length and spacing of dots and dashes for the selected line Th
215. ecting the patch universe of the selected object type the starting DMX address for the patch in this box Dynamic Intensity Control Maximum Intensity Enables you to set the maximum intensity of patched objects Select the intensity from the drop down box Note The DMX intensity value is treated as a percentage of the dynamic intensity value For example a DMX value of 127 results in 50 of the maximum intensity value that you set Dynamic Intensity Control Universe When you select a value from this drop down box the selected object will have light emitting properties to a maximum of the intensity that you specify The object must be patched according to the WYSIWYG patch notation universe DMX address From the drop down box select the patch universe of the selected object and then type the starting DMX address in the Address box below it Dynamic Intensity Control Address After selecting the patch universe of the selected object type the starting DMX address in this box Spot Number Assign a spot number for the selected object This is the spot number that is used by the console to call the object Once the object is successfully patched you can control it from your console in Live mode as you would a regular fixture Quick Light Emission Tool Instead of using the Properties gt Light Emission tab to change the selected object s light emission you can use the Quick Light Emission Tool These tools allow you to quickly
216. ects 152 Send the show document through e mail 84 Set Piece tab 163 Setting display size for shortcuts 57 Settings regional 94 Shaded views 73 Shortcut 55 Shortcut bar Create Shortcuts Concepts 268 Images 343 Layouts 320 Library Objects 130 Lighting looks 271 Palette 270 Patch Universes 247 Render 283 Reports 300 Spreadsheets 246 Worksheets 344 Shortcuts 55 arranging 57 delete 56 new 56 ordering 56 setting display size 57 Show details 98 Show information 303 Shutter cuts 201 Side view 108 Sidedness Changing for an object 161 Sidedness tab 161 Simulation Channels 66 Simulation options 98 235 364 Simulation views Hot keys 394 SketchUp files importing 111 112 114 Merging 114 Snap 67 97 109 Soft goods 144 Soft shadow 281 Solid line 138 Sphere 143 Spheres Resizing 155 Spin data field 241 Spline 138 Split gels 243 Spot 160 Spot data field 240 Spreadsheets 240 Standard toolbar 63 Status bar 66 Status data field 241 Stock 221 Streaming video reading the patch for 251 Surfaces 141 408 Release 19 0 Symbols 93 98 214 314 330 T Tag data field 241 Tape printer 345 Template 81 Tents 136 Text label 140 313 Texture Pack Installing 166 Textures 87 166 applying to library objects 130 Installing 166 Tile printing 307 322 Tile Printing tab 307 Tilt data field 240 Time zones 95 Title block 303 322 Toolbars 59 88 Tools CAD
217. ed in step 1 56 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface To remove a shortcut 1 Right click the shortcut icon that you want to remove 2 _ Choose Delete Result You are prompted to confirm the deletion 3 Click OK to confirm Result The selected shortcut is deleted To rename a shortcut Right click the shortcut icon that you want to rename Choose Rename Type a new name for the shortcut Click OK Result The selected shortcut is renamed A Oo N To clone a shortcut 1 Right click the shortcut icon that you want to clone Choose Clone Shortcut Type a name for the copy Result The selected shortcut is cloned and the copy is added to the bottom of the list To arrange shortcuts You can arrange shortcuts in the shortcut bar area by using drag and drop functionality 1 Click the shortcut that you want to move 2 While holding down the mouse button press ALT to move the shortcut to the desired location 3 Release the mouse button to place the shortcut To set the display size for shortcuts Right click in open space on the appropriate shortcut bar and then choose either Icons or List depending on your current setup Result When you choose Icons all shortcuts are displayed as icons List will cause the shortcuts to be listed in the shortcut bar area thereby allowing you to fit more shortcuts in the area The settings are retained for all shortcuts Note To scroll to the bottom of a long list of s
218. ed this value will affect all subsequent objects inserted in the current view For example if the missing coordinate is set to 5 in a plan view all objects will be placed 5 off the floor X Y 5 until the missing coordinate is changed again Note that the missing coordinate is not a move tool objects are not moved to the missing coordinate value The missing coordinate only affects subsequent inserts Units of measurement Click this label to toggle between metric and imperial units of measurement Snap and Ortho The snap and ortho entry shows the status of these items If the indicator is black a Snap or ortho setting is active If the indicator is grey snap and ortho are not active WYSIWYG Reference Guide 67 WYSIWYG user interface y o t Release 19 0 Wireframe views 68 Introduction When you first create a new show document and enter CAD mode WYSIWYG defaults to the Wireframe view All drawing is done in Wireframe view Click the Quad tab to display three Wireframe views and a shaded view of your drawing Keyboard and mouse control To modify the point of view The arrow keys move you in their respective directions The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys zoom you in and out You can also roll the middle mouse button up and down to zoom in and out The zoom action is centered on the mouse pointer rather than the center of the window In a 3D perspective view isometric or shaded the CTRL key in combination wi
219. ed view you can change its sidedness by using the Properties window You can change it from single sided to double sided or vice versa You can also flip the object s sides if the wrong Side is currently facing outward For details see To change an object s sidedness on page 161 Click the mport Directories tab Select SKP Settings For Import a E x Layer Import Directories Texture Import Path C Program Files MWYS WY S4Library s mp 115 CAD mode 116 10 11 Release 19 0 Click Browse to specify the location where you want to save the textures that have been applied to the object in SketchUp or accept the default location shown Note If a default path is not shown you must click Browse and navigate to the desired folder By saving textures to a folder outside of WYSIWYG you can use them repeatedly instead of only applying them to the surfaces that are within the current WYSIWYG document If there is already a texture with the same name saved in the location specified WYSIWYG will prompt you to save the file with a new name Click OK Result The Block Load window appears 21x Block Found chair halt Would you like to perform one of the following actions to the block Explode Do for al f Convert into Library Item Replace with Fixture Ignore block Blocks in SketchUp are called components If you have components in your drawing you have the option to explo
220. ee the rest of the agreement LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PROGRAM IF ynu have acquired the software in packaging which has required you to agree to the termz of a License Agreement upon opening of such packaging that license shall govern your use of the software lf not the following License Agreement shall govern your use of the software This iz a legal agreement between you either an individual or corporate entity and Cast le Do vou accept all the terme of the preceding License Agreement If ynu select No the setup Will close To install WY SIW rG you must accept this agreement Inetallehreld Result The updated files are copied to your computer 6 After all the files are copied click F N SH to complete the update Installing WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network Software components The WYSIWYG Network and WYSIWYG Learn systems comprise a computer that acts as the server and one or more clients In your network you need to have only one computer that acts as the server the computer with the network dongle attached to It The server can be standalone in which case WYSIWYG is not installed on it or it can act as both server and client In this latter scenario you install the full WYSIWYG program which also includes a server portion with the Sentinel Protection service This service is required to detect the WYSIWYG Learn or Network dongle a list of current services
221. el is distinguishable by the qualifier Key for example the attribute Focus and the label Key Focus An extension line Is drawn between the label and the attribute For each attribute and its label you must decide whether you want to display it in the key If yes you can further specify how it will be displayed using the various formatting options including text size and color shape size and color and justification You can also edit all the text choose to give examples of attribute values and provide custom definitions for the labels Options in Step 2 allow you to choose the attributes and notation to be displayed around the chosen symbols Note To make the controls active you may have to click to clear the Use Defaults check box a Visible Select this check box if you want the attribute or label to be displayed around the symbol in your key a Use Body Color Select this check box if you want the attribute or label to use the same font color as the symbol To set a specific color for the attribute or label leave the box unchecked and click the color box to choose a custom color a Line weight Adjust this value to increase or decrease the density of the label or attribute font a ext Type the text that you want displayed for the attribute or label m talics Select this check box to italicize the attribute or label font Note there are no options to change the font a Horizontal and vertical justification Choose
222. ement axis to which you want to attach the selected object or objects For details on attaching objects to movement axes see To attach an object to a movement axis on page 149 Appearance tab Use this tab to specify the appearance of the different components that make up the currently selected items Based on the items that you have selected the options in this tab differ You can use this tab to customize objects by adding different materials colors or textures to each element of the item For example if you have selected a library object such as a podium you can apply different materials colors and textures to each part of it the body and the top portion General Appearance Light Emission Sidedness Elements Color Texture Legs Use Layer Rendering Color Seat f Use Custom Color Use Texture from Library _ 7 Es Use Texture from File SS El Texture Position Texture Tile Dimensions Texture Rotation f Tile Width ooo Degrees Stretch Height Material Fabric 1 npague low shininess m Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with ZZ Use Custom Transparency Ons r meaning opaque Select All Select None Note You can apply textures to venues surfaces risers walls and library items You can apply transparency to everything When customizing the selected e
223. en bind the ports as you would normally Before closing the Device Manager click New and then select Standard M D from the Devices gt All or from the Devices gt Manufacturer gt Generic tree Click nsert Note The Standard MIDI device appears in the list even if the drivers are not installed Therefore it is important that you follow the steps outlined above to ensure that the drivers are installed You now need to unbind AutoFocus from the HogPC and then bind it to the Standard MIDI device To do so with Standard M D still selected click the Bind Autofocus button at the bottom of the Device Manager Window Testing the connection Before performing this procedure ensure that all three applications MIDI OX HogPC and WYSIWYG are open To test the connection 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide In the Device Manager select the Hog Il and then click Connect The status changes to Connected Repeat step 1 for the standard MIDI device and then close the Device Manager Resize your WYSIWYG window so that you can see at least part of the MIDI OX window From the Live menu in Live mode open all the Designer tools Intensity Focus Color Gobo Prism Zoom and Iris 401 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Release 19 0 5 In WYSIWYG select at least one of the fixtures in your show and then click Fu in the Intensity tool Result The selected fixture s intensity is displayed In addition HogPC s first monitor
224. ene can also be set in the Layers dialog box For more information refer to Layers on page 171 Notes m To copy a scene select the scene and then click C one The copied scene has the same properties of the selected scene a To rename a scene select the scene and then click Rename a To remove a scene from the scene database select the scene and then click Delete 5 Click Set Current to activate your new scene Note If the current layer is not in the current scene you will not be able to add any objects 6 Click OK 174 wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Tip The Scene toolbar gives you quick access to all existing scenes and the Scenes database Click the tool on the left end of the Scene toolbar to access the Scene database ET Note In order for fixtures to be displayed in scenes both the layer on which the fixtures reside and the layer on which the respective hang structure resides if different must be included in the scene You cannot display fixtures without their hang structures WYSIWYG Reference Guide 175 CAD mode Release 19 0 y o gt CAD tools Break The Break command allows you to break an object into smaller components To break an arc into arcs 1 Select the arc that you want to break From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Arc into arcs Type the number of desired break arcs and then click OK Result The arc is broken egually into the number of arcs specif
225. ens a previously created show document If another show document is currently open you will be prompted to save changes to that document before another show document is opened Only one show document may be open at a time To open an existing document 1 From the File menu choose Open 2 Select the file and then click Open You can open the following file types WYSIWYG files wyg WYSIWYG template wyt Vivien files vvn Vivien template files vvt WYSIWYG backup files bak Wysiwygv2 files wys DWG files dwg DXF files dxf LW2 files lw2 SketchUp files skp DWG DXF Export This command exports the current show document to a DWG or DXF formatted file type DWG and DXF formats are used to transfer documents to AutoCAD or other compatible drafting applications WYSIWYG Reference Guide 79 80 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 To export to DWG or DXF format For details see To export to DWG DXF in 2D on page 123 Save command The Save command saves the open document to the same file name and location folder disk and so on under which it was previously saved If you are saving the document for the first time this command will perform the Save As function To save your document From the File menu choose Save Tip You can also use the Save tool on the Standard toolbar A Save As command The Save As command Is used to save the current document to a new file name a new
226. ent mode Measurement modes are explained in Drawing dimension lines on page 141 m Measurement Units Select the mperial or Metric option buttons to change the measurement units m Precision Select the appropriate option buttons to specify measurement precision of the dimension line Based on your choice for measurement units you can choose to display the drawing resolution in centimeters millimeters whole numbers or fractions Textures You can apply textures to different objects such as venues surfaces risers walls and library objects Surfaces are created using the Surface tool or by extruding a line The textures provided with WYSIWYG emulate various types of surfaces such as brick or cloth You can also use your own bitmap or jpeg files as textures to emulate projection screens or to cover a surface with a texture specific to your show When customizing an object you can apply either a color or a texture you cannot apply both Note You can apply textures in WYSIWYG only if you have installed them in most cases they are not automatically installed with the WYSIWYG software For details on installing the WYSIWYG texture pack see below I nstalling the WYSI WYG Texture Pack The availability of textures depends on the type of installation that you performed from CD or from the Web wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode Installations from CD When you perform a Full WYSIWYG
227. entation mode y o t Pipe tapes I ntroduction WYSIWYG enable you to make Pipe Tapes which are attached to a pipe at the beginning of a hang The pipe tape indicates to the electricians where to hang the fixtures and displays pertinent information about the fixtures such as circuit number dimmer number gel color and so on as specified by the user This tool significantly increases the accuracy between the WYSIWYG plot and the real installation Note Pipe tape printers are sold separately and are available through Cast Group To print a pipe tape 1 Connect the pipe tape printer to your computer through the serial port In CAD mode select the pipe for which you want to generate a pipe tape From the Tools menu choose Print Pipe Tape Result The Print Pipe Tape Setup dialog box is displayed Print Pipe Tape Setup FE Fisture details M Unt W Colour W Gobo W Lens M Lamp WW Accessories lw Focus W Point M Spin M Pan M Tit I Notes lw Spot Tw Channel I Purpose W Circuit lw Patch Header lw Show Info Bitmap File Joysinygbmp Pa W Fixture Count a Text Fil T W Circuit Count Eu El lw Lens Count I Weight Footer lM Show Info Bitmap File ysig bmp ES w Fixture Count W Circuit Count Text File m lw Lens Count lw Weight Save and Exit Cancel Show Tick Marks 4 In the Fixture details group box select the data fields that you want printed on the pipe tape for each fixtur
228. ently with lighting consoles and media or video servers To continue click Mext i Cancel WYSIWYG Reference Guide 225 CAD mode 226 2 Release 19 0 Click Next Light Emitting Surface Wizard E A x Style and Shape Specify the Style and Shape of Light Sources Style Choose the style of light emitting surface to place in the grid A single surface will emit all colors using one surface 4 triplet cluster will use discrete red green and blue surfaces to mix your desired color Triplet Shape Choose the shape of the individual surfaces and specify the size For a triplet style each of the three surfaces will use these settings For size and shape Pound Diameter z Rectangular width s Height E lt Back Cancel Under Style choose the type of surface that you want to show in the light emitting grid a Single Choose this option to create a single surface that combines the three colors green red blue a Triplet Choose this option to create a surface comprised of 3 separate elements each with a different color green red and blue Under the Shape heading choose the shape of the individual surfaces either a single round square surface or 3 round square surfaces and then specify the size of each surface m Round Click this option if you want the single surface or each element of a triplet surface to be round and then type the diameter of each surface
229. eparate layers you can choose to only import a particular element into the WYSIWYG file by selecting the appropriate layer in this window 5 To import a single sided layer highlight it and select the Single Sided checkbox Note Single sided layers use less processor time to display in Shaded views and to render in the Render Wizard However they only appear properly in each of these views if the faces of the object are drawn facing outward Unless you know how the SketchUp file was drawn it is recommended that you leave Single Sided deselected by default when importing the layers so that the object appears correctly Note that you will not be able to see through the walls of an imported double sided venue when you rotate the image around in the Shaded view unlike the WYSIWYG venues which are single sided wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode If the imported object does not appear correctly in the Shaded view you can change its sidedness by using the Properties window You can change it from single sided to double sided or vice versa You can also flip the object s sides if the wrong Side is currently facing outward For details see To change an object s sidedness on page 161 6 Click the mport Directories tab Select SKP Settings For Import EE ajx Layer Import Directories Texture Import Path C Program Files MS I W 3 Library mp 7 Click Browse to specify the location where you want to save the
230. es mountable 219 Z Zoom 262 Zooming 69 Z00m tools 68 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 409
231. es that you enter on this tab are reflected in Step 6 of the Render Wizard For more information on the Render Wizard refer to Rendering on page 364 View Options dialog box View options set how objects are drawn and displayed in Wireframe and shaded views For more information on View options for Wireframe views refer to Modifying wireframe views on page 70 For more information on View options for shaded views refer to Modifying shaded views on page 73 User Options dialog box The User Options dialog box enables you to set up your working preferences You might for example want to specify how the snap operation will work or how much information will be displayed on your plot The settings that you choose are in effect for the entire time that you are working in WYSIWYG regardless of the show file that you are working on To open the User Options dialog box click Options gt User Options User tab Options on the User tab affect the current scene selection options pipe drawing mode missing co ordinate and focus mode settings WYSIWYG Reference Guide 95 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 User Options x User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Pipe drawing mode Paste Basepoint Draw from start Interactive object creation Draw from center lw Automatically group truss lw Prompt to put deleted fiztures in flight case IY Show fisture notes w
232. esktop l My Documents Pr My Computer k i My Network File name Sample Set 3D Places Save as Ippe DWG ADAD DDA Cancel In the File name box type the name of the exported file From the Save as type drop down box choose the exported file type There are a number of choices available for file type based on AutoCAD versions Click Save Result The Select DXF DWG Settings for Export dialog box appears Select DXF DWL Settings For Export Scale Layer DG DF iz in Meters Millimeters Custom Ji DXFUntTe ft Feet r Note You cannot export a 3D drawing from WYSIWYG Report On the Sca e tab click the option button for the units to be used in the DWG DXF drawing a To specify a custom unit of measurement select the Custom option button and then specify the mapping of the units of measurement to use in the exported file in the DXF Unit To boxes 125 CAD mode Release 19 0 7 Click the Layer tab Select DXF DWG Settings For Export a 2 x Scale Layer Layer Name Import 0 Select All 0 Help Centerlines Clear All BOMEN 3D BRUIN 1 BRUIN 2 Dimension lw Import Ru 8 Select the layers that you want to include in the DWG DXF drawing by highlighting them and ensuring that the mport check box is checked a Click Se ect Al to select all the layers that are listed b Click Clear All to deselect all layers 9 Click OK
233. esktop Fd My Documents My Computer My Network File name Sample Set 3D Places Save as Ippe DWG ADAD DDA Cancel In the File name box type the name of the exported file From the Save as type drop down box choose the exported file type There are a number of choices available for file type based on AutoCAD versions Click Save Result The Select DWG Settings dialog box is displayed Select DXF DWL Settings For Export Scale DMG DF iz in Meters Millimeters Custom Ii DXFUntTe ft Feet r On the Sca e tab click the option button for the units to be used in the DWG DXF drawing a To specify a custom unit of measurement select the Custom option button b Inthe DXF Unit To boxes specify the mapping of the units of measurement to use in the exported file Click OK Note The current type of the drawing will be used as the point of view in the exported 2D drawing To export to DWG DXF in 3D Note When you export WYSIWYG objects to a 3D DWG DXF file the resulting DWG DXG entities vary For details see the table on page 123 y March 2007 1 2 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode From the File menu choose DWG DXF Export In the Export dialog box navigate to the location where you want to save the exported file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save in drop down box Save jn 2 export 3 gt fia hy Recent Documents D
234. ess of an object refer to the General tab on page 156 Note The applied line thickness is only visible in Print Preview mode and when printed Use Plot Color for rendering select this check box to set the layer s color for shaded views and renderings to the same as the plot color specified above Click to clear the check box and use the color button to set a specific color for the selected layer The chosen color is used for all objects that reside on the selected layer unless otherwise modified To modify the object color for rendering refer to the General tab on page 156 Object Counts tab Entries on the Object Counts tab indicate the total number of objects that reside on the selected layer Values on this tab are read only Layer Properties 7 General Object Counts Camera Console Cylinder Fixture Focus Pos n Sphere 0 Are Library Item Line Circle Pipe Point Riser Set Fiece Group Surface n TIT HYNA UN Label Truss Cancel Deleting layers You must remove all objects from a layer before you can delete it You cannot delete the current layer To delete a layer 1 O o A O Select all the objects on the layer that you want to delete and then delete them or move them to another layer From the Edit menu choose Layers Result The Layer Database dialog box is displayed Ensure that the layer you want to delete is not set as the current layer Select the laye
235. essory to the fixture Once you hang a fixture on a pipe you cannot drag it onto a mountable yoke To remove a fixture from a mountable yoke right click the fixture and then select Remove Accessory In the resulting tree menu you can either remove the accessory from the fixture or remove the fixture from the mountable yoke If you insert a fixture onto a yoke by using a shortcut and then you insert another fixture onto a pipe using the same shortcut when you right click the option Finish Placing Accessories appears instead of Finish Placing Fixtures When you insert a fixture on a mountable yoke in CAD mode you can no longer focus the beam by dragging it in CAD mode Additionally the beam direction might not point straight down To insert an accessory o fF Oo N Open the Library Browser Click on the Accessory section tool Find the accessory that you want to insert Double click the accessory name Click on the fixtures to insert the accessory Tips WYSIWYG Reference Guide To place an accessory on a selected fixture right click on the fixture and then click Add Accessory Use the browser to find the accessory you want to insert Follow this procedure in Data mode and only those accessories that can be applied to the selected fixture will be available To place an accessory on a group of selected fixtures use the Accessory library With the fixtures selected find the accessory in the Library Browser
236. esult The Monitoring Tool is launched and you are prompted to set a protocol The Monitoring Tool can monitor servers on the network that use any of the following protocols m TCP IP m NETBEUI ua PX SPX m SAP Select TCP IP and then click OK Result Servers using the selected protocol are displayed in the Monitoring Tool WYSIWYG products run on TCP IP networks only Changing the protocol When you launch the SuperPro Monitoring Tool you are prompted to set a protocol WYSIWYG Reference Guide 385 Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool Release 19 0 To modify the selected protocol 1 From the File menu choose Set Protocol Select the protocol that you want to use Click OK Result Servers using the selected protocol are displayed in the Monitoring Tool Viewing servers on the network When you launch the SuperPro Monitoring Tool all Sentinel Protection Servers running on the network appear in the server list on the left Click a server in the list to display the following information in the right pane m server name 7 server s protocol m server s address for TCP IP or IPX SPX protocols E server s version m key information for the dongle that is connected to the server 2m Server List Key Highest Used Haf blinky LU LL akey 1 10 0 1 0 Bu fat_tony amp milhouse Ready Done y7 Key information Information about each key or dongle connected to a server running on the
237. evice Manager wysiwyg March 2007 6 10 11 12 13 14 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Live mode With the console name still selected click Properties Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties x Console Manufacturer Protocal CAST Model Mini Console Mame Mini Console Address Open Bid LlnEind Universe Conventio Gwe a From the Protocol drop down list select the protocol used by the console For example DMX SandNet Result The console model is displayed in the Model box The name of the console is displayed in the Name box In the Address box type the designated address of the console if applicable A list of the output ports from the console appears in the Ports list You must bind these outputs to WYSIWYG patch universes Click the appropriate port to highlight it Note Motion control systems have a single port named Motion Click Bind Note If you are working with a motion control system then you can bind only to motion universes if you are working with a DMX console then you can bind only to DMX universes Result The Patch Universe Select dialog box is displayed Patch Universe Lu Patch Universe o Create New Domain Names Select From List Start Address 1 End Address 2 cwl Select the desired Patch Universe and then click Se ect Repeat the above steps to bind all ports to the
238. f items in the window to the right of the preview window select the symbol To change the symbol click the Change Symbol button The following dialog box appears Symbol Select Cancel S Ministrip 26 Inch front E Ministrip 26 Inch Side h Ministrip 51 Inch oa Ministrip 51 Inch Front h Ministrip 76 Inch oe Ministrip 6 Inch front z Ministrip side z Orion ae Orion E a Orion Front a Orion 4 side Onion front i Orion side From the list on the left side choose the new symbol When you are finished making your choice click Se ect WYSIWYG Reference Guide 337 Presentation mode 338 Release 19 0 Step 2 Symbol Layout Symbol Layout Key Test 1 10 Inch Fresnel ey Spot 10 Inch Fresnel Unit 10 Inch Fresnel Key Unit 10 Inch Fresnel Channel 10 Inch Fresnel ey Channel 10 Inch Fresnel Circuit 10 Inch Fresnel ey Circuit 10 Inch Fresnel Colour 10 Inch Fresnel ey Colour 10 Inch Fresnel Gobo 10 Inch Fresnel Key Gobo 10 Inch Fresnel Patch Visible Line Weight C Use Body Colour __ 0 0100 Text Colour C Italics Horizontal Justification Left Center Right Vertical Justification OTop Center Bottom A Height US c Angle 0 00 Shape None w Size pa For each attribute there are two entries in the list box One is for the attribute itself the other is to label the attribute The lab
239. f slots on the wheel or scroll Click OK 221 CAD mode 222 10 11 12 13 Release 19 0 Click on the slot you wish to edit Click nsert Color or nsert Gobo or nsert Prism Make sure if you are inserting different types of media into the same list that this is actually possible for that fixture or accessory Click on the item you want to insert and then click Se ect Repeat for the remaining slots To reorder the items in the slots click on the slot and then click Up or Down to move that item to a new position To erase a color or gobo selection from a slot click Remove The slot returns to the default selection of OPEN Click C ose when you are done creating lists Tip It is recommended to clone the stock wheel or list associated with the fixture s and edit the cloned list The cloned list inherits the properties of the original list To clone a stock color gobo list Oo Ff o N From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Stock Scroll to find the list you want to clone Click Clone Type a name for the cloned list and then click OK Result The cloned list appears in the custom lists To rename a color gobo list o mB Oo N From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Custom Select the color gobo list that you want to rename Click Rename Type the new name for the list and then click OK Result The list is ren
240. footprint Five is the fastest while 40 is a near perfect circle or ellipsis c Select the StickBeams check box to draw the center of the light beam for each fixture This is the quickest way to simulate moving lights with the least beam clutter d Deselect the Co ors check box to ignore color settings and have all beams displayed as open white e Select the Focus check box to set the image in focus as the brightest in Wireframe views In shaded views the hard or soft edge can be seen when the focus parameter Is set f Select the Footprint check box to draw hard lines depicting where the light hits the set g Select the Shaded Beams check box to produce soft edge beam footprints on the set showing you the cosine distribution of your lights in shaded views The objects comprising the set must have their facets split To enable this setting select Facet Splitting on the Object Settings tab of Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Object Settings tab on page 92 h Select the Crossfades check box to show the physical limitations of the motors of the fixtures or electronic accessories This will be evident for devices such as moving heads or scrollers which might not be able to move as fast as the rate at which the console is changing values Crossfades also show you which fixtures use internal timing on a separate speed channel i Select the Gobos check box to simulate gobo details Gobo wheels often take a
241. for creating platforms sguare columns or any other box shaped objects There are two ways in which you can draw risers E non interactive mode in which you type the exact width depth and height of the riser m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the dimensions of the riser WYSIWYG Reference Guide l A CAD mode Release 19 0 To draw a riser in non interactive mode 1 From the Draw menu choose Riser Tip You can also click the Risertool sg on the Draw toolbar wan EI Lok Depth jaa Cancel Height zo Interactive In the Width box type the width for the riser The default value is 8 0 In the Depth box type the depth for the riser The default value is 0 In the Height box type the height for the riser The default value is 20 Click OK Result The riser is attached to the cursor Oo fF N 6 Drag the new riser to its position and then click to place it in the drawing To draw a riser in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar 1 From the Draw menu choose Riser 2 Click the starting point of the riser on the drawing The insertion point is the lower left corner of the riser 3 Drag up and to the right to stretch out the riser s shape Click to place the upper right corner of the riser In the dialog box that opens type the missing dimension of the riser Click OK Drawing cylinders Cylinders are solid 3D objec
242. g This includes how much data is shown on the plot User Options User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Fixture data shown on plot lw Unit W Channel Tw Spot I Colour Lamp I Focus TT Gobo Circuit T Patch Position Purpose Lens T Notes Dimmer Intensity W Show Text Labels Point Size lw Enable Tooltips E lw Draw Symbols W Show beams for selected fixtures I Show truss crass members Fixture tooltips T Unit Tw Channel IY Spot T Colour T Lamp Focus TT Gobo Circuit I Patch Position D Purpose PanryTilt T Lens Notes l Spin F Dimmer 7 Fixture data shown on plot Indicates the fixture data that you want to display on your drawing m Show Text Labels Select this check box to display text labels m Enable Tooltips Displays tooltips on your drawing Tooltips are the pop up messages that display specific information about a fixture when you hover over it Choose the information that you want to display in a tooltip by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the Fixture tooltips group box Tooltips are often helpful when trying to locate a specific fixture in a plot m Draw Symbols Select this check box to draw fixtures as symbols rather than as 3D objects For more information on symbols refer to Symbols on page 214 E Show beams for selected fixtures Select this check box to automatically turn on beams when selecting a fixture on your drawing If you do not select this b
243. ge fades over the period of time that you specified for the second look Tips For a more realistic view of the fading between looks click the Shaded tab a To jump directly to a specific look right click the look and then select Jump to Viewing moving scenery You can use the Looks shortcut bar to guickly set up and run timed transitions between looks to simulate moving scenery When you create a look you can specify its fade time in seconds This is the amount of time that it takes to fade to this look when you click on it from another look in the Shortcut bar You can create multiple looks and specify different fade times for each of them Just as you can specify the fade time to watch the transition between lighting looks so too can you use the fade time to simulate moving scenery In the latter case however your Look must contain at least one movement axis with at least one object attached to it Note You can also combine Looks to simulate both moving lights and moving scenery in one fade Once you create the look and specify its fade time use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to customize the look by selecting the appropriate movement axis and the object s Starting position on it Then create a second look repeating the same procedure to set the object s starting position on either the same axis or a different one if there is more than one axis attached together When you switch from one look to the
244. gt Dimmer Channels gt Patch Spots gt Patch Missing Position Missing Unit Missing Circuit Mame Migsing Circuit Missing Dimmer Missing Patch Missing Channel Missing Spot Migsing Colour Missing Gobo VT TT TT TT S 80 80 lt 1 81 81 XI XI VT 1 TT TT S 80 80 41 5181 XI lt I For more information on data errors refer to Errors on page 255 Regional settings tab Options on the Regional settings tab set the geographic location of your show You can either select the country and city or enter the latitude and longitude of the location These settings are primarily used for renderings that use environmental options OA wysiwyg March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document Show Options x Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Eror Regional Settings Select City Country Canada City Toronto lw Custom Custom Longitude Latitude Time zone PAETA Curent Time GMT Time Ss Cancel E Custom Select this check box to enter the latitude and longitude values in the Latitude and Longitude boxes respectively Click to clear this check box to select a country and city from the Country and City drop down lists respectively m Time Zone After selecting Custom select the time zone for your show When you select a time zone the current time as set on your computer is displayed in the Current Time box The GMT value is also shown Note The valu
245. guration requires that you specify a network port For all network traffic Please specify a network port 39890 Note When you choose the network port Windows Firewall will automatically be configured to enable network communication IF you are using a different Firewall then vou must configure its settings manually lt Back Cancel 7 Type the incoming Network Port that the Background Rendering Manager will monitor for rendering Jobs sent from WYSIWYG Notes a If you change this default port you must also change the outbound port configured in the Render Wizard for sending Jobs to this Background Rendering Manager These two ports must match ua When you choose the network port Windows Firewall will automatically be configured to enable network communication If you are using a different firewall then you must configure its settings manually 8 Click Next Background Rendering Manager Configuration Wizard E x Specify Startup Options Choose the startup mode For the Background Rendering Manager You can choose one option or both Select this option to have the Background Rendering Manager automatically start every kime Windows starts up With this option the application immediately begins rendering submitted jobs as soon as you start up your computer W Start Minimized Select this option to have the Background Rendering Manager appear as a minimized taskbar icon every time it starts Double click the icon
246. hat comprise the report The data that comprises the report The scene chosen for the report The name of the group Source The name of the report as defined in the shortcut bar for example nstrument Count The venue defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 303 The designer defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 303 The show defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 303 The assistant defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 303 The columns defined on the Report tab in View Options For more information on choosing these columns refer to Report tab on page 299 Information that Is available in Data mode The Scene defined on the General tab in View Options The Group By parameter chosen on the Report tab in View Options For more information on this option refer to Report tab on page 290 You should include this variable when Group By has been enabled for a report so that the group name is displayed on the report pages 301 Presentation mode Release 19 0 Variable Definition Source File The name of your The name you chose when saving your WYSIWYG file
247. hat document before another show document is opened Only one show document may be open at a time Exit command Use the Exit command to exit WYSIWYG If you have made changes to your document but have not saved yet you will be prompted to save your changes before exiting To exit WYSI WYG 1 From the File menu choose Exit 2 When prompted to save changes to the current show document click Yes to save changes and exit WYSIWYG Note Click Wo to skip saving and exit WYSIWYG Click Cancel to skip saving and not exit WYSIWYG wysiwyg 2 March 2007 y a Options menu Introduction Managing your WYSIWYG document WYSIWYG offers you many options to customize the functionality of the software You can view and set options on the Options menu The Options menu is the same in all the modes Application Options window Application Options are general settings for the WYSIWYG software and apply to the entire application regardless of the show file that you are working on You might want to update these settings to display specific toolbars or indicate your file saving preferences for example To modify the application options 1 Application Options Compatibility Render Options General Fie Options Direct3D Tape Printer Options US6 Senal Gonverber Device With cutter Y Fort COM r Baud 600 Flow control Hardware g Use converter Delay Butter 0 Regio
248. hat is set to not visible right click in the preview pane and then choose View Options For more information on shaded views refer to Modifying shaded views on page 73 Ambient Light Use the slider to set the ambient light level This adjusts the overall light level where 0 is complete black and 100 is a bright room This does not affect the intensity of the fixtures in your lighting look Simulation Type Simulation type does not affect the outcome of your rendering Rather it allows you to set your beam quality preference as you work through the Render Wizard Pan tool moves objects The Pan tool does not affect the outcome of your rendering Rather the tool rotates the model on the target if checked or rotates the camera around the target if unchecked Both settings help you to compose your image 2 1 Design mode Release 19 0 Step 3 Add Atmospheric Effects to Your Rendering ender izar Step 3 Add Atmospheric Effects to Your Rendering Paia ai mites To simulate dust or fog C None Haz Smoke select Haze For additional opacity select NOW UO i a Cin eink Smoke Use the Density Density slider to set the visibility of the haze particles 0 80 100 Use the Granularity slider to set how fine the Granularity HNN Mg smoke particles will be Fine Coarse Add Shortcut Finish Options in Step 3 affect the atmospheric conditions in your ren
249. he tab that corresponds to the layout you wish to use The CAD mode contains the following layouts m Wireframe The work area displays a full screen wireframe view m Quad The work area is divided into quadrants three of which can be modified to show plan front side or isometric wireframe views The lower right quadrant contains a shaded view m Flight Case The Flight Case is displayed in a section of the work area along with a wireframe view m Shaded The work area displays a full screen shaded view WYSIWYG Reference Guide 103 CAD mode Release 19 0 y The CAD environment Scales When drawing in WYSIWYG you are drawing in real scale 1 1 When you create a drawing in CAD you are generating a virtual representation of your real set up If you were to do this on paper by hand you would need to draw a scaled down version of your space However since there are no paper size limitations in CAD mode you can draw your venue sets pipes trusses and lighting fixtures in real scale Scaling down for printing purposes is done during print set up and in the Presentation mode when creating plots These settings allow you to print your drawings in whatever scales are necessary without having to redraw anything Coordinate system and origin When working in CAD you are working in a 3D environment even in WYSIWYG Report Objects are drawn as 3D objects with width depth and height values using the Cartesian coordin
250. he Clients will not be able to detect the dongle and the application will terminate Ensure that the dongle is attached to the workstation that is acting as the Server Installation options Based on whether your Server computer is a combined Learn Network Server and Client or a standalone Server the installation varies slightly m If you intend to run WYSIWYG on the server computer i e you want a combined Learn Network Server Client then you must install the full WYSIWYG program on this computer While this installation includes all required server files they are only activated when you attach the network dongle to the Server For details see To install WYSIWYG on page 33 m If you do not want to run WYSIWYG on the Server computer i e you want to have a standalone Learn Network Server the installation is condensed See To install the Learn Network Server standalone below To install the Learn Network Server standalone Perform this installation if you want to configure a standalone Learn Network Server i e you do not want to run WYSIWYG on this computer After the installation simply attach the network dongle to it to activate the Server functionality wysiwyg March 2007 Before you begin Previous versions of WYSILAB or WYSIWYG Learn Network must be removed before beginning the install process if this step is not completed the install menu will offer the option before continuing with the insta
251. he DWG DXF drawing Click the Layer tab Select DXF DWG Settings For Import E x Scale Layer Layer Name Import Single Sided Clear All sillon rojo dona E A Single Sided Orientation Defaut Reversed OF Cancel Highlight the layers that you want to import Note that you do not need to import all the layers at once Refer to Importing scenario on page 122 for suggestions on how to import the various layers For each layer that you want to import ensure that the mport check box is checked If you do not want to import a certain layer highlight it and deselect this checkbox To import a single sided layer highlight it and click to place a check mark beside the Single Sided checkbox Note Single sided layers use less processor time to display in Shaded views and to render in the Render Wizard However they only appear properly in each of these views if the faces of the object are drawn facing outward Unless you know how the CAD file was drawn it is recommended that you leave the default double sided selected when importing the layers so that the object appears correctly Note however that you will not be able to see through the walls of an imported 121 CAD mode Release 19 0 double sided venue when you rotate the image around in the Shaded view unlike the WYSIWYG venues which are single sided 9 If you know how the single sided object was drawn and you would like to
252. he drawing and use the hot keys X and Z to rotate them to the same position as the first piece of truss To rotate truss 1 GO N O O RA 10 11 Open the Library Browser and then click the 7russ tool R Navigate through the library to find the type of truss that you want to use Tip You can also click the Truss tool on the Draw toolbar to place truss Double click the object name Result A piece of truss attaches to the cursor Click on the drawing to place the first piece of truss Right click and choose Finish Placing Truss Select the piece of truss and then click the Rotate tool eb Click in the drawing to choose the base point around which you want to rotate the truss Type the rotational value in degrees for example 45 degrees and then press Enter Note As you type the value appears in the box in the lower left hand corner of the window When you are finished rotating the truss click to insert it From the Tools menu click Snap and then choose Assembly To place the second piece of truss click the truss name in the library and then without clicking in the drawing drag the new piece of truss near one of the ends of an existing piece of truss until it snaps into position Note To change the truss type return to the library double click on the name of the new desired truss type and continue placing truss pieces wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 12 13 WYSIWYG Reference Guide
253. he focus position Click to insert the focus position Repeat these steps to insert all focus positions Focus position properties Options on the Focus Position tab affect the alignment and style of the selected focus position General Appearance Light Emission Point Focus Position Fixture Hang Structure Truss Label Focus Positior Italics aera pamine M Align to View w Show Label Horizontal Justification f Left Centre Right Vertical Justification Top C Cente Bottom x EE vss gt oo You can modify the justification height and presentation of a focus position For a description of the justification and presentation type properties refer to the Text label tab on page 165 Focus positions are unique in that you can adjust the focus position coordinates without actually moving the focus position on the drawing The X Y and Z coordinate is the coordinate of the location in 3D space where the focus position is to lie Ouick focus Ouick focus assigns a focus position or Pan and Tilt angle to the selected fixture a wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 CAD mode To assign a focus position 1 From the Tools menu choose Quick Focus Tip You can also click the Quick Focus tool on the Tools toolbar 2 Click on the desired focus position This will set that position as the destination for the next fixtures you select 3 Click on each fixture that you want focused to that position
254. he list of materials provided with WYSIWYG To apply a material to an object surface object or venue 1 Right click the object to which you want to apply the material and then choose Properties 2 Click the Appearance tab Properties General Appearance Light Emission Set Piece Frame Tent Elements Color Texture Tent Floor Tent Poles Use Layer Rendering Color Tent Roof Back Tent Foof Front Use Custom Color Right Side IL B emman Tent fall Front Tent fall Left Side Tent Wall Right Side Texture Position Texture Tile Dimensions Texture Rotation i Tile width 33791 DOD Degrees Stretch Height 22576 Material Defaut E Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with 0 Use Custom Transparency Ons r meaning opaque Select All Select None ceu __ 3 From the Elements list box choose the elements to which you want to apply the material To choose a custom material for the selected elements such as metal paper plastic or fabric click the ellipsis button beside the Material box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 169 CAD mode 170 Release 19 0 In the resulting dialog navigate to and highlight the desired material and then click OK Click Apply If desired you can apply a transparency level to the selected element Based on the settings that you have chosen for colo
255. he server list You can either manually or automatically refresh the server list using the Monitoring Tool To manually refresh the server list From the View menu choose Refresh To automatically refresh the server list 1 From the View menu choose Refresh Rate In the Refresh After box type the refresh rate in minutes Click OK Result The server list is automatically refreshed at the rate that you specify Additional help For further assistance in using the Sentinel SuperPro Monitoring Tool refer to the online Help available with the product WYSIWYG Reference Guide 387 Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool Release 19 0 ii wysiwyg gt gt Appendix B Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys help you to access commonly used commands more quickly In this appendix Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys 391 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 389 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Release 19 0 oe wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys y Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcuts There are many keyboard shortcuts that can save you time when using WYSIWYG Standardized WYSIWYG keyboard shortcuts are defined below Keyboard shortcut Description F1 Help Shift F1 Displays context sensitive help F4 Repeat last command F5 Refresh current view F6 Relative or absolute coordinate toggle F8 Ortho toggle F9 Snap toggle F10 Crosshairs toggle F11 Interactive object
256. heir status unless a filter is applied m Console This identifies which console is controlling the fixture This field references the binding settings in the device manager in Live mode m Layer This field indicates which layer the fixture is drawn on m Tag This is an internal code used for importing and exporting data to from third party programs m Owner This feature is currently disabled Working in the spreadsheet Data may be entered in a number of ways within the WYSIWYG file The plot can be created and then edited or the data may be entered in a spreadsheet and then placed on the plot Any entries or changes are reciprocated throughout the file changes made in Data mode will be updated in CAD mode and visa versa To add or modify data Type the desired value in the appropriate cell Tip You can add or modify chunks of information at the same time by selecting a series of cells and typing If you are entering sequential numerical values for a field such as patch you can use incremental data entry to facilitate your work WYSIWYG will calculate the next available value based on the number of required channels for the previous fixture To input sequential numerical data 1 Type the first value in the appropriate cell 2 Press and hold ALT and press the down arrow for each incremental entry you want to make WYSIWYG Reference Guide 241 Data mode Release 19 0 To choose a new value 1 Select the a
257. hen configuring the Background Rendering Manager when the program is started it appears either as a maximized window or a minimized icon on the right side of the Windows taskbar The icon changes according to the current state of the program Double click the taskbar icon to open the program Icon Status pb When this icon appears the program is idle Either it has not been configured yet or no jobs have been sent to it 3 When this icon appears the program is currently processing a job in the queue 4 When this icon appears the program is paused L When this icon appears the program has completed all jobs in the queue Background Rendering Manager window When you open the Background Rendering Manager either by sending a render Job to it or double clicking the taskbar icon the main window appears showing you the status of all rendering jobs ES Background Rendering Manager iN k ae Ioj x File Job wiew Tools Help Order Mame Status Progress TimeLeft Status Guened 2 FE new lightz Rendering Tris pan Completed 100 00 audience Completed 100 00 i a nt in Renderserver Bucket image 4 R 123900001 completed notification from LocalRenderi 111708 17 52 22 Event in LocalRenderClient Rendering of frame image4 R 123900001 completed Rendering ace wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode Job pane The Job pane shows you all jobs that have been successful
258. hen inserting Missing Co ordinate Use only one missing coordinate Focus after hang Focus towards origin I Automatically adjust with command line CAD joo Focus joo E Paste Base point Select this check box to enter a base point before an object is copied or cut This will be the object s reference point for paste commands Click to clear this check box to allow the base point to be the insertion point of the object m Interactive object creation Select this check box to allow yourself to draw objects using the mouse instead of entering values in dialog boxes m Automatically group truss Select this check box to group truss objects together in a similar manner to choosing Group from the Edit menu This option is helpful in that it treats the truss as a single unit and allows you to perform actions more effectively on multiple objects If you want to edit one truss object you must first use the Ungroup command on the Edit menu to remove the grouping from the truss objects H Prompt to put deleted fixtures in flight case Select this check box to be prompted when you delete a fixture You will be prompted to delete it completely or send it to the Flight Case If you choose to send it to the Flight Case the fixture is reserved for you in case you want to reinsert it m Show fixture notes when inserting Select this check box to display the fixture notes when you are hanging fixtures if applicable to the sele
259. hile Full Render shortcuts provide settings for a larger high quality rendering To create a shortcut from the Render Wizard 1 From the Design menu choose Render 2 While working through the steps in the Render Wizard you can at any time click Add Shortcut to save the current settings as a shortcut 3 Type a name for the shortcut Click OK Result The shortcut is added to the Render shortcut bar To create a shortcut from the Render shortcut bar 1 Right click in the open space on the Render shortcut bar and then choose New Render 2 Type a name for the new render WYSIWYG Reference Guide 283 Design mode 284 Release 19 0 3 Click OK Result The Render shortcut is saved on the Render shortcut bar The shortcut is preconfigured with the default values for each of the eight steps These defaults are the same values that are used when you choose Render from the menu bar or the toolbar To modify a Render shortcut 1 Double click on the Render shortcut that you want to modify Result The Render Wizard opens with the values that are saved in the shortcut 2 Modify the options as required Result The settings are recorded in the shortcut and are available the next time that you select the shortcut wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode b Background Rendering Manager I ntroduction Once you have used the Render Wizard to set up the look that you want to render you can send the render job to the Backgr
260. his option button if you want to have the texture repeated over the selected element in a continuous series of squares or rectangles and then type the size of the frame in which you want the texture to appear in the Width and Height boxes Based on the size that you enter WYSIWYG calculates how many times the texture is repeated or tiled to completely cover the selected element u Stretch To have the texture stretch over the entire element surface click this option button Based on the aspect ratio and the rotation angle WYSIWYG evaluates the surface with all of its edges and stretches the texture so the best fit Is used E Texture Rotation f the texture has text or another recognizable image in it you might need to rotate the image to get it right side up Type the rotation angle in this box Proceed with the following properties settings m Material Click the ellipsis button to choose a material for the selected elements Click Default to remove the selected material from the element and return to the default material For more information on materials refer to Materials on page 169 7 Use Material Transparency All materials in WYSIWYG specify a level of transparency that varies from one material to the next For example glass is more transparent than brick The transparency level of the selected material appears beside this option button with 0 being completely opaque If you select Defau t the transparency level
261. his type of axis to have an object move in a straight line along the path that you specify or in a series of straight segments all joined together at different vertices to create the path You can create a linear axis in any length or Shape that you require as long as it comprises straight line segments you cannot draw a curved axis For example you could have a person walk across a stage ina Zig zag path if desired When you draw this type of axis and then attach an object to it the distance from the axis to the object does not affect the object s movement the object will always follow the path of the axis regardless of where you have placed the axis or object By default all linear axes have an arrow on one end signalling the direction in which the object will move You can adjust the size of the arrow to suit your needs by opening the Properties page for the axis Rotation Choose this type of axis if you want to have an object rotate in a circular motion When you click to place this type of axis in your drawing a circle with a center dot appears The circle acts as a visual cue telling you the direction in which the object will rotate the center dot is the actual axis around which the object rotates The orientation of the object s rotation changes based on the view in which you draw the axis plan side or front back When placing the object to be rotated in your drawing note that its position relative to the center dot of th
262. hole Fraction gt Grd Interval for Origin 00 000 a So on O G Standard C pen te Paint Background Colour L Visible Grid l Onor rid Eolour WYSIWYG Reference Guide Snap To Enables or disables snap For more information refer to Snaps on page 109 Snap tools can be toggled at any time using the tools on the CAD Options toolbar SnapBox Size Sets the size of the snap box that appears around the cursor when in snap mode Consequently this affects how close the cursor must be to the objects before the snap is applied Enable Grip Dragging Select this check box if you want to be able to resize objects by clicking and dragging on their markers Cross Hairs On Select this check box to set the cursor display to use cross hairs in plot views Cross hairs are useful for lining up objects Units of measure For more information on these units refer to Metric vs Imperial on page 105 The units can be toggled from metric to imperial at any time by double clicking on the units display on the status bar Precision affects the units of drawing precision For more information on these units refer to Coordinate notation on page 104 Based on your choice for measurement units you can choose to display the drawing precision in centimeters millimeters whole numbers or fractions Background Color The color that will be used in all wireframe views Click the box to choose a different col
263. hortcuts use either the scroll button on your mouse or the scroll bar along the side of the shortcut bar To use a shortcut Click the shortcut icon As with all objects in WYSIWYG all shortcuts have properties that affect the object being inserted the view or tool or the navigation method WYSIWYG Reference Guide 57 WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 To modify a shortcut s properties 1 2 3 4 58 Right click the shortcut icon that you want to modify Choose Properties Result The properties dialog box is displayed The settings modified here affect the object view tool or navigation destination of the selected shortcut An example of the Navigation Shortcut Properties dialog box is shown below however the shortcut properties window varies based on the type of shortcut that you select Navigation Shortcut Prope FI Navigation Hame CAD w ireframel Apply Mode Layout Tab Toolbars Designer Tools Popup Windows Set as Default In the Name box type the new name of the shortcut To open the shortcut in a pop up frame click the Pop Up Window check box For more information on popup frames refer to Popup frames on page 53 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface b oe Toolbars The menu bar The menu bar is located within the WYSIWYG user interface below the mode buttons and above the work area The available menus change when moving from mode to mo
264. ht lt Back Add Shortcut Finish Fast radiosity results in a rendering with constant flat lighting Each subseguent option shows more calculated lighting The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflection are permitted Select the Disable Ambient Light check box to ignore the ambient light settings from Step 1 Options in Step 5 affect the radiosity level Radiosity is defined as the combined processes of emission transmission and absorption of rays or reflecting beams of light When using Radiosity it is not necessary to use ambient lighting a Radiosity To generate a rendering that uses radiosity select the Radiosity check box and then choose from the available radiosity options Fast radiosity results in a rendering with constant flat lighting Each subsequent option shows more calculated lighting The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflection are permitted wysiwyg March 2007 b Design mode Disable Ambient Light Select the Disable Ambient Light check box to ignore the ambient light settings from step 1 Step 6 Add Environmental or Outdoor Lighting to Your Rendering Add Environmental or Outdoor Lighting to Your Rendering Clear Sky Overcast For environmental lighting to have an effect your Date YYYY MM DD show must not be DNNE contained within a venue DE i Jm f Date and Time Time HH MM determines the position of AM the sun
265. ht Emission Fixture Hang Structure Truss All Fixtures General Patch Shutters Bx E xial i PAL 1200 cares m 5 Use the sliders along the top bottom and the sides to move the shutter blades Result The cuts that you make are visible in the drawing 6 Click OK when finished To adjust the leaves of barndoors Select the fixture with barndoors for which you want to adjust the leaves Right click and choose Properties Click the Fixture tab From the list on the left side highlight the barndoor Click the Leaves tab o mB Oo N Properties E 2 General Appearance Light Emission Fixture l PAR 64 General Leaves i AI 1IL Inch Barndoor Barrel Rotation cence oo March 2007 CAD mode 6 Use the sliders along the top bottom and sides to move the barndoor leaves You will notice that the movement of the leaves is restricted to left right up and down Result The cuts are visible in the drawing 7 Click OK when finished To adjust flood or spot Select the fixture s for which you want to adjust the flood or spot Right click and choose Properties Click the Fixture tab Click the Lens tab A Oo N a Properties SA a 5 x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture o gt All Fixtures General Patch Lens Ex 6 Axial i B Inch Fresnel Gwe Apo 5 Use the slider to adjust the spot and flood 6 Click OK when finished To focus
266. ibute applies to the entire surface Dynamic Color Control Patch ES Dynamic Intensity Control Patch Bl Cancel March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode a Type or select the single patch addresses to control both color and intensity and then click Next a Dynamic Color Control Patch Type the patch address that you want to use for controlling color in the format DomainName StartAddress or click the ellipses button and then choose the address in the window that appears a Dynamic Intensity Control Patch Type the patch address that you want to use for controlling intensity in the format DomainName StartAddress or click the ellipses button and then choose the address in the window that appears b If you have chosen single patches for both color and intensity skip to step 17 If you have chosen Multi Patch for either color or intensity proceed to the Multi Patch DMX Addresses window below Multi Patch DMX Addresses Light Emitting Surface Wizard E i Multi Patch DMX Addresses Populate the DM Address Pool For the Multi Patch Specify a pool of addresses that WYSIWYG will assign to the individual elements in the grid WYSTWi S can automatically create all of the addresses required based on a patch domain name and start address or you can enter the addresses manually DomainName Startaddress Endaddress a A t 4 Addresses required 64 Addresses in pool 0 i Can
267. ice has been inserted in the Device Manager wysiwyg March 2007 Data mode m Unbind Removes the association of the patch universe with the specified source Tip You can open the Device Manager without having to change to Live mode by double clicking on the AF shortcut on the status bar Display tab Options on the Display tab set properties such as the color of a patch universe View Options x Universe Display Show Details Node Manager Updates per second E l Enable Tooltips Colour UnPatched Colour Background Colour L__ Selected Colour Text Colour Column width Size Small I Large m Updates per second The frequency of updates from the console to the patch universe m Enable Tooltios Select this check box to display information about the patch and the fixture when you hover over the start cell m UnPatched Color The color of a cell in the patch universe that is not patched m Background Color The color of the background of the patch view m Text Color The color of the text that is displayed in the patch universe m Selected Color The highlighted color of a selected fixture in the patch universe m Column Width Size Adjust the slider to resize the patch universe cells to the desired width To change the width of the patch cells You can adjust the width of the cells in DMX and Motion Control patch universes 1 Right click anywhere in the patch universe and choose View O
268. ich the dimension is drawn To draw a dimension 1 From the Draw menu choose Dimension Tip You can also click the Dimension tool on the Draw toolbar rf Click on the drawing to set the dimension start point Right click to set the measurement mode Click on the drawing to set the dimension end point Oo Ff o N Click and drag the grab point in the center of the dimension text to drag the text to the correct side of the object if required 6 Click to set the dimension line Tip Use snaps to connect dimensions directly to other objects Drawing surfaces Surfaces are 2D objects Surfaces are drawn continuously stretching out behind the cursor Surfaces can be used to create backdrops or other flat objects Surfaces can be extruded to create odd shaped risers or other custom shaped 3D objects For more information on extruding refer to Extrude on page 181 To draw a surface 1 From the Draw menu choose Surface Tip You can also click the Surface tool on the Draw toolbar a Click on the drawing at the starting point of the surface Drag to the next point of the surface and click Continue to place points for the surface as needed o fF N To finish and close the surface right click and choose Finish Surface from the sub menu To abort the surface entirely choose Abort Surface This erases the whole surface from the drawing Drawing risers Risers are solid 3D rectangular objects You can use risers
269. ick Yes to indicate that all reports will be modified Click No to change only the chosen report Note Since these files are saved outside of the show document they can be applied to reports in any WYSIWYG show files To apply a heading file 1 Select the report for which you want to apply the heading file 2 Right click and choose Redesign headings Result The Report Headings Editor opens 3 From the File menu choose Open Result You are prompted to save changes 4 Click No Result The Load heading file dialog box is displayed 5 Browse to find the heading file that you want to apply wysiwyg 2 March 2007 Presentation mode 6 Click Open Result The saved heading file is applied Save and close the Report Headings Editor You are prompted to load the new heading file name Click Yes You are prompted to apply the headings to all the reports in the document Click Yes to apply the change to all reports Click Wo to change only the chosen report Column widths You can change the column widths in the report A double headed arrow appears when you float the cursor between the column separations at the top of the report Double click the column headings to have the column resize to fit auto fit the contents Show information The edit fields in the show info window are venue show designer and assistant The entries in these fields appear in the headings of all reports and in the WYSIWYG default title block for plots T
270. id Centre Snapbox Size In Points Perpendicular Midpoints D Tangent T Endpoints Assembly T Pipe Focus Fan 45 Tint ig Grid k mr lw Enable Grip Dragging nterva lw Cross Hairs On Angle lo Background Colour L Origin O n O n a n Units Metric Imperial Precision Whole Fraction Use User Defaults Get User Defaults Cancel 4 Based on your choice for measurement units you can choose to display the drawing resolution in whole numbers fractions centimeters or millimeters a Whole Only visible if you choose Imperial units Indicates that the measurements are rounded and displayed to the nearest whole number a Fraction Indicates that the measurements are displayed to the nearest sixteenths of an inch a cm Only visible if you choose Metric units Indicates that the measurements are displayed in centimeters a mm Indicates that the measurements are displayed in millimeters 5 Click OK Metric vs I mperial WYSIWYG enables you to use metric or imperial units at any time You may choose to set a default type of unit and you may choose to switch unit type on the fly You can also indicate whether you want these units measured in whole numbers fractions to the sixteenth of a inch centimeters or millimeters To set the default unit type From the Options menu choose User Options Click the Draw Defaults tab Click either Metric or Imperial A Oo N
271. ide Show me this wizard next time run WYSIWYG to configure the program so the Wizard does not appear the next time you launch WYSIWYG clear this check box Note If you clear this check box you can always set it again in the Application Options window For details see page 86 Click Next Result The Product Selection window appears enabling you to choose the product level that you want to launch WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard Product Selection Which product would you like to rum 4 standard dongle installed on this computer Console Edition Select this option if you wish to run Console Edition You must be connected to your compatible console bo run WYSIWYG Your dongle must be installed on this computer Network Product Select this option if you wish to run a WYSIWYG Network product Learn Network AWT nr CSP Your dongle must be installed on this computer or this computer must be connected to a network on which there is a network dongle Demo Select this option if you do not have a dongle and wish to run ws in Demonstration mode You will be able to use all Functions of the program except the Save and Print Functions Viewer Select this option if you do not have a dongle and wish to run WYSIWYG in Viewer mode You will be able to view WYSIWYG Files and print plots and reports however you will nat be able to edit therm Select the product that you want to launch you must have the correct
272. idea to get in the habit of saving your show document to an external disk periodically during your work session Application Options General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Auto Save Options T Auto Recover Auto Recover save interval l minutes lw Keep backup files Document Saving Save extemal textures within the document r Document Loading I Reload last document on startup Default to Read Only r DWG Import Options Reset DWG import association Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface Auto Recover Select this check box to save your document at the intervals specified in the Auto Recover save interval box If for some reason WYSIWYG closes unexpectedly such as in the case of a power loss your document can be recovered This recovery will only be up to date as of the last Auto Save so it is recommended that you do not set this interval to be too long wysiwyg March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document Keep backup files select this check box to save a copy of your document with the bak extension every time you save the file The backup copy is one save behind the saved copy and is saved in the same folder as the original document Each new backup copy replaces the previous backup copy If the main show document becomes corrupted you can open the backup file to recover your data The default settings for these options are Auto Recover enabled with an interval of 10
273. ied To break an arc into lines 1 Select the arc that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Arc into lines 3 Type the number of desired break lines and then click OK Result The arc is broken equally into the number of lines specified To break a circle into arcs 1 Select the circle that you want to break From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Circles into arcs Type the number of desired break arcs and then click OK Result The circle is broken egually into the number of arcs specified To break a circle into lines 1 Select the circle that you want to break From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Circles into lines 3 Type the number of desired break lines and then click OK Result The circle is broken equally into the number of lines specified To break a line at vertices 1 Select the multi segment line that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Lines At Vertices Result The continuous multi segment line is broken at the segment intersections Each vertex is now an independent line To break a line into lines 1 Select the line or multi segment line that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Lines into lines ue wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode 3 Type the number of desired break lines and then click OK Result The line is broken equally into the number of lines specified To break a set
274. ified Similarly the values that you specify in metric mode are assumed to be in metres unless otherwise specified At any time you can specify values in both imperial and metric measurements for example 5 3 cm 6 The following example illustrates the many different ways of using the command line Example 1 In a plan view from the Draw menu choose Line From the sub menu choose Solid Dot Center Hidden or Spline Type 0 0 as the starting point of the line Result When you start typing the ComEdit toolbar is displayed Press ENTER to establish the first point of the line at the origin To set the next point at exactly X 5 and Y 5 type 5 5 and then press ENTER Result A new line segment is drawn and it assumes Z from the missing coordinate 6 To place the next point of the line 10 units to the right and 5 units up in Y from the last point type 10 5 and then press ENTER Result A new line segment is drawn 7 To place the next point at exactly 5 feet 3 metres and 6 inches from the last point type 5 3m 6 and then press ENTER Result A new line segment is drawn WYSIWYG Reference Guide 107 CAD mode Release 19 0 8 When you are finished drawing the lines right click and then select Finish Line Plot types All objects occupy three dimensional space Different plot view types allow you to see and work with your drawing from different perspectives There are six types of plot views a
275. ile on your hard drive rather than one from the WYSI WYG library Click the ellipsis button to select the external file to be used as a texture Click 7 e to have the texture repeated over the selected element in a continuous series of sguares or rectangles and then type the size of the frame in which you want the texture to appear in the Width and Height boxes Based on the size that you enter WYSIWYG calculates how many times the texture is repeated or tiled to completely cover the selected element Check Stretch to make the selected texture grow to cover the entire surface Based on the aspect ratio and the rotation angle WYSIWYG evaluates the surface with all of its edges and stretches the texture so the best fit is used This option is not active unless you choose a texture wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode 6 If the texture has text or another recognizable image in it you might need to rotate the image to get it right side up Type the rotation angle in the 7exture Rotation box 7 Click OK Materials Materials differ from textures in that they do not affect what the objects or surfaces will look like but rather how they interact with light The result of applying a material is only apparent in renderings as shown below Objects and surfaces can be assigned both a texture and a material You apply materials using the Appearance tab in the Properties dialog box You can choose your preferred material from t
276. iles into WYSIWYG note the following m While SketchUp supports two textures per surface one each for the front and back WYSIWYG supports only one texture for both sides of imported surfaces when you are importing SketchUp files WYSIWYG will automatically apply the front texture to both sides of the object m Since WYSIWYG does not support nested custom library items when converting nested SketchUp components into custom library objects you need only to import the top most component Textures When you import SketchUp files into WYSIWYG the textures associated with these files are saved in a folder on your computer so you can apply them to imported surfaces By saving them to a folder outside of WYSIWYG you can use them repeatedly instead of only applying them to the surfaces that are within the current WYSIWYG document Upon import you can choose the location for saving the associated texture files or accept the default location If there is already a texture with the same name saved in the location specified WYSIWYG will prompt you to save the file with a new name Import options When importing a SketchUp file into WYSIWYG you have two options a You can open a file m You can merge a file into an existing WYSIWYG document CAD mode 112 Release 19 0 If you open a SketchUp file while another show document is currently open you are prompted to save changes to that document before another show document is opened Only
277. ill be stored A fixture assigned to the path Custom Fresnels would be available in the custom section of the Fixture library in a sub category named FRESNELS Click Next Select the lamp base and default lamp for this fixture Click Next Specify the lens system for the fixture Click Next Type a value in degrees for the beam angle for this fixture Type a value in degrees for the field angle for this fixture Click Next Select the color frame slot size Click Next From the symbol library select a 2D symbol for this fixture Click Next From the shape library select a 3D symbol for this fixture Note A 10 parcan is shown beside the selected shape in the viewing pane to offer a relative size measurement Click Next Type the manufacturer weight and any other information Click Next Type your name Click Finish 197 CAD mode Release 19 0 Pipe snap Pipe snap places fixtures on a pipe at a specific interval Pipe snap does not work for truss or other hang structures It allows you to specify a pre determined distance between fixtures As with all snap functions refer to Snaps on page 109 for more information about Snap tools you can select Pipe snap in mid command or as a running snap type To select Pipe snap as a running snap type Enable Pipe snap before inserting fixtures to hang fixtures equidistantly To select Pipe snap mid command Enable Pipe snap after inserting the first fixt
278. in is set at the center of the room on the floor SA The following entries describe the parts of the black box m A The width of the room In WYSIWYG the default value is 60 0 a B The depth of the room In WYSIWYG the default value is 40 0 a C The height of the room In WYSIWYG the default value is 300 Arena An arena venue Is a basic stadium space The following entries describe the parts of the arena The origin is set at the center of the venue on the floor or ice rink WYSIWYG Reference Guide 135 CAD mode 136 Release 19 0 A The width of the arena In WYSIWYG the default value is 170 0 m B The depth of the arena In WYSIWYG the default value is 2500 C The total height of the arena In WYSIWYG the default value is 60 0 m D The width of the floor or ice rink In WYSIWYG the default value is 60 0 m E The depth of the floor or ice rink In WYSIWYG the default value is 1300 7 F The height of the stands or seating the portion of the total height that is occupied by seating or stands In WYSIWYG the default value is 40 0 Tent There are two types of tents that you can create in WYSIWYG frame tents and circus tents H Frame tents These tents are square or rectangular in shape and usually have two center poles Each wall is made of a single piece of fabric supported by as many poles as you specify 7 Circus tents These tents are styled after the classical Big Top
279. inate setting when drawn using this method Click OK You may also use the Pipe tool on the Draw toolbar Sss To draw a pipe from center in interactive mode 1 2 From the Draw menu choose Pipe Set the height of the pipe that you are about to draw by pressing the TAB key and then entering a value for the missing coordinate if applicable Click to place the center point of the pipe Drag it to the proper length and then click to place the end point of the pipe Notice that the pipe extends in both directions mirrored at center Right click on the pipe that you have just drawn and then click Properties Click the Hang Structure tab From the Name drop down list select the name for this new pipe If the name is not already in the list use the Position Manager to enter the new name Repeat to draw more pipes Click OK To draw a pipe from start in interactive mode 1 2 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Draw menu choose Pipe Set the height of the pipe that you are about to draw by pressing the TAB key and then entering a value for the missing coordinate if applicable Click to place the starting point of the pipe Drag it to the proper length and then click to place the end point of the pipe Notice that the pipe extends in one direction Right click on the pipe that you have just drawn and then click Properties Click the Hang Structure tab From the Name drop down list select the name for this
280. information on drawing hang structures refer to Hang structures on page 186 For more information on drawing items from the Flight Case refer to Entering and modifying objects in the Flight Case on page 233 I nserting color in Data mode To insert color in Data mode 1 Click in the color field of the fixture for which you want to assign color 2 Right click and choose Pick value from the list WYSIWYG Reference Guide 243 Data mode 244 Release 19 0 Use the pull down menu to select a color among those you have already used in your plot or click Library to open the color library Tip You can bypass steps 2 3 and type in the value if you already know the color that you want to assign for example R54 L112 and so on WYSIWYG accommodates multiple color entries for one fixture as follows a Colorl amp Color2 yields two color frames with one gel in each a Colorl Color2 yields one color frame with two gels in it a Colorl Color2 yields one color frame with one split gel in it Data filters Data filters are used for locating or isolating selective blocks of information When a data filter is applied to a spreadsheet only the units that met the filter criteria are displayed Filters are applied to columns of data To apply a data filter 1 2 In the spreadsheet right click on the column heading you want to filter Choose Add Data Filter Result A dialog box is displayed showing th
281. ing from the back side through the venue To create a new plot type 1 2 Click the New P ots shortcut tab Right click in the New Plots shortcut area and choose the type of plot that you want to create Type the name of the plot Click OK Result The type of plot that you chose is created and a shortcut to your new plot is added to the New Plots shortcut bar For information on working with shortcuts refer to Working with shortcuts on page 56 Note The plot is created with a specific set of default properties but you can modify these settings as required For more information on the settings refer to Modifying the properties of a plot below Updating plots Changes made to a drawing in CAD mode are not automatically reflected in the New Plots view You must update plots manually To update a plot 1 2 Select the plot that you want to update From the Options menu choose Update New Plot Note If the New Plots view already reflects the current CAD drawing the option is disabled Modifying the properties of a plot You can modify the border thickness paper size or scaling of a plot 305 Presentation mode 306 Release 19 0 To modify plot properties 1 2 Select the plot for which you want to modify the settings From the Options menu choose View Options Tip You can also use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Bl Result The View Options dialog box appears View
282. ing Manager that enables you to queue up multiple renderings to run in the background without even requiring WYSIWYG to run OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation wysiwyg o gt March 2007 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Modes The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Design Bi CAD i DATA Bi DESIGN BI PRES Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 19 0 b WYSI WYG Perform 20 Introduction WYSIWYG Perform builds on the feature set of Report and Design and adds the ability for lighting professionals to pre cue entire shows in real time Users can create their productions in 3D along with all the necessary paperwork A console can then be connected to the computer and WYSIWYG Perform will simulate the exact effect of the console s output in real time Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes
283. ing with a Wyg it 2 WYG it 2 is Cast Software s DMX interface device You reguire a DMX interface to connect a DMX console to WYSIWYG Each WYG it 2 has 2 DMX inputs that enable you to visualize up to 1024 channels of DMX The WYG it 2 also has 2 DMX through ports that allow you to connect the console both to WYSIWYG and to the physical lighting eguipment at the same time WYG it 2 is eguipped with the necessary outputs to send Autofocus commands You can connect the WYG it 2 to your computer by inserting the WYG it 2 USB cable into an available USB port Once connected to your computer the WYG it 2 does not need an external power supply Note When WYG it 2 is installed the WYG it DMX Interface configuration panel is accessible in the Control Panel of your computer The WYG it 2 name recorded in this configuration panel is the value that you must type in the Address box of the Device Manager Properties window WYSIWYG Reference Guide 355 Live mode Release 19 0 Minit Console WYSIWYG contains an application that simulates a small console called the Mini Console You can use this application in lieu of a real console To use the Mini Console run the Mini Console application found in the WYSIWYG section of the Windows Start menu Connect as if you are using an external console The Mini Console gives you control of the first 25 channels on a single DMX universe but does not record or playback cues wysiwyg gt March 2007 Live mo
284. int You can distribute selected fixtures in three ways m between two points that you choose on the pipe truss m in a specific direction from one point that you choose on the pipe truss m centered around a specific point that you choose on the pipe truss To distribute fixtures between two points Note Since you cannot mount fixtures directly on the end point of truss before you distribute fixtures between two points ensure that End Point snap is disabled Use this procedure to select two points on a pipe or length of straight truss and have WYSIWYG distribute selected fixtures evenly between those points The spacing is determined by dividing the selected region of the pipe truss by the number of fixtures selected 1 Click to select the fixtures that you want to distribute on the pipe truss to select multiple fixtures press Ctrl and then click on each one From the Tools menu click Distribute gt Between two points Click to set the two points on the pipe truss Result The selected lights are evenly spaced between the two points WYSIWYG Reference Guide 195 CAD mode Release 19 0 To distribute fixtures in a direction Use this procedure to select a point on a pipe or length of straight truss and have WYSIWYG distribute selected fixtures along the remaining length of the pipe truss in the direction that you choose spaced according to your specifications 1 Click to select the fixtures that you want to distribute on the pipe t
285. ion You can set a password in WYSIWYG to password protect your dongle To set a password 1 From the Help menu choose Password Result The Change Password dialog box appears Change Password ea Current paszword Hew password Contin pazzword No password Cancel In the New password box type your new password The password can be any combination of letters numbers and characters As you type the password WYSIWYG displays an asterisk for each character that you type The length of the password can be between 6 and 20 characters In the Confirm password box re enter the password Click OK Result The next time that you launch WYSIWYG on the same computer you will be prompted to enter your password In the Enter password box type your password If you do not want to be prompted to enter a password every time you launch WYSIWYG select the Remember for next time check box To change a password 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Help menu choose Password Result The Change Password dialog box is displayed In the Current password box type the password that you previously set You must type the current password if you want to change the password As you type the password WYSIWYG displays an asterisk for each character you type In the New password box type a new password In the Confirm password box re enter the password Click OK Note If you decide that you do not want to pas
286. ion mode Layout tabS 2 caved Sade tease a twatw ead REPOS TT te sca eaters ek Gea ee Hees New PlotS ss coe cee edo wee ee ae ae ee LGVOULS 2400665 ais oop ose Oe WGC eas oe eae a ee ee See he Bee a a a e Worksheets I Pipe tapes es lO Live mode ll Index LOvVOUU tabs MEET 6558045 Guo ROS Connecting to consoles AutoPatch Ss ae oW oh Ree 8 On oe Wyd Visualization AutofocuS GG GG GG GG Rendering RG DMX Camera es WYSI Link Link mode Layout tabs MT Y Setting up WYSILink WYSILinkmode es ETCLink functions Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool SuperPro Monitoring Tool Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC Release 19 0 wysiwyg o gt Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter introduces you to the WYSIWYG Reference Guide provides information for troubleshooting and lists contact information if you need further assistance In this chapter About this manual 11 Troubleshooting 12 Welcome to WYSIWYG 14 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Introduction Release 19 0 wysiwyg March 2007 b Introduction About this manual Introduction This manual provides instructions for the installation and
287. ions you may want to decrease this number or if your computer has a lot of RAM you may want to increase this number m Write log files Select this check box to generate a log file during rendering ETC Interface tab Options on the 7C nterface tab affect the options that will allow you to monitor EDMX data directly Direct EDMX reception allows WYSIWYG Perform users to monitor EDMX data without the need to connect to a console with the Device Manager Application Options General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface l Show SAF message notification box m ETCNet2 Version Select which ETCNet2 network version you want to monitor You can monitor only one version at a time m Allow EDMX reception Select this check box to enable direct EDMX reception in WYSIWYG m Show SAF message notification box Select this check box if you want to receive error messages in Link mode whenever there are problems with an ETC dimmer rack wysiwyg March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document Show Options window Show settings that are specific to the current show file such as show name designer and venue are set in the Show Options dialog box You might want to modify these settings when you start a new show file Error conditions and the appearance of certain objects in your show file are also specified in Show Options To open the Show Options dialog box from the Options menu
288. ions of the sphere To draw a sphere in non interactive mode 1 From the Draw menu choose Sphere Tip You can also click the Sphere tool on the Draw toolbar amp In the Horizontal Diameter box type the horizontal diameter for the sphere In the Vertical Diameter box type the vertical diameter for the sphere 4 To ensure that the sphere remains proportionately the same when resized leave the Lock ratio check box checked If you deselect this check box then you can manually resize the sphere in any direction regardless of its original measurements 5 Click OK Result The cylinder is attached to the cursor 6 Click to place the sphere in the drawing To draw a sphere in interactive mode 1 From the Draw menu choose Sphere Tip You can also click the Sphere tool on the Draw toolbar B In the New Sphere window click nteractive Accept the default values and then click and drag out the shape of the sphere in your drawing When you have the desired size click again Result The New Sphere window appears again 4 In the dialog box that opens type the horizontal and vertical diameter of the new sphere 5 To ensure that the sphere remains proportionately the same when resized leave the Lock ratio check box checked If you deselect this check box then you can manually resize the sphere in any direction regardless of its original measurements 6 Click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 143 CAD mode Release 19 0 7 Clic
289. ir appropriate patch universes Note You cannot control a channel count exceeding that of the WYSIWYG Perform package that you purchased 500 1000 2000 5000 and so on Click OK to close the Properties box Click Connect Result The status of the console changes to connected 391 Live mode 352 Release 19 0 15 Click OK to exit the Device Manager Note Once the console is running and connected to the WYSIWYG drawing operate the console as you would tn the live venue Run up channels and record cues using the console Remember that WYSIWYG does not store or save cues this is done in your console s memory Once the console information is set up you can set WYSIWYG to automatically connect to the console every time the file is opened Working with a console To set the console to connect on load 1 From the Live menu choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Select the console Select the Connect on load check box Click OK to close the Device Manager To edit the patch binding settings 1 From the Live menu choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Select the console Click Properties Select the port for which you want to change the patch binding Click Unbind Rebind as desired follow steps 9 through 12 in To connect to a console on page 350 O o FR O N To remove a console from the Device Manager 1 From the Live menu
290. iri whisper Fill Colour E Hatch Style Background OK Lancel Apply E Change Symbol Click to select a different symbol m Hatch Style The style to use for the hatch If the Hatch style is Vone the symbol is transparent If it is Background the symbol is filled with the color of the background and is not transparent m Fill Color The color with which you want the symbol to be filled If the hatch style is None or Background the fill color is not enabled eM wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 b o t CAD mode Color gobos and accessories Introduction You can add to fixtures accessories such as barndoors tophats color scrollers dousers and so on Accessories have their own section in the Library Browser and can be inserted just like other objects You must insert accessories onto existing fixtures and can only insert them onto compatible fixtures Mountable yokes Note the following before working with mountable yokes While mountable yokes are considered accessories they differ from other accessories in that you need to add them before you add the fixtures you cannot insert a fixture and then select Add Accessory to add a mountable yoke You cannot use the Add Accessory option to add a fixture on a recently inserted mountable yoke Instead you must add the fixture either by using a shortcut or by selecting it from the library browser Then you can use the Add Accessory option to add an acc
291. is 147 Lines 313 Live toolbar 62 Load recording 381 Location setup 94 150 Longitude 95 Looks and moving scenery 272 M Mainframe 54 Marker grips 155 Masking 144 Materials 158 169 Measurement mode 141 Memberships 45 Menu bar 59 Merge 81 Merging SketchUp files 114 Merging documents 81 Message Log 371 Message Log Options toolbar 63 Metric units 105 Micro Layouts 320 MIDI 362 Mirror tool 155 Mirroring 155 Missing coordinate 106 Model data field 241 Modes 51 Modifying wireframe views 70 Motion control system moving objects with 354 Mountable yokes 219 Move 315 Move Page 308 Move tool 153 Movement axes drawing 146 Movement axis adding vertex to linear 149 406 Release 19 0 attaching objects to 149 attaching to a DMX patch 148 attaching to a motion patch 148 changing path of 149 drawing linear 147 drawing rotation 147 moving objects on with a console device 353 moving objects on with a motion control system 354 patching to DMX console device 249 patching to motion control system 249 Moving head 212 Moving mirror 212 Moving scenery reading the patch for 252 viewing 272 273 Moving Scenery tool 266 using 266 Multi source fixtures applying color to 209 Multi source light applying color to with Ouick Tools 220 Navigation shortcuts 55 New Back Elevation Plot 305 New Front Elevation Plot 305 New Left Section Plot 305 New Plan Plot 304 New Plot View
292. is check box if you do not want the currently selected fixture data displayed on the plot The default fixture data is defined on the Show Details tab in User Options For more information on this option refer to Show Details tab on page 72 Moving the page You can move the page around to capture the parts of the schematic that you want plotted or printed To move the page 1 Select the plot that you want to adjust 2 Right click and choose Move Page Result A hand similar to the Pan tool is displayed 3 Hold down the left mouse button and drag to move the page until the area of the schematic that you want on the page is contained within 4 When you are finished right click and select Finish Move Page Objects in New Plots Objects that are contained in the drawing in CAD mode are transposed to the New Plot representation This representation is a 2D presentation of the drawing and as such certain objects are displayed differently than they are in the 3D CAD mode drawing A specific number of objects are used to represent the objects in the CAD drawing These objects are listed in the following table Object in CAD mode Resulting object in New Plots Fixtures Representative symbols Accessories Representative symbols Riser Riser wysiwyg gt March 2007 Presentation mode Object in CAD mode Resulting object in New Plots Text Text Arc Arc Ellipse Ellipse Circle Circle Notes E Beams are not represented in
293. is set to 0 opaque To customize the transparency level click the Use Custom Transparency option button and then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value m Use Custom Transparency Click this option button if you want to set a transparency level for the color or texture that you have chosen or if you want to override the default transparency level of the selected material Then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value Light Emission tab Options on the Light Emission tab affect the light emission properties for the selected object s Light emission is defined as the ability for objects to glow or emit light and can be used to simulate LEDs lasers neon light boxes projection screens and so on Note nstead of using the Properties gt Light Emission tab to change the light emission for the selected object you can use the Quick Light Emission Tool For details see Quick Light Emission Tool on page 160 nee wysiwyg gt March 2007 Properties a sj xi General Appearance Light Emission Hang Structure Fipe lw Enable Light Emission WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode Color Mode Full Color RGB a Static color and intensity Color Intensity soz Dynamic color and intensity Dynamic Intensity Control Universe None Y Address fl awimum Intensity F
294. is value is applicable to center dashed or dotted lines only m Arrows Select where you would like to add arrows on the line You can specify a width and length for the arrows by entering values in the H and V boxes respectively 5 Double Line Select this check box to change the selected line to a double line Indicate how far apart you want the double lines to be by entering a value in the Distance box Circle The properties are the same as when the object was originally drawn For more information refer to Drawing circles on page 139 Arc The radius and angle properties are the same as when the object was originally drawn The only property that ts different is the addition of arrows to either side of the selected arc Properties bi ks New Plot Object Arc Radius jc eo Star Angle n 00 End Angle 180 00 ATA Located at w Start l End Arrow Size H nai we 121 Carcel Amy wysiwyg March 2007 Presentation mode m Arrows Select where on the arc you would like to add arrows You can specify a width and length for the arrows by entering values in the H and V boxes respectively Inserting New Plots into layouts Once you create your New Plot you can insert it into the Layouts view For example you might want to insert it into a Layouts view so that you can add a legend key or report to your plot For more information on inserting a New Plot see To insert New Plot
295. it left off ie 1 In the Background Rendering Manager window click the Pause button ci 2 Click Resume when you want to resume rendering the job at the top of the queue To move a render job to the top of the queue When you move a Queued job to the top of the queue the Background Rendering Manager automatically starts to process it The current job is moved down one step in the queue to a paused status any progress that had been made in the rendering is saved with the job 1 In the Background Rendering Manager window highlight the Queued job that you want to start rendering a 2 Press the Move ob Up button until the job is at the top of the queue Result The job starts rendering Tip If you have many jobs in the queue click the Render ob Now button to move a job from the bottom of the queue to the top and start rendering it immediately To remove a render job from the queue When you remove a job from the queue it will not automatically move up in the queue as jobs are completed Instead to process jobs with this status you have to highlight them and click Queue to move them back into the active queue 1 In the Background Rendering Manager window highlight the Rendering or Queued job that you want to remove from the queue 2 Press the Degueue button w Result The job is moved out of the queue and given the Stopped status To move a stopped render job back into the queue When you dequeue a job you cannot u
296. ith the updated files and then apply textures to objects in your drawing For details see To apply a texture to a surface below To apply a texture to a surface Note The following procedure details how to apply a texture to a surface but it can also be used to apply a texture to venues risers walls or library objects by right clicking and then selecting Properties 1 2 Right click the surface to which you want to apply a texture and then choose Properties Click the Appearance tab Properties aS E ajx General Appearance Light Emission Set Piece Elements Color Texture f Use Layer Rendering Color Use Custom Color _ Use Texture from Library MR Use Texture from File an Texture Position Texture Tile Dimensions Texture Fiotatinn f Tile Width ooo Degrees t Stretch Height 43 Material Defaut El Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with 0 Use Custom Transparency Os meaning opaque SelectAll Select Hone Select the texture option that you want The options are a Use Texture from Library Indicates that the selected surface is a texture from the WYSIWYG library The texture name appears in the box provided Click the ellipsis button to modify the selected surface a Use Texture from File The selected surface uses a texture from an external bitmap or Jpeg f
297. ither metric or imperial units for example 16m For rotational axes the value is shown in degrees for example 42 If the axis is unrecognized by the motion controller then the object position is Shown as a question mark Note If the axis type is mismatched between that which you have drawn and the type that you choose in the Motion Control Console for example if the actual axis is linear but you choose rotational in the Motion Control Console then the cell in patch view turns to red Patch view properties You can view and modify patch universe properties such as the name display details and tooltip information that is displayed in a patch universe To view the properties of a patch universe 1 Right click on the patch icon and then select View Options Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options x Universe Display Show Details ID Conventionals Mame FORT amp Source Console Mini Console Fort TCPVIF Socket Bind UnBind Universe tab Options on the Universe tab affect the binding unbinding of the patch universe to a specific console or device output ID The name of the patch universe shortcut Name The full name of the patch universe or port ID Source The lighting control console or device and port to which the patch universe is bound Bind Associates the patch universe to a console or device output This applies only when a console or dev
298. ixtures 3 Fixture weight 22 43 lbs Click to clear the Use Document Defaults check box Select the Snap check box In the nterva box type a new distance This is the measurement between fixture insertion points Click OK Focusing fixtures You can focus the fixtures in your plot in three ways You can click and drag the beam of a selected fixture You can type the pan tilt and spin values for the fixture in its Properties box You can assign a focus position to the fixture To focus using click and drag 1 Select the fixture that you want to focus Result The fixture s beam appears Click on the beam and drag it to its new position When you are done release the mouse button Tips WYSIWYG Reference Guide You can also right click the fixture and then click Focus to drag the beam without having to hold the mouse button down continuously Click to finish when the beam is focused where you want it Use the missing focus coordinate to set a value on the inactive axis 199 CAD mode Release 19 0 Drawing focus positions Focus positions are m points at which fixtures can be focused 7 objects in the drawing To insert a focus position 1 From the Draw menu choose Focus Position Tip You can also click the Focus Position tool on the Draw toolbar to place focus positions Type a label for the focus position Move the mouse so that the intersection of the crosshairs is placed where you want t
299. k in the drawing to finish placing the new sphere Drawing pipes For details refer to Drawing pipes on page 144 Drawing masking Masking specifically borders and legs can be automatically attached to pipes using the border and legs tool To draw borders and legs 1 Select the pipes for which you want to attach a border and legs From the Tools menu choose Border and Legs Select the Border check box to add a border to the selected pipes and then specify the height of the border Note This is the distance from the pipe to the bottom of the border 4 Select the Legs check box to add legs to the selected pipes and then specify the width and bottom elevation of the legs Note The width is the distance from the extremity of the pipe to the inside edge of the leg The bottom elevation is the distance from the floor z O to the bottom of the legs 5 Select the Group to pipe check box to group the border and legs to the pipe When this option is selected all the components border legs and pipe are selected as one Note If at a later time you want to edit a border or leg individually you must ungroup the objects 6 Click OK Result Three surfaces are drawn and attached to the selected pipe Drawing focus positions For details refer to Drawing focus positions on page 200 Drawing screens Streaming video enables you to bring a live or pre recorded video stream into WYSIWYG and play it back while
300. kground Rendering Manager Connection Settings VW Connect to Local Host Server Name LocalH ast Server Port 39890 Connect to Local Host Leave this check box selected to use the default values and have the Render Wizard send all jobs to the Background Rendering Manager that is running on your computer To send render jobs to another computer in your network that is running the Background Rendering Manager deselect this check box and then type the server name and port number in the boxes provided Note that when you send render jobs to a network computer the Background Rendering Manager must be open and running on this destination computer in this case the act of sending a job from the Render Wizard does not launch the Background Rendering Manager b ServerName Type the name of the server in your network that is running the C Background Rendering Manager where you want the Render Wizard to send all render jobs The server must be running WYSIWYG Release 18 or higher and have a dongle attached Server Port Type the port number that the WYSIWYG Render Wizard will use to send render jobs to the Background Rendering Manager or accept the default port number shown It must be a value between 1025 and 65 535 For proper communication this number must match the port number that is configured in the Background Rendering Manager on the destination computer therefore if you change this value you
301. kly along the movement axis adjust the slider on the first channel stopping at the position where you want to leave the object 3 To move the object in fine increments either forward or back from its current position adjust the slider on the second channel Tip To view fine movement the object must be attached to a very long linear axis or be set to rotate in a very wide arc It is also a good idea to zoom in guite close to the object before moving it To control a motion control patched movement axis with a motion control system After you have patched a movement axis in Data mode you can use the applicable motion control system in Live mode to control the movement of any objects that are attached to the axis Based on the type of system that you are using you can control the object in different ways The following procedure outlines how to control the object s with WYSIWYG S Motion Control Console 1 Launch the Motion Control Console m MCConsole Z 25 i LIH E J 2 ns iN ja Tee Linear BEWD STAT Trawel 35 00 C Rotational 100 00 FRWD meters Moge Static Update Axis Hew Axis i bounce Delete Axis Forward backward Duration sec 1 Delete All Reset WAH Position start end meters Conseole is sending data Start stop Soave Load 2 Ensure that the Motion Control Console or the motion control system if you are using one is connected to the patched movement axi
302. l wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Notes To change fixtures at an application level see To change the symbol for a fixture at the application level below For fixtures with interchangeable lenses or lamps in the case of PARS you must change the symbol for the lamp or lens instead of the fixture From the Library menu choose Browse Library Select the Fixtures library Navigate through the library and then select the fixture type for which you wish to change the symbol Click the Property tool Result The properties dialog for fixture type opens Click Change Symbol Result The symbol selection window is displayed Select the new symbol Click Se ect Close the fixture property box To change the symbol for a fixture at the application level Perform this procedure if you want to modify fixture symbols universally so that when you create new files the symbols that you want are displayed for fixtures instead of the default symbols 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Start WYSIWYG and from the welcome window select Options gt Browse Library Click the Fixtures tab Navigate through the library and then select the fixture type for which you wish to change the symbol Right click the Fixture name and then select Properties Result The properties dialog for fixture type opens Click the view that you want to change Click Change Symbol Note When the same symbol is used for two view types
303. l alignment options are a op Places the selected text label below the insertion point m Center Vertically centers the selected text label on the insertion point Bottom Places the selected text label above the insertion point Dimension tab Options on the Dimension tab affect the appearance and measurement mode of the selected dimension To change the length of a dimension it must be stretched in the drawing WYSIWYG Reference Guide 165 CAD mode 166 Release 19 0 Properties E IN 2 a General Appearance Light Emission Line Text Label Hang Structure Pipe Dimension Dimension Length Text Extension Offset View Type Measurement Mode se Measurement Units Metric mperial Precision whole Fraction u Length This box is not editable It displays the actual length of the line drawn for the dimension m Text Type a height value to change the font size of the dimension label m Extension Type a value to change the length of the extension lines for the dimension The extension lines mark the extremities of the dimension 5 Offset Type a value to change the offset The offset is the distance between the extension lines and the object being measured m View Type This box is not editable It displays the plot type in which the dimension label is visible which is determined when the dimension is drawn m Measurement Mode Select an option to change the measurem
304. l is patched and DMX connected in Live Mode then you will not be able to control the video using any of the Video designer tool commands in Design mode Video sources can only be controlled by a designer tool when the DMX source is disconnected therefore you must first disconnect the applicable console device from within Live Mode before using any of the Video Designer Tool commands WYSIWYG Reference Guide 265 Design mode 266 Release 19 0 Gecoeenencocel E besemeceemenecence Pause Advance lw Loop ideo to end slider Click to play video in a loop Click the Shaded tab to view the video screen s that you have drawn Click the Video designer tool icon to open the tool window From the drop down list select the video source A Oo N Use the controls shown in the graphic above to play pause or stop the video You can also use the slider to manually advance or rewind the video at your desired speed Note When you press the Pause button the frame of the video that is playing at the time is held on the video screen when you press the Stop button the video stops playing and the screen goes blank Moving Scenery tool After drawing movement axes and attaching objects to them you can use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to make the object move along each axis You can simulate moving scenery by setting up looks containing movement axes in Design mode Once you create the look and specify its f
305. le If desired proceed with the following steps to change the material and transparency of the library object Material Click the ellipsis button to choose a material for the selected elements Click Defau tto remove the selected material from the element and return to the default material For more information on materials refer to Materials on page 169 Use Material Transparency All materials in WYSIWYG specify a level of transparency that varies from one material to the next For example glass is more transparent than brick The transparency level of the selected material appears beside this option button with 0 being completely opaque If you select Default the transparency level is set to 0 opaque To customize the transparency level click the Use Custom Transparency option button and then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value Use Custom Transparency Click this option button if you want to set a transparency level for texture that you have chosen or if you want to override the default transparency level of the selected material Then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value Click OK Custom library items You can create custom library items custom conventional fixtures custom gobos and custom color and gobo wheels or scrolls 131 CAD mode 132 Release 19 0 When creating custom gobos an
306. le keys per layout To create key items 1 Right click in the Wizards shortcut bar and then select New Key Result The Enter new Key name dialog box is displayed Type a name for the key and then click OK Result The key shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar and the Key Wizard opens wysiwyg March 2007 Presentation mode Step 1 Key Symbol Selection Key Symbol Selection Keyl Specify a 20 symbol for this fixture Accessories Title Te Cancel Options in Step 1 allow you to choose the symbol that will represent the fixture or accessory in the key m List of symbols Select the symbols you want to use You can choose up to one fixture symbol and one accessories symbol The symbols available in this list are the default WYSIWYG symbols for each fixture or accessory type When you selecting a symbol it appears in the preview window to the right m Title Select the Display Title check box if you want the name of the symbol to be displayed in the key Type a title in the 7 t e box if you want a title other than the default name to be displayed H Change Symbol Enables you to choose a different symbol from the more extensive symbols library which includes the USITT standards among others Follow the steps in Changing Symbols to perform the modifications u Delete Symbol Click this button to remove the selected symbol from the preview window Changing symbols From the list o
307. le with the Autofocus protocol ETC Expression and Impression consoles Flying Pig WholeHog II and III Jands Hog 250 500 600 and 1000 consoles Compulite s Animator 48C Animator 72C Sabre and Spark Top consoles Avab s Pronto Panther Jaguar and Safari consoles Leprecon LP X24 console Transtechnik s Prisma NT and Focus NT consoles Rosco Horizon software For detailed instructions on setting up AutoFocus to work with the Hogll refer to Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC on page 399 To bind Autofocus to the console 1 2 Follow steps 1 through 14 of To connect to a console on page 350 Click Bind Autofocus Note The Bind Autofocus button is only available when a compatible console is selected in the Device Manager Result The autofocus icon Device Manager appears beside the name of the console in the Device Manager Ea Device Manager D New Case Pro Case Pro Not Connected No Not Connected Select All Bind AutoFocus Connect on load Click Connect Click OK to close the Device Manager wysiwyg gt March 2007 Live mode Autofocus tools and menu commands To select fixtures The procedure for selecting fixtures in Live mode is the same as selecting fixtures in Design mode using the design tools For more information refer to Using the Design tools on page 263 To use the Autofocus tools The procedure for using the autofocus tools is the same a
308. lement you can choose between applying a custom color or a custom texture you cannot choose both In addition to either color or texture you can also apply material Choose one of the following options m Use Layer Rendering Color Check this option to set the object s color for shaded views and renderings to the same as the properties of the layer on which the WYSIWYG Reference Guide 157 CAD mode Release 19 0 object resides For more information on layer properties refer to Layer properties on page 172 m Use Custom Color Click this option and then use the color button to set a specific color for the object s a Use Texture from Library Click this option to apply a texture from the library to the selected object s In the resulting window navigate to and select the desired texture You can apply textures to venues drape lines surfaces risers walls and library objects Click the ellipsis button to change the selected texture file m Use Texture from File Click this option to apply to the selected object s a texture that you have created and saved in either bitmap or jpeg format In the resulting window navigate to and select the desired file You can apply textures to venues Surfaces risers walls and library objects Click the ellipsis button to change the selected texture file If you have chosen a texture option then you can also set the properties of the texture as follows m Tile Click t
309. list select the appropriate movement axis To move the object on the axis you have three choices m Use the slider to move the object back and forth along the axis a Click Start or End to move the object immediately to either the start or end of the movement axis For very precise positioning in the box provided type the object s position as a percentage of its total range of movement For example if you want to see the object at the exact half way mark type 50 in this box and then click Apply WYSIWYG Reference Guide 267 Design mode Release 19 0 b a Concepts Introduction Concepts are custom groups of fixtures You can create concepts in CAD Data Design or Live mode in any view that allows fixture selection Creating concepts Creating a concept allows you to select a group of fixtures at the same time Concept shortcuts also enhance working with design tools in shaded views Since design tools work with the current fixture selection opening multiple concept shortcuts allow you to change different groups of fixtures rather than having to select them individually in the Wireframe view Note Concepts are saved on the Concept shortcut bar To create a new concept 1 Select the fixtures that you want to group If you are unfamiliar with selecting objects refer to Selecting on page 152 Click the Concepts shortcut bar Right click on the Concept shortcut bar and then choose New Concept T
310. llation The workstations must be restarted for the changes to take effect 3 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Installation configuration activation and registration Insert the installation CD into your PC s CD drive OR double click the install file if you have downloaded the software Result The WYSIWYG Install panel appears E WYSIWYG Install cas t w wysiwyg production design suite Select nstall WYSIWYG Network Server Note The Server should only be installed on one computer on the network This is the computer to which you will attach the network dongle ARIAL Learn Network Setup x License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Fress the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATING THE SOFTWARE IF ynu have acquired the software in packaging which has required you to agree to the terme of a License Agreement upon opening of such packaging that license shall govern your use of the software IF not the following License Agreement shall govern your use of the software Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you select Ma the setup will close To install WY SIWR Network Server you must accept this agreement Installshield f No On the Setup window click Yes to accept the terms of the license 37 Installation configuration activati
311. lot of processing power and can slow down the refresh rate of other fixtures updates unnecessarily If you are concerned about cue timing set the scene first with gobos and then turn off this option to obtain a faster refresh rate j Select the Convex gobos check box to simulate convex gobo fixtures Some complex gobos that include shapes similar to a C have to be pre processed to make them appear correctly This can often reduce the refresh rate wysiwyg gt March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Live mode k Select the Complex gobos check box to simulate complex gobo fixtures Most gobos are drawn in a complex and a simplified form The complex forms are far too slow for real time simulation and should only be used in rendering I To simulate gobo rotation select the Gobo Rotation check box This option can Slow down the refresh rate substantially as gobos can be rotating even when the fixture s intensity Is at zero m To simulate effects such as prisms select the Effects check box This might increase the number of lines that WYSIWYG has to draw thus slowing down processing power n Select the Center check box to draw a point from the fixture to the point on the Stage where the center of the beam hits If the fixture has CMY color mixing the line will change color to match the output from the console o Select the Continuous Wheels check box to show you automated wheels rotating into place as they would on th
312. ls The unused channels displayed on the status bar track the remaining channels for Simulation based on the level of your Perform system Note that fixtures on layers that are not visible or which are not included in the current scene are not counted Absolute coordinates Absolute coordinates is the default setting however you can change this to the Relative mode This setting determines how coordinate information is displayed mid command In ABS which is the default mode the coordinates display always shows the coordinates currently under your cursor wysiwyg gt March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface Coordinates Coordinates are displayed in the order of X Y and Z The coordinates display the position of the cursor as a distance from the origin of the drawing For more information on coordinates and setting the origin point refer to Coordinate system and origin on page 104 Missing coordinate Double click this label to set the missing coordinate The missing coordinate X Y or Z is the coordinate whose value cannot be entered by clicking on the screen The easiest way to determine the missing coordinate in a wireframe view is to move the mouse around and look at the status bar at the bottom of the working area You will see only two values changing The value that is not changing Is the missing coordinate for that view or workplane The missing coordinate is dependent on the plot type and the workplane selected Once enter
313. ls Editor Legend Symbols Editor x Move Up lw Show this symbol in legend ea Move Down Rotate symbol i E orn Edit Symbol PAE ST HD PT S USITT Par USITT P USITT Par USITT P USITT Ein USITT 61 USITT 6x9 USITT Ge Heloise Heloise Mac 500 Mac 500 USITT 6x1 USITT Ge Iris 3 front Ini 3 front TAD CAD ID KD TAK OD 1 2 fi 4 2 2 B 5 lt Back Cancel E Each symbol type that exists in your CAD drawing is displayed for possible inclusion in the legend The counts of each symbol type are updated automatically as fixtures with the same symbol type are added or deleted from the CAD drawing Options in Step 2 affect the symbol information that is displayed in the legend a Show this symbol in legend By default all symbols are displayed in the legend Click to deselect this check box if you do not want the highlighted symbol in the table to be displayed in the legend Order the display of symbols by clicking the Move Up and Move Down buttons 333 Presentation mode Release 19 0 b Rotate symbol Select this check box if you want the symbol to be rotated in the legend The symbol will be rotated 90 degrees c Edit Symbol Click if you want to make modifications to the symbol information that is displayed name wattage count or notes Follow the steps in Editing Symbols to perform the modifications Editing symbols When you click Edit Symbol
314. lso simulate moving scenery by creating Looks that contain movement axes and fading from one Look to the next For more information see To view moving scenery on page 273 You can also patch the axis in Data mode so you can control the movement of the object with either a DMX console device such as a Mini Console or a motion control system For details see To patch a movement axis to a DMX console device on page 249 or To patch a movement axis to a motion control system on page 249 Drawing cameras You can add cameras to the drawing to provide additional view points in shaded views and renderings WYSIWYG Reference Guide 149 CAD mode Release 19 0 To insert a camera 1 From the Draw menu choose Camera 2 _ Type a name for the camera and a value in degrees for the field angle The default value for the field angle is 53 13 Click on the drawing to place the camera Drag the cursor to aim the camera and then click to place the target Result The camera is inserted into your drawing and available in the camera selection list for shaded views and renderings Tip Use the missing coordinate tool while placing the camera and target Note The target of your camera Is easily identifiable in Wireframe views as defined by the marker points of the camera drawing Camera drawinos are invisible in shaded views because you are looking through the camera For this reason in this view you can choose to display the targe
315. ly sent to the Background Rendering Manager While you can send multiple jobs the Background Rendering Manager processes only one job at a time the job at the top of the queue Once this job is finished it will then automatically proceed to the next queued job and so on For tips on managing the jobs listed see Managing jobs in the Background Rendering Manager queue on page 290 Preview pane This window shows you a visual representation of the rendering progress Note that the final image is scaled to fit this pane and is not indicative of the guality of the actual rendering To view the final rendering you must export the image as a graphic file For details see To export rendered images from the Background Rendering Manager on page 293 Log window Check the messages in the log window for an up to date status as the rendering Job is processed You can change and resize the font in this window by using the drop down boxes provided Using the Background Rendering Manager Once you have configured the Background Rendering Manager it is ready to accept render Jobs from WYSIWYG To use the Background Rendering Manager 1 In WYSIWYG open the Render Wizard and set up the rendering that you want to create choosing Background Rendering Manager in Step 1 2 Proceed through the steps of the Render Wizard and then click Finish Result The Submitting Render ob window appears showing the progress as the job is sent to the B
316. mains active across modes For example if you place the patch view in a popup frame it will remain visible even if the mode is changed from Data to CAD To place a view in a popup frame 1 Make the desired window active 2 From the Options menu choose Open in Popup Frame Tip Alternatively click the Frame Popup tool on the View toolbar E3 Result A new window containing a copy of the selected view opens Popup frames a retain all the functionality of the original view so you can work in the popup view if you want to m are fully integrated with the remaining show document and are continually updated and vice versa u can be resized and moved to any location on the screen or across monitors WYSIWYG Reference Guide 53 WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 54 To display popup frames in full screen mode 1 Make the popup window active 2 Click the Full Screen button EIl Result The popup is expanded to fill the entire screen with no title bar visible Tip To return the popup frame to normal size press ESC To minimize a popup frame Double click the title bar of the popup window Result The title bar only is displayed Tip You can also click the Minimize button Multiple main frames A main frame is defined as the user interface for a given file WYSIWYG allows multiple occurrences of the main frame to be opened for a given file However at no time may more than one file be open Multiple main frames allow you
317. n Md Dynamic Color Control Universe None r Address Cancel Amv Enable Light Emission Click this box to enable light emission for the object and then choose the light emitting properties Color Mode Component color settings are designed to be used in groups of three meaning that you choose the color mode for one of the surfaces and then continue choosing color modes for the other two surfaces in the triplet assigning one color to each surface either red green or blue If you are not selecting colors in a group of three choose Full Color Mode in this drop down box Note This feature is particularly useful to emulate a color mixing source with discrete red green blue elements such as fluorescent tubes or LEDs The color mode affects how the surface responds to the colors that you assign to it both static and dynamic In Full Color mode the surface will show the resultant color mix of the RGB channels controlling it For example if you choose white in the color picker RGB 255 255 255 the surface will be white However when you create a triplet surface using each component color one for each surface and then you choose one of the component colors such as Component Color Red then this surface will only show the red component of the color Color Click the color box to choose the static light emitting color for the object If you set only this value and not the Dynamic Color Control then this is the light
318. n Step 2 of the Wizard but will remain deselected until you specify whether they should be displayed in the legend The counts of symbol types that were already in the legend are updated unless you opted to use a custom count To rename delete or clone the shortcut follow the steps defined in Working with shortcuts on page 56 wysiwyg March 2007 Presentation mode Inserting a legend onto the layout Once the legend has been created using the Legend Wizard you can place it onto the layout To insert a legend onto a layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Legend Tip You can also click the Legend tool in the Layout Pres nsert toolbar 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Legend to be referenced dialog box is displayed Select Legend to be referenced Cancel symbal 3 Select the legend that you want to add to the page and then click OK Result The legend is added to the page at the position where you inserted the placeholder Modifying the properties of a legend To modify the properties of a legend 1 On the layout select the legend that you want to modify 2 From the Edit menu choose Item Properties Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties x General Legend Outline Weight E Colour BEEN Fill Non
319. n menu choose Render Tip You can also click the Render Wizard tool in the Design toolbar Result The Render Wizard opens and guides you through a series of options Click Next and Back to navigate through the Render Wizard 3 Click Finish Result WYSIWYG generates the rendering of your lighting look or cue If the rendering is saved internally it is available as an image in Presentation mode Note For more information see Rendering on page 274 eon wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 Live mode b o t DMX Camera I ntroduction With the DMX Camera utility the camera s orientation position and target zooming and roll features can all be manipulated and recorded to create a realistic rendering of a professional fully edited film clip It is important to distinguish between DMX Camera and cameras drawn in the CAD mode of WYSIWYG Drawn cameras provide a single viewpoint the camera can be moved but only by one parameter at a time and there Is no possibility to track or record camera movements DMX Camera is not drawn in your plot and is completely maneuverable each attribute is patched to a DMX channel and controlled through the console of your choice Changes can be recorded on a separate cue list if the console allows it alternatively camera changes can be recorded directly into previously created cues The result is a recorded camera track that runs simultaneously with your show To use DMX Camera 1 From th
320. n mode includes the ability to lay out your plot with multiple views reports borders and title blocks Refer to Printing layouts on page 342 for more information about printing plots Print Preview command Print Preview displays the document as it will look when printed This allows you to double check that the printed output is exactly what you want WYSIWYG Reference Guide 83 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 84 Print Setup command The Print Setup dialog box allows you to choose the print destination the page orientation and size and paper tray if applicable The print destination may be a physical printer or it may be a file type or fax program for example Paper size and source options will correspond to the printer type selected Send command The Send command allows you to send your document to someone by e mail You must be connected to the Internet to use this feature WYSIWYG will create a new message in your default mail program with the current WYSIWYG file attached Recent file shortcuts The list of recent files at the bottom of the File menu gives you quick access to the last four files opened This list will continually update as show documents are opened If the file you are looking for is not on this list use the Open command To open a recent file 1 From the File menu choose the file you want to open 2 If another show document is currently open you are prompted to save changes to t
321. n profile for new documents North America T Look for network dongle T Show wr SWYG configuration wizard in startup OpenGL From the Options menu choose Application Options Result The Application Options dialog box is displayed 2 x ETC Interface Toolbars Cancel General tab Options on the General tab affect the pipe tape printer the numeric separators used in WYSI WYG and the properties for the startup wizard WYSIWYG Reference Guide Device Specify whether or not the pipe tape printer has a tape cutter Port Specify which port on your computer the pipe tape printer is connected to Baud Specify the baud rate at which the pipe tape printer is running The baud rate is the rate at which your modem can transmit and receive data Flow Control Select the method of data control between the pipe tape printer and the machine Available options are Hardware Software and None The default is Hardware 85 86 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 Use converter Select this check box to indicate that a USB Serial converter is to be used Delay Buffer Type the buffer size for the USB Serial converter Decimal Select the method for separating whole numbers from decimals Available options are comma and period Note that the decimal separator cannot be the same as the co ordinate separator Co ordinate Select the method you want to use to separate coordinates in WYSIWYG Available options ar
322. n the toolbar Although we are in a plan view the riser has been drawn at the height of 10 as specified in the missing coordinate dialog box 7 Change to a side view and you will see that the riser has been placed above the stage Tips You can use separate missing coordinates for focusing fixtures if you enter a value for the Focus coordinate when pressing TAB The advantage of this is that you can be adding pipes and other CAD elements at the specified missing CAD coordinate but still focus the fixtures at an elevation of 5 feet for example a If you select the Show head height circle check box and then type a value in the Head height box all subsequently focused fixture s beams will display both the coverage at the specified head height as well as the footprint of the beam on the surface below Command line The command line is an area in WYSIWYG where you can enter coordinates for the purpose of placing or editing objects in a document The placement of objects can often be done quicker and with more precision using the command line Generally coordinates are specified as X Y Z You can however insert coordinates using either two or three values When using two values the third value will be assumed from the missing coordinate For more information on the missing coordinate refer to The missing coordinate on page 106 The values that you specify in imperial mode are assumed to be in feet unless otherwise spec
323. nal Image Select this option to have the Render Wizard create the image and store it in the location that you specify Then type the file name for the image and click Browse to choose the folder where it will be saved If desired choose the file type either bmp or jpg If you do not make a selection the image is stored as a bmp image a Background Rendering Manager Choose this option to send the render job to the Background Rendering Manager when you finish setting up your image in the Render Wizard Type the file name for the image ensuring that it is a unigue name and then click Next For details see Background Rendering Manager on page 285 Note If this is the first time you are using the Background Rendering Manager you must configure it before the rendering process will begin Upon clicking Finish in the Render Wizard the Configuration Wizard appears enabling you to configure settings such as the Network Port the default folder for storing rendering files and other Manager settings For details see To configure the Background Rendering Manager on page 286 2 5 Design mode 2 6 Release 19 0 Step 1b Configure Background Rendering Manager This step appears only if you chose to create and save the rendering with the Background Rendering Manager If you chose to save the image internally or externally proceed directly to Step 2 Set Camera and Simulation Type MM Render Wizard Step 1b Configure Bac
324. nal object to be replaced with the new broken ones 6 Select the Put new objects on current layer check box if you want the new broken objects to be placed on the current layer as opposed to the selected object s original layer if different 7 Click OK Convert The Convert command turns an object into a different kind of object For example you can convert a circle into a circular surface you can convert lines into pipes and vice versa and you can convert points into focus positions and vice versa WYSIWYG Reference Guide 177 CAD mode Release 19 0 To convert a circle into an arc 1 Select the circle that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Circles into arcs Result The circle is converted into a 360 degree arc The marker points can be dragged out to open the arc If desired To convert a circle into a surface 1 Select the circle that you want to convert From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Circles into surfaces Type the number of segments to make up the contour of the surface You cannot type the number 1 The higher the number the more circular the surface Result The circle is converted into a surface Notes m If you type 2 the circle is converted into a linear surface m If you type 3 the circle is converted into a triangular surface a If you type 4 the circle is converted to a square surface a This pattern will repeat for each i
325. name in your operating system and then click the Audio tab Select MIDI Yoke NT I as your MIDI Music Playback default device MI DI OX To install MI DI OX 1 Download MIDI OX by clicking http www midiox com zip midioxse exe 2 To install MIDI OX double click on the downloaded file and follow the instructions To configure MI DI OX 1 Once the software has been installed launch the application by double clicking on the M DI OX icon located on your Desktop From the Options menu select Devices Select M DI Yoke NT I as your MIDI Input Device and MIDI Yoke NT 2 as your MIDI Output Device 4 Click OK Setting up the HogPC Note For proper functionality install the HogPC software on your computer after you install WYSIWYG If the HogPC software was already installed before you installed WYSI WYG repair the installation using the HogPC installer or the Add Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel To set up the HogPC Launch HogPC Load the show for which you want to use AutoFocus to cue Right click in the HogPC panel and then choose Config Select MIDI Yoke NT 2 for Input and MIDI Yoke NT 3 for Output and then click OK In the HogPC panel click Setup next to the Pig button Oo Ff o N Result The display changes in the first monitor window 6 Click nput Panel and then click M D n at the top You can now close the Input Panel setup window if desired Setting up WYSIWYG
326. ncrement in the number of segments To convert a line into a pipe 1 Select the line that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Lines into pipes Result The line is converted into a pipe assuming all of the properties and characteristics of a pipe You can name it and hang fixtures on it To convert a pipe into a line 1 Select the pipe you want to convert Note There cannot be any fixtures hanging on the selected pipe You must unhang or delete any fixtures before attempting to convert the pipe into a line 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Pipes into lines Result The pipe is converted into a line To convert a focus position into a point 1 Select the focus position that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Focus positions into points Result The focus position is converted into a point Any fixtures that were focused to the initial focus position retain their orientation but lose the association with that point wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode To convert a point into a focus position 1 Select the point that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Points into focus positions Result The points are converted into a focus position and are automatically called Label To change the name for the newly created focus position refer to Focus position properties on page 200
327. ne Text fis EMPT L_ f Fontane tert Bract match Kepa Channel Spot Unit Ascend i Ascend Ascend Descend Descend Descend T Group By Cancel To adjust a column s location in the spreadsheet highlight the appropriate column heading in the Columns box and then click the Up or Down button to relocate it in the data view To hide a column in your view deselect the check box beside it To specify how entries should be sorted choose the desired column headings in the Key 1 Key 2 and Key 3 drop down lists When fixtures have the same value in the first sort key the spreadsheet is then sorted by the values of the second sort key Click Ascend or Descend to sort the criteria in ascending or descending order respectively Select the Show Selection Always check box to ensure that any fixtures selected in a plot view will automatically be selected in a data view Select the Enable Heading Click Sort check box to enable the ability to sort the spreadsheet by clicking on the column headings while working in the spreadsheet The Show Only Selected option will filter the spreadsheet to display only the fixtures that are selected in the Wireframe view Select the Show Gridlines check box to display the columns in tabular format with lines separating the data Select the Word Wrap check box to view all the text on a line in the spreadsheet Select the Show Edit Bar check box to di
328. ner is the DMX address The spot number and fixture type are identified across the bottom of the box es The fixture parameter controlled by each channel is identified in the center of the box If you are connected to a console and are receiving DMX signals the incoming DMX levels are displayed in the top right corner of each box Patch universe Fixture parameter DMX address Output 1 Al x En ara ae ab ae ae ae oe 7A roy H EF M H AH EF M EF M H a H ame tas Dimmer Dimmer Frame D Hm AM Po Sp Fi In Sp niy Sp fi In Sp uly Sp Fi In Sp niy Sp Fi In Sp niy Sp i FcHFF UD Dimmer Es yfi H EIn 5 my a Stobe Douser Loll Col Gobo td ed en Ng Ea a E if Gobo Focus Ins Pism Pan __ Pan Fine Tilt Stroba 1 Omer ala mr EI EDD Coli Col Gobo Rotator Gobo Focus Ins Posm_ Pan Pan Fine Spot number and fixture type Reading the patch for streaming video sources If you have patched a live video source or file the patch appears as shown below DMX address DMX level aS Video ral Control source me name WYSIWYG Reference Guide 251 Data mode 292 Release 19 0 Reading the patch for moving scenery If you have patched a movement axis the patch appears as shown below Position of the nhject on the axis as reported by the motion control system Axis name For linear movement axes the position of the object is reported in e
329. nerement Clear All Cancel To activate a tool select the check box to the left of the tool You can activate as many as you want at a time See below for explanations of the different tools Type the initial value for the tool in the box to the right of the tool name If you want the value to auto increment as for channels or spot numbers make sure you select the Auto Increment check box WYSIWYG will assign the next sequential number based on the properties and requirements of the previous fixture When the dialog box is set up the way you want it click OK wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode 5 The cursor will show a O indicating that Quick Tools have been activated Click on each fixture in the order you want any auto incrementing values to be assigned Note The attributes to be assigned to the next fixture are logged in the bottom left hand corner of the status bar Ins Ti h wireframe A uad FIi Next Fixture Channel 14 Purpose Blue top light Patch 4 1 6 When complete right click and choose Finish Quick Tools Note To change the values at any time right click and choose Change Options Tip Use the Clear All button to reset all the values and deselect all quick tools Quick Tools u Ouick Spot enters a spot number in the Spot box m Quick Unit enters a unit number in the Unit box m Quick Purpose enters a fixture purpose in the Purpose box m Quick Focus enters a focus position or pan and til
330. ng menu 8 _ To place other fixture types repeat the above steps for each type wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Hanging multiple fixtures Once you hang a single fixture you can use the Array feature to instantly copy and paste multiple copies of it along the length of a pipe or straight piece of truss in the direction that you specify This feature enables you to hang up to 100 fixtures quickly and precisely To hang multiple fixtures 1 On a pipe or a straight length of truss hang the fixture of your choice by following the procedure To insert fixtures on page 194 Note To hang fixtures along the length of truss or pipe hang the first fixture at one end of the pipe truss and then set the direction in which you want to copy and paste it 2 Click the fixture to select it and then right click and choose Tools gt Array gt Along Pipe Result An arrow attaches to your cursor when you hover over the pipe truss 3 Click on the pipe truss to set the direction in which the fixture will be arrayed either to the left or right of the fixture 4 In the dialog box that opens type the total number of copies desired this includes the original object Adjust the interval value if required 5 Click OK Result The fixtures are placed along the pipe truss Distributing fixtures You can use the Distribute feature to guickly arrange multiple fixtures evenly over a pipe or piece of straight truss starting at a specific po
331. ng procedure the movement axis must already be linked to the patch universe For details see To attach a movement axis to a DMX patch universe on page 148 1 In the shortcut area click the Patch tab 2 Click the patch shortcut to which you have linked control of the moving object Result The moving scenery patch appears in the patch universe 3 Open the console device that you have connected to the DMX patch for example the Mini Console 4 Using the console controls move the slider of the first or second channel to advance the object to the desired position on the movement axis Note The first channel is for coarse movement and can be used to advance the object quickly to any position along the entire path from start to finish The second channel is for fine movement Its movement range is very slight and depends on the position that you have set on the first channel For details see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 353 5 In the Shaded tab of Live mode you can now use the console device to control the object s movement along the axis For details see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 353 To patch a movement axis to a motion control system In WYSIWYG you can patch a movement axis to which one or more objects has been attached and then use a console device or a motion control system to control the progress of the objects along the axis You have th
332. nnel number all representations of that object in all New Plots views are updated Copied objects are not added to the drawing in CAD mode nor to the spreadsheet in Data mode You can copy and paste objects between New Plots views To copy an object 1 Select the object to be copied 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy 3 From the Edit menu choose Paste 4 Click in the plot where you want to place the object Cut When you cut an object in a New Plots view it is not removed from CAD mode However cutting an object in CAD mode removes it from all New Plots views wysiwyg gt March 2007 Presentation mode Cutting an object adds it to the clipboard You can subsequently paste the object into a New Plots view You can cut and paste objects between New Plots views To cut an object 1 Select the object to be cut 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut 3 From the Edit menu choose Paste 4 Click in the plot where you want to place the object Delete Deleting an object in a New Plots view does not delete the original object in CAD mode However deleting an object in CAD mode does delete the representation of that object in all New Plots views To delete an object 1 Select the object to be deleted 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete Result The object is removed from all New Plots views Note If you accidentally deleted an object you can recover it by choosing Undo Delete from the Edit menu Move The Move comman
333. nt Size WW Enable Tooltips ho lw Draw Symbols Show truss crass members Fixture tooltips lw Unit Tw Channel IY Spot T Colour Lamp T Focus TT Gobo Circuit Patch Position Purpose PanyTilt T Lens Notes T Spin F Dimmer IN Use User Details Release 19 0 Fixture data shown on plot Select the attributes that you want displayed around the fixture symbols in the CAD item To modify how the attributes are laid out refer to Fixture Notation and Information Layout in Fixture notation on page 214 Show Text Labels Select this check box to display text labels Tooltips Displays tooltips on the CAD item Tooltips are the pop up messages that display specific information about a fixture when you hover over it Choose the information that you want to display in a tooltip by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the Fixture tooltips group box Tooltips are often helpful when trying to locate a specific fixture in a plot Draw Symbols Select this check box to draw fixtures as symbols instead of 3D objects For more information on symbols refer to Symbols on page 214 Show truss cross members Deselect this check box to hide truss cross members in the CAD item to reduce the clutter or increase the speed of the display Select this check box to see the cross members Point size Set the default size for all points You can view a sample of the chosen size in the box to the right Adjusting the content
334. nt layers you may want to bring these in separately one by one as well Exporting DWG DXF files If you need to send your WYSIWYG drawings to someone using another drafting program you can export your file to the DWG or DXF file type DWG and DXF formats are used to transfer documents to AutoCAD or other compatible drafting applications Entities that can be exported 2D DWG DXF When you export WYSIWYG objects to a 2D DWG DXF file all objects including fixture attributes are converted to lines 3D DWG DXF The objects that can be exported to a 3D DWG DXF file and the resulting DWG DXF entities are shown in the following table Fixture attributes cannot be exported to 3D DWG DXF WYSIWYG object DWG DXF entity Line 3D Polyline Spline Spline Point Point Circle Circle Arc Arc Text Text Pipe Line Dimension Lines and MText All other objects PolyFace Mesh Note You cannot export truss Limitation m The slope near the end of two lines may be slightly off To export to DWG DXF in 2D Note When you export WYSIWYG objects to a 2D DWG DXF file all objects including fixture attributes are converted to lines WYSIWYG Reference Guide 123 CAD mode 124 1 2 Release 19 0 From the File menu choose 2D DWG DXF Export In the Export dialog box navigate to the location where you want to save the exported file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save in drop down box Fe hy Recent Documents D
335. ntinuous loop along the movement axis Forward Select this option if you want the object to move forward along the axis from start to finish and then start over again at the beginning in a continuous forward loop Backward Select this option if you want the object to move backwards along the axis from finish to start and then begin over again in a continuous backwards loop Duration box If you have chosen any moving Mode value that is any value except Static you can specify the length of time in seconds over which you want the full range of motion to take place The larger the number you type in this box the slower the object moves Position slider For all moving modes bounce forward backward the slider indicates the position of the object when the console is sending data to WYSIWYG For the static mode while the console is started drag the slider to to adjust the position of the object on its axis The position value changes in the box in the left pane m Position box While the console is sending data to WYSIWYG for all moving modes this box shows the progress of the object s movement along its axis for the axes in the static mode you can type the precise location of the object on the axis Click Update Axis to view your new settings Click Save to save the changes Note If you make any changes to the axis settings and save the changes you can revert to the previous settings by clicking Load Connect
336. o appears in the properties dialog box All tabs are explained here General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the layer s color and line thickness Properties e D 2 xl General Appearance Light Emission Sidedness Layer lw Use Layer Colour Venue lw Use Layer Line Thickness jom j Attach bo Anis lt None gt a wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode m Layer list A list of the layers in your document is displayed Click on a list item to change the layer on which the objects will be drawn m Use Layer Color Select this check box to set the object s color for wireframe views to be the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 172 Click to clear the check box and then use the color button to set a specific color for the object m Use Layer Line Thickness Select this check box to set the object s line thickness to be the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 172 Click to clear the check box and then type a thickness in the box below to set a specific line thickness for the object The line weight is used to determine how thick the pen should be when printing a copy of the document The applied line thickness is only visible in Print Preview mode and when printed m Attach to Axis From the drop down list select the mov
337. o create a custom library item See To create a custom library item on page 151 To create a custom fixture See To create a custom fixture on page 197 To create custom color or gobo lists See To create a custom color gobo list on page 221 To create a custom gobo See To create a custom gobo on page 223 wysiwyg March 2007 y o t CAD mode Drawing objects I ntroduction In WYSIWYG the Draw menu lists the objects that you can draw Keep the following tips and aids in mind when you are drawing the various objects Drawing tips At any time instead of clicking points with the mouse you can type in the desired coordinates When you start typing the Command Line automatically appears in the lower left hand corner of the window Create shortcuts for library objects Use the missing coordinate Drawing aids Several commands and icons are available to help you when drawing in CAD mode For a complete list of these aids refer to Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys on page 391 Drawing a venue To begin your drawing insert a venue To insert a venue 1 3 4 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Draw menu choose Venue Result A sub menu will appear prompting you to choose the type of venue to be inserted Select Black Box Arena Proscenium Arch Frame Tent or Circus Tent Result A dialog appears in which you can modify the properties of the room The Proscenium
338. o input show info 1 From the Options menu choose Show Options 2 Click the Show nfo tab Show Options x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Venue PO Show Po Designer PO Assistant PO Type all the pertinent information in the boxes Click OK Result All reports are updated WYSIWYG Reference Guide 303 Presentation mode Release 19 0 b gt t New Plots Introduction New Plots views were introduced so that you could more effectively manipulate a drawing developed in CAD mode to create a lighting plot or schematic for printing In the New Plots view you can m manipulate the objects in a plot without affecting the objects in the original CAD drawing model u notate your plot using objects such as circles lines and text labels m rotate the position of vertical hang structures to better illustrate mounted fixtures m move rotate or manipulate the layout of fixture attributes easily and quickly Working in the New Plots view Working in a New Plots view is similar in some respects to working with a drawing in a CAD wireframe view You can use your keyboard and mouse to navigate around the plot easily and quickly A command line interface is available to help you when entering coordinates Note Changes made to a drawing in CAD mode are not automatically reflected in the New Plots view You must update plots manually to see the
339. o select Assembly snap in mid command Enable Assembly snap after inserting the first piece of truss to assemble selectively Assembly snap disengages after you place the next piece of truss assembling only the first truss or group of trusses with the second piece WYSIWYG Reference Guide 191 CAD mode 192 Release 19 0 To use Assembly snap 1 From the Tools menu click Snap and then choose Assembly Tip You can also click the Assembly snap tool on the CAD Options toolbar gi Insert truss as described above To snap truss pieces together hover the cursor over the end of the piece of truss to which you want to attach the next piece and it will automatically snap into position Click to insert the piece of truss in the drawing Rotating truss When inserting truss pieces in your drawing you can rotate them to the desired position by using the Rotate tool and the rotate hot keys X and Z By enabling Assembly snap pieces of truss that you drag into the drawing will snap to connect to the first piece of truss that you inserted ensuring proper structural assembly Notes a When inserting and rotating the first piece of truss in a series you must use the Rotate tool eb to rotate it to the desired position you cannot use the hot keys X and Z to rotate the first piece of truss a Once you have placed and rotated the first piece of truss and have enabled Assembly snap you can then drag new pieces of truss into t
340. o the location where you want to save the rendered image In the File name box type the name of the file From the Save as type drop down box choose a graphic format bmp jpg tif or gif Click Save To delete render jobs from the Background Rendering Manager You can delete any Job those with the Rendering Queued Stopped or Completed status and all of its supporting files from the Background Rendering Manager Note that when you delete jobs you cannot recover them and there will be no record of them 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide In the Background Rendering Manager window highlight the job that you want to delete Press the De ete button A message box asks you to confirm your choice x Click Yes 293 Design mode Release 19 0 a wysiwyg gt gt Chapter 9 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Presentation mode Presentation Pres mode contains all the necessary tools for creating professional printouts of your show document including reports plots and images In this chapter Layout tabs 297 Reports 298 New Plots 304 Layouts 320 Images 343 Worksheets 344 Pipe tapes 345 295 Presentation mode Release 19 0 wysiwyg March 2007 Presentation mode y ae Layout tabs Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These tabs provide various configurations of the views that you are working with To change layouts click the tab that corresponds to the la
341. objects in the path of the virtual beam are illuminated even if an object would normally block the beam from reaching another As illustrated in the rendering below all three surfaces are illuminated and the beam continues into infinity To calculate which objects the beam of light will hit and which objects it will not hit select Objects Objects in the path of the virtual beam will not be illuminated by the beam if the beam has already been blocked by another object However WYSIWYG still does not calculate where the beam stops As illustrated in the rendering below the first surface is illuminated but the beam is still continuing into infinity Select Atmospheric to calculate which objects the beam of light will hit and where the beam of light will end This is a true representation of how light behaves As illustrated in the rendering below the first surface is illuminated and the beam also stops there 2 9 Design mode 280 Step 5 Define How Light Reflection Will Be Simulated Release 19 0 Presence Use the Presence slider to change the relative brightness of fixture beams When set to Subtle WYSIWYG accounts for all variations in lamp output including gel transmission color temperature fixture efficiency and lamp When set to Bold all fixture beams are rendered at the same general intensity Reccecccecccscceseosod Fast C Medium Best Bounces 1 nn god T Disable Ambient Lig
342. ode from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be recorded for all connected nodes 4 When recording a backup look you have the option of recording the output level of all dimmers in the selected dimmer rack Snapshot of dimmers option or only those that have been set using the dimmer rack control panel A manually set dimmers option 5 When finished click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 379 WYSILink Link mode Release 19 0 To play back a backup look 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Play Result The Play BackUp Look dialog box is displayed Look Number il Dimmer Room OMe Mode Cancel In the Look Number box type the number of the backup look that you want to play Select the nodes for which you want to play the backup look Click Specify to select the node from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be played for all connected nodes 4 When finished click OK To stop a playback look 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Stop Result The Stop Active Backup Look dialog box is displayed Dimmer Room Okis Mode Cancel In the Look Number box type the number of the backup look that you want to stop Select the nodes for which you want to stop the backup look Click Specify to select the node from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be stopped for all connected nodes 4 When finished click OK
343. ofocus to 399 Hookup data field 240 Hot keys 392 Patch views 396 Presentation views 395 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Index Simulation 394 Image items 331 Images 343 371 Imperial units 105 I mporting DWG DXF files 117 SketchUp files 111 112 114 Importing DWG DXF files 118 120 In Place update 33 Insert Pres toolbar 62 Inserting Color in Data mode 243 Fixtures in CAD mode 194 Fixtures in Data mode 243 Focus positions in Data mode 243 Items into layouts 322 Positions in Data mode 243 Installing In Place update 33 WYSIWYG 32 WYSIWYG Learn 35 WYSIWYG Network 35 Installing textures 166 Installing WYSIWYG 33 Intensity design tool 263 Interactive mode 96 111 Isometric view 108 Item properties 326 J jpeg file 224 278 322 343 K Key Instrument labels 214 Keyboard and mouse control 68 Keyboard shortcuts 391 Keys 336 L Label layout 216 Ladders 186 191 Lamp Type data field 241 Lamps 129 Latitude 95 Layer data field 241 Layers 171 Layers toolbar 62 Layout fixture data 214 Layout tabs CAD 103 Data 239 405 Index Design 261 Link 369 Live 349 Pres 297 Layouts Pres mode 320 LED 225 Left view 108 Legend items 332 LES Wizard 225 Library Browser 128 Library objects applying textures to 130 Library shortcuts 56 Light emission 158 Light Emitting Surface Wizard 225 Line Drawing lines 138 Line color 172 Line weight 172 Linear ax
344. olled by the position that you set on the third channel if the value is set between 1 84 between 1 and 3390 It is paused if the value is set between 85 169 between 33 and 6690 and it plays If the value is set between 170 255 between 66 and 10090 Third channel Position If you have set a value within the bottom third level of the second channel between 1 and 33 then you can use the third channel like a slider advancing the video either backward or forward to the exact position that you want to see If the value on the second channel is set to any level above 84 between 33 and 100 then the third channel is disabled Ensure that the console device is connected to the patched video source For details on connecting a console see To connect to a console on page 350 a To play the video from start to finish perform the following steps a Set the first channel to a value between 128 255 above 5090 b Set the second channel to a value between 255 170 between 100 and 6690 To pause the video perform the following steps a Set the first channel to a value between 128 255 above 5090 b Set the second channel to a value between 255 170 between 100 and 6690 and play the video to the spot where you want to pause it Then move the second channel to a value between 169 85 between 66 and 3390 to pause the video at this spot To control the progress of the video manually perform the follo
345. ollowing sections wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode u Fixtures E Accessories ER E Truss m amp Library Items scenic El E Symbols Gel color m Gobos a t Lamps 7 9 Lenses Library entries are divided into sort criteria These criteria may be organized alphabetically by manufacturer by type or by other pertinent classifications For example you can find the ETC Source 4 in the Fixtures section gt Manufacturer gt EFGH gt ETC gt ERS sub menu Based on the library item that you click you may see a sample image of the item in the preview pane at the bottom of the browser To view the properties of library objects 1 Open the Library Browser 2 Navigate to and select the desired object 3 Click the Property tool at the top of the Library Browser 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to view the properties of multiple objects You may want to open the properties of different objects to compare data such as photometric information Tips m You can also hold the ALT key and double click on the object name m To view library objects without opening property windows browse the library using the shortcut bar To do this select the shortcut bar for the type of object you want to view Right click in the shortcut bar and then choose New lt library item gt The Library Selection dialog box opens with a viewing pane included To insert objects from the library 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Open the Library
346. on a workstation can be viewed under Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services The Learn or Network Client enables the software to function over the network The Client must be installed on all desired workstations WYSIWYG Learn can run up to 10 clients However the number of clients for WYSIWYG Network is restricted based on the configuration purchased A typical WYSIWYG Network Learn setup is illustrated on the following page All computers running Network Learn components must be on the same network and therefore have the same network ID and subnet mask WYSIWYG Reference Guide 35 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 19 0 36 Network dongle Learn Network Server and Client DR Standalone Learn Network Server Learn Network Client Learn Network Client Network services Windows XP Services are supported in Windows XP Services start running aS soon as your computer is turned on regardless of whether the user is logged in The service begins automatically each time the workstation is restarted and runs in the background without any prompting from the user The service may also be started manually the choice is available during the installation process Network protocol WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network will run on any LAN that supports TCP IP protocol NetBEUI and IPX SPX networks are not currently supported Detecting the network dongle If the service is not running t
347. on and registration Release 19 0 4 Click Next Result The Choose Destination Location window appears WYSIWYG Learn Network Setup ete eel 5 Select a destination location for the Server files The default location is C Program Files WYSIWYG Server 6 Click Next Result The Se ect Program Folder window appears ARIAL Learn Network Setup WEYSIWETR Network Serve Administrative Tools dobe Adobe Acrobat 4 0 Dell Applications Dell Solution Center ete eel 7 Select a program folder for the shortcut The default is WYSIWYG Server March 2007 Installation configuration activation and registration 8 Click Next Result The Start Copying Files window appears ARIAL Learn Network Setup Ea y Start Copying Files Y Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back IF you are satisfied with the settings click Next ta begin copying files Current Settings Wo STWa G Network server will be installed in C Program Filessw5lwya Network Serv W G Dongle Service will be started automatically Wo STWe G Network Server program group will be created under Start meny r 4 LU lnetallehreld lt Back Cancel 9 Review the installation settings and then click Next to begin the installation 10 After all the files are copied click FINISH to complete the installation To install
348. on each end of any component and then specify how big the item really is For example if your Floorplan contains a stage click on one end of the stage and then click on the other end In the Window that appears type the actual width of the stage To start measuring click OK Cancel Click OK to close the instruction window Choose an item in your drawing whose measurements you know and then click on one end of the item For example if you Know the dimensions of the stage click on one corner of it Click on a second end of the item For example if you had clicked on one corner of the stage click on a second corner of it Result The Import Floorplan window appears prompting you to enter the length of the line that you have just drawn Type the length of the line and then click OK Result WYSIWYG adjusts the size of the floorplan based on the scale that you have entered to ensure that your drawing is accurate The floorplan appears in your drawing in plan view the only view in which you can see it Tip Once you import the floorplan you cannot delete it from your drawing However you can hide it from sight by right clicking on your drawing and selecting Hide Floorplan To show the floorplan again simply right click and select Show Floorplan 127 CAD mode y a The Library Browser 128 Introduction Release 19 0 An essential component of WYSIWYG is its extensive library You can browse
349. on names in your show document It also sets the sort order of your positions You can use the Position Manager to change the sort order of the position names which is important for printed paperwork like instrument schedules and other reports that use the Position field The order of position names is also used for general sorting in the Data view and the order in which positions appear in the Flight Case The Position Manager is accessible from the Properties window of a hang structure and from the Positions command in the Edit menu To view and edit entries in the Position Manager 1 From the Edit menu choose Positions Note The ellipsis button on the Hang Structure page of a pipe s or truss properties will also open the Position Manager Position Manager x Sort Order Hew Rename Renove Select Cancel Click New Type the name of the new position and then click OK To modify the name of a position select the position and then click Rename o Ff GW N Type the new name and then click OK wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 9 CAD mode To remove a position name select the name and then click Remove Removing the position name does not delete the hang structure Rather the hang structure removes its association with the position name To reorder the position names in the list select the name of the position you want to move Click Uo or Down to move the name in the list If you
350. on page 352 Drawing movement axes For every movement axis that you draw in CAD mode you can attach one or more objects to it and then define the object s position along the axis You can attach objects such as risers library objects or custom objects that you have drawn To be able to move an object in different planes you can attach multiple movement axes to one another Simply attach the object to one of the axes and then control the object s movement along any of the axes by selecting it with the Moving Scenery Designer tool This feature is useful for example if you have a set piece that needs to be able to move in both a vertical and horizontal motion Notes m When attaching axes to one another you cannot create a circular linking pattern For example you can link Axis A to Axis B and then link Axis B to Axis C but you cannot then link Axis C back to Axis A because this creates a circular link wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode You cannot attach fixtures to movement axes however you can attach pipes that hold fixtures to axes Currently you cannot attach focus positions or groups containing focus positions to movement axes However in future releases you will be able to attach either of these items to movement axes You can draw axes either diagonally or straight along any direction of movement x Y or Z choosing between the following two main types of axes Linear Choose t
351. one show document may be open at a time When you merge documents you can add the contents of the SketchUp file to the contents of the current WYSIWYG document To open SketchUp files This procedure creates a new WYSIWYG document out of the SketchUp file prompting you to save changes to any current document that is open and close it before importing the file Note Before you begin this procedure you must have the SketchUp file saved on your computer 1 From the File menu choose Open 2 From the Files of type box select SketchUp files skp and then navigate to the location where the file is saved on your computer 3 In the browser click the file name and then click Open Result The Se ect SKP Settings For mport dialog box is displayed Select SKP Settings For Import E 2 x Layer Import Directories Layer Name Import Single Sided Select All Clear All lw Import Single Sided Onentation we Defaut C sees 4 On the Layertab highlight the layers that you want to import a f there is more than one layer listed you can select multiple layers Simultaneously by pressing Ctr on your keyboard and clicking on the desired layers For each layer that you want to import ensure that the mport check box is checked If you do not want to import a certain layer highlight it and deselect this checkbox For example tf you have drawn both a venue and elements in SketchUp and you have put them on s
352. ons Tip You can also use the Message Log Options tool on the Message Log Options toolbar Result The Properties dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Message Log Options tab Properties 2x Display Log Options Message Log Options Message options r Show I messages a Ending Messages on CM GE ee Pending messages only 1 dayls r Auto Save Options w Auto Save Al messages Auto save interval ho minutes l Show message notification box Play a sound when new messages arrive M Enable filtering sorting and column managing at startup OK Cancel Use the Message Log Options to configure the Message Log a Use the Delete settings to determine how long messages are held in the Message Log and to delete messages currently in the Message Log m Use the Show settings to switch between displaying all messages Pending and Cleared or only Pending messages m Use the Auto Save settings to determine how often the Message Log is backed up to disk ie wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 WYSILink Link mode m Use the notification settings to set up how you want to be notified of new message arrival You can choose to have a notification box pop up and or have a sound play as new messages arrive Display Log Options tab The display log options affect how columns are ordered and how the messages are sorted To set column visibility and order 1 Click the Display Log Options t
353. ons ETC Interface General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Simulation Options Fast Simulation C Fast Simulation for Primary Display Only Safe Simulation 2 Fast Simulation Enables hardware acceleration Hardware acceleration uses the capabilities of the graphics hardware of the computer to display graphics This is the default option m Fast Simulation for Primary Display Only Enables hardware acceleration for the primary emulation a Safe Simulation enables software emulation Toolbars tab Options on the 7oo bars tab affect which toolbars and status bar panes you want to display in WYSIWYG wysiwyg gt March 2007 Application Options a MU jx Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars View Selection T Layout Format l ComEdit F Design F Layout Edit Scene F Live Layout Ingert T Layer F Gate T Layout View Universe T Mew Plot Options WwrSILink M CAD Options D New Plat View D Message Log Opt Show statusbar panes IW Statusbar lw Selected objects Coordinates lw Snap M Autofocus fw Ortho lw Channel Over lw Absolute lw Error Checking Missing Coordinate Unit Type Managing your WYSIWYG document You can also hide the tooltips that display information about a specific fixture when you hover over the fixture Tooltips are displayed by default For more information on toolbars refer to Toolbars
354. ool on the Message Log Options toolbar Ea 2 Click the Display Log Options tab Click the Column Manager tab 2x Display Log Options Message Log Options Filter Sot Column Manager Column visibility and order list w NMessageData I Seventy MessageData I Category MessageData I Pending MessageData 1 Timestamp MessageData I Msg Class MessageData 1 Msg_ID MessageData I Message_Text MessageData 1 Dimmer MessageData I Rack SourceData I Mode_ Type SourceData I IP_Address SourceData 1 MAC_Address 1 Saurece Data Rack B Down Up O O IS SJ IS fs is S 4 Click the name of the column that you want to move and then click Down or Up to reposition it in the listing 5 Click the box to the left of the column name to set its visibility A check indicates that the column is currently visible Note You cannot make the column labeled Message Data Seguence Number invisible 6 Click OK To sort messages 1 Click the Display Log Options tool on the Message Log Options toolbar FA 2 Click the Display Log Options tab WYSIWYG Reference Guide 373 WYSILink Link mode 374 3 Release 19 0 Click the Sort tab Display Log Options Message Log Options o w Delete In each Key position select the column by which you want to sort and then click Ascending or Descending to set the sort order Click OK Result The Message Log will refresh with the newly sorted dat
355. oose from none circle square octagon or diamond k Increase or decrease the size of the shape as desired 8 Set the position of the label by clicking and dragging on the label in the preview window To drag a label you must click on the small square that appears in the middle of it when you select it Note The preview window shows the fixture symbol and layout in two orientations for your reference This is to give you a visual for the fixture in its unfocused and focused positions 9 Repeat the procedure for all attributes Tip The copy and paste buttons allow you to apply the same label layout to other fixture types Inserting symbols You can also insert symbols that are not associated with fixtures This allows you to represent the fixtures when you draw a key or want to show the position of a boom in a plan view Symbols are not fixtures and therefore are not counted in reports Standard symbols such as the United States Institute for Theatre Technology USITT symbols are available from the library for your use WYSIWYG Reference Guide 217 CAD mode Release 19 0 To insert symbols Refer to The Library Browser on page 128 For information on inserting objects from the library see To insert objects from the library on page 129 Symbol properties Options on the Symbo tab affect the fill color and hatch style of a symbol Properties 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Symbol M
356. or Interval Select the spacing between points on the drawing grid Although the WYSIWYG drawing grid might not be visible it exists in the background The settings in this group box are important when using the snap to grid tool For more information on this tool refer to Snaps on page 109 Origin The point of origin For more information on the origin refer to Coordinate system and origin on page 104 Angle Select the angle of rotation for the drawing grid Although the WYSIWYG drawing grid might not be visible it exists in the background The settings in this group box are important when using the snap to grid tool For more information on this tool refer to Snaps on page 109 Visible Grid Select the On Off check box if you want to add a grid to your wireframe view in every view except isometric Then click the Grid Color box to choose the colour for the grid lines You can also choose the style of the grid by selecting the appropriate option button Standard creates a grid with evenly spaced closed Squares Open creates a grid with open squares Point creates a grid of dots The lines in the resulting grid are spaced at the interval specified in the nterva box If the interval is short you may have to zoom in on your plot to see the gridlines 97 98 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 Show Details tab Options on the Show Details tab affect the amount of information that is shown on your drawin
357. or accept the default value of 1 m Rectangular Click this option if you want the single surface or each element of a triplet surface to be rectangular and then type the width and height of each element Click Next Light Emitting Surface Wizard a 2 x Grid Layout Define Grid Layout Size and Spacing Define the shape and size of the light emitting grid Number of rows a Offset rows Number of columns Distance between rows Distance between columns 6 lt Back Cancel wysiwyg gt March 2007 10 11 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode Define the layout of the light emitting grid by typing the number of rows and columns of single or triplet surfaces and then specifying the space between them Tip You can use these values to make a uniform or non uniform grid of LED emitting surfaces For example if you set the number of rows to a high value and the number of columns to a low value you can create a long narrow light emitting surface that resembles a neon tube a Number of rows Type the number of rows in the grid a Number of columns Type the number of columns in the grid a Distance between rows Type the separation between the rows of the grid This value must be positive This distance is from the center to center of each of the surfaces both rectangular and circular This value is disabled if you have chosen to create only one row m Distance between columns Typ
358. or French curve Note You cannot change a line to a spline or French curve unless the selected line has more than two vertices m Shade Options select the Shade check box to have the selected line s displayed in shaded views and renderings and then type a value for the radius to set its thickness Text label tab Options on the 7ext Label tab affect the justification and style of the selected text labels 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Test Label Fixture Hang Structure Truss Text LX Italics Height 20 3 Align to View Horizontal Justification i Left Centre Right Vertical Justification Top Cente Bottom m Text Type new text to change the label E Height Type a value for the height to adjust the font size m Italics Select this check box to make the text appear in italics H Align to View Select this check box to set the text labels to be legible regardless of plot type m Horizontal J ustification Select the desired option button to set the text label s horizontal alignment The available horizontal alignment options are a Left Places the selected text label to the left of the insertion point m Center Horizontally centers the selected text label on the insertion point a Right Places the selected text label to the right of the insertion point m Vertical J ustification Select the desired check box to set the text label s vertical alignment The available vertica
359. or this look Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list Click on the shortcut for your new look From the drop down list in the Scenery window select the appropriate movement axis Click the slider to advance the object to the position where you want it to start on the selected axis Ensure that the Fade looks button is enabled so the look fades instead of jumping directly to the next look Tip If the button is not enabled then you can jump from one look to the next by clicking the look shortcuts in the shortcut bar Even if the button is enabled you can always jump to the next look by right clicking the look shortcut and selecting Jump to To watch the fade from the first look to the second look click the shortcut for the second look The object moves from the starting point of the first look to the starting point of the second look over the period of time that you specified as the fade time for the second look Tips nu For a more realistic view of the fading between looks click the Shaded tab m To jump directly to a specific look right click the look and then select Jump to For details on controlling the object s movement with a console device such as the Mini Console see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 353 2 3 Design mode b ab Rendering 2 4 Release 19 0 Introduction In WYSIWYG you can render lighting looks to produce
360. ore the mode and layout destination For example you can save a navigation shortcut to Data mode Patch layout The next time you want to go back to that location click the shortcut to save you at least one step View shortcuts store the plot type and zoom level View shortcuts only apply to wireframe views WYSIWYG Reference Guide 55 WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 Library shortcuts The second type of shortcut is used in place of browsing the library The library Shortcuts are E AS Fixtures Accessories Color Gobo Library fi Truss Views tools shortcuts The final type of shortcut is used to open and save views and tools The views tools Shortcuts are Columns Patch Errors Worksheets 4 Images Layouts New Plots Legend z Key I Report el Looks RR Concepts Palettes Render Working with shortcuts Generally the procedure for creating modifying and working with shortcuts is the same regardless of the type of shortcut To create a new shortcut 1 Right click in open space on the appropriate shortcut bar and then choose the appropriate New option Note For navigation type shortcuts ensure that the destination is set up and then proceed with step 1 2 Based on the type of shortcut you are prompted to select the object or type a name for the new shortcut 3 Click nsert or OK Result The shortcut is created and added to the bottom of the list on the shortcut bar that you select
361. ormation on these links and how they work refer to Links on page 309 Relationship between objects in Data mode and New Plots You cannot modify data such as fixture attributes directly in a New Plots view instead you must edit this data in Data mode Data that is modified in the spreadsheet view in Data mode is also updated in CAD mode and in all New Plots views Links There are three types of links in the New Plots view positional properties and attributes The position link tracks the movement of objects that are brought in from the original CAD drawing By default this link is in place until one of the objects from the original CAD drawing is moved relative to its origin The properties link tracks the changes to properties for objects that are brought in from the original CAD drawing These properties include the layer line color and line thickness of an object By default this link is in place until you modify one or more of these properties WYSIWYG Reference Guide 309 Presentation mode Release 19 0 The attribute link tracks the changes to the attribute layout of fixtures By default this link is in place until you move rotate or otherwise manipulate the layout of a fixture attribute For more information on attribute layout refer to Attribute layout on page 311 When a link to an object is broken all subsequent changes that are made to that object in CAD or Data mode will not be reflected in a New
362. ose the XY axis click the Xand Y buttons H To deselect any ortho buttons that you have chosen press F8 to reset the same ortho selection as that which was previously made press F8 again Snaps Snaps are used to assist in the drawing and placement of objects When a snap setting is active the cursor will be drawn to the applicable snap point You can have multiple snaps active at the same time Snap selections can be made on the CAD Options toolbar or from the Tools menu All snap tools function as follows If no command is currently active you can adjust the running snap tool This means that the snap type is always active If you are in mid command and you select a snap tool it becomes a one time only snap type After the next click the snap returns to the running snap At any time you can toggle all snaps on or off by pressing F9 or double clicking on the SNAP text in the status bar m 4i Grid snap Aligns the placement of objects to grid points You can set the grid interval and angle in the Draw Options page of the View Options window WYSIWYG Reference Guide 109 CAD mode 110 Release 19 0 E Point snap Aligns the placement of objects to a point in the drawing m a Midpoint snap Aligns the placement of objects to the mid point of another line m w Endpoint snap Aligns the placement of objects to the end point of another line Fixture insertion points are considered points It is therefore possible
363. ou can use the console device to control the progress of a live video stream or a video file by making the video play pause or rewind you cannot use WYSIWYG to change different aspects of the video itself To control the video source the DMX patch is given three channels For details on controlling the video with the console device in Live mode see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 352 Notes m Before you render your drawing you can either pause the video at the precise image you want to see in the final rendering or you can let the video run while the Render Wizard processes the information in your drawing In this case the Render Wizard captures the video frame that was showing when it processed the screen information m If the video control is patched and DMX connected in Live Mode then you will not be able to control the video using any of the Video Designer Tool commands in Design mode Video sources can only be controlled by a designer tool when the DMX source is disconnected therefore you must first disconnect the applicable console device from Live Mode before using any of the Video Designer Tool commands To draw a screen 1 From the Draw menu click Screen 2 In the appropriate boxes type the width and height of the screen or accept the default width of 8 feet and height of 6 feet 3 To configure the image that will appear on the screen click the appropriate option button a To l
364. ound Rendering Manager to create the actual rendering You can send multiple jobs to the Background Rendering Manager queue and then arrange the order of the queue or remove jobs from it While you can send multiple Jobs the Background Rendering Manager processes only one job at a time the job at the top of the gueue Once this job is finished it will then automatically proceed to the next queued job and so on If you manually move a Job in progress from the top of the gueue down you pause the rendering and start processing the next job in the queue However you do not lose the progress of any rendering jobs that have been started When they reach the top of the queue the Background Rendering Manager resumes rendering the image where it last left off The Background Rendering Manager processes render jobs independently without requiring WYSIWYG to run This feature lets you work on other tasks while the renderings in the queue are processed in the order you arranged You can work on new WYSIWYG files or you can close WYSIWYG altogether and perform other tasks You can even shut down your computer and restart later without losing the rendering progress When setting up renderings in the Render Wizard you can send jobs to the Background Rendering Manager that resides on the same computer or to another computer in your network that is also running the Background Rendering Manager and has a dongle attached By sending all rendering jobs to ano
365. our Perform system Note Fixtures on layers that are not visible or not included in the current scene are not counted Unused channels O O F 0 0 0 Unused Channels 76 ABS fe 55 6 68 v 2 S 13 16 2 0 0 For more information on the status bar refer to Status bar on page 66 Simulation options The Simulation options affect how fixtures respond in Live mode and how the beams are displayed in shaded views Turning options off will yield faster simulation performance while compromising aesthetics For optimal results increase the processing power of your computer To change the simulation options 1 From the Options menu choose User Options Result The User Options dialog box is displayed WYSIWYG Reference Guide 359 Live mode 360 2 Release 19 0 Click the Simulation tab User Options x User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Smoke Cone Resolution 10 None Edge Lines Show at 30 a StickBeams Details I Colours IM Gobos IM Center 4 Focus T Convex Gobos Continuous Wheels lw Footprint Complex Gobos Tw Spin Wheels Shaded Beams Iw Gobo Rotation D Beam Angle lw Lrossfades lw Effects W Bitmap Gobos Make your selections and then click OK to exit a The smoke level affects the density of the cones of light b The cone resolution affects the shape of the footprint The higher the number the more elliptical the footprint the lower the number the more square the
366. ow Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Learn 24 CAD DATA DESIGN wysiwyg o gt March 2007 The WYSIWYG suite of software products E PRES a LIVE Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 25 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 19 0 b WYSI WYG Network Introduction WYSIWYG Network allows you to run as many licenses of WYSIWYG Report Design and Perform as you want to over a network The workstations can be configured to run any combination of these products with the use of a single network dongle Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Report Design and or Perform 2D and 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Accurate simulation of conventional and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and
367. ox the beam is not visible when you select a fixture E Show truss cross members Click to clear this check box to hide truss cross members on your drawing to reduce the clutter or to increase the speed of the display Select this check box to see the cross members 7 Point Size Select the default size for all points You can view a sample of the chosen size in the box to the right Simulation tab Options on the Simulation tab are only set for WYSIWYG Design and Perform These settings determine how detailed simulation views are and can affect the speed of beam Simulation in simulation views wysiwyg March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document User Options m Iv mj mj m mj m For more information on simulation options refer to Visualization on page 359 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 99 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 WYSIWYG Viewer 100 The WYSIWYG Viewer is a separate application that allows non WYSIWYG users to view and print your WYSIWYG wyg files It is beneficial to those individuals who are interested in viewing or printing a WYSIWYG file but who do not own a licensed copy of WYSIWYG Any file with a wyg file extension can be viewed and printed from the WYSIWYG Viewer Since Presentation mode is the only mode available in the WYSIWYG Viewer ensure that all relevant information is available in this mode before opening your file in the WYSIWYG Viewer All functionality except navigation an
368. ox of the spreadsheet those focus positions will appear under the Focus Positions branch of the Flight Case Unhung fixtures assigned to those focus positions will appear under their respective Flight Case headings To learn more about inserting objects in Data mode please refer to Chapter 7 Data mode March 2007 CAD mode Entering and modifying objects in the Flight Case You can insert fixtures and focus positions directly into the Flight Case using the Library Draw menu or appropriate tools on the Draw toolbar You can change a fixture s assigned position by selecting the fixture in the Flight Case and dragging it to another position within the Flight Case You can change a fixture s assigned focus position by selecting the fixture and dragging it between Focus Positions within the Flight Case Transferring objects from the Flight Case to the drawing The items that appear in the Flight Case can be transferred to your drawing by clicking and dragging To hang fixtures from the Flight Case 1 Open the Flight Case Click and hold on the desired fixture Drag the fixture into the wireframe view and place it on a hang structure Note If a fixture appears in the flight case under a position branch that fixture must be hung on that position Fixtures with no position or unassigned fixtures may be hung on any hang structure Release the mouse button Repeat for the remaining fixtures Tip You can hang all the
369. pany who constructed the fixture 205 CAD mode 206 Release 19 0 m Notes Any notes that pertain to the fixture The notes usually pertain to the simulation capabilities in WYSIWYG Data tab Options on the Data tab are read only and are set when the fixture is added to the library This does not however include the A ras Weight Cost Manu and Prod fields To modify these fields access the desired fixture s properties from the Library Browser 3 5 x 8 Axial z E FF Manufacturer Generic Model 35x8Awal Alias OY weight 11 02 bs Use default Cost po o Catalog a Autofocus Manu 0 Prod 0 W Use sit URL pen Shortcut Hew Window Close Insert Multiple m Manufacturer The name of the manufacturer of the fixture m Model The model number of the fixture m Alias The alternate name for the fixture m Weight The weight of the fixture m Use default Select this check box to use the default weight m Cost The cost of renting or purchasing the fixture The cost of renting the fixture can be the price for a day week or month The default value is 0 00 Notes a f a costis assigned to a fixture type when a WYSIWYG document is open the cost is applied to the current document only a f a cost is applied to a fixture type when a document is not open the cost is used as the default for all documents created on your copy of WYSIWYG a When opening a document created by
370. pecify the dimmer for which you want to record a load or specify all non zero level dimmers Note Recording the load on a dimmer enables WYSILink to notify you when the dimmer s load has changed such as when a lamp fails 3 When finished click OK To check or clear a load 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Load Recording and then choose Check or Clear Result The Check Loads or Clear Loads dialog box is displayed Check Loads dialog box ELUd Dimmers to check Cancel Clear Loads dialog box Dimmers to clear i i Cancel 2 _ Type the number of the dimmers to check or clear You can specify a range of number using a dash for example 23 47 Use commas to separate the entries For all dimmers specify all White space and capitalization is ignored a If you are checking a load a query is performed for the specific dimmer or dimmers and a comparison between the recorded load and the actual load is conducted m f you are clearing a load the recorded load information is cleared for the selected dimmers Note For additional information on working with recorded loads please refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual aa wysiwyg V WYSIWYG Reference Guide Appendix A Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool The Sentinel SuperPro Monitoring Tool is automatically installed with WYSIWYG Using this tool you can view and track license distribution information for the dongles on your network
371. piece into faces 1 Select the 3D solid that you want to break for example a riser 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Set pieces into faces Result Each face of the solid becomes an independent surface To break a set piece into lines 1 Select the 3D solid that you want to break a riser for example 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Set pieces into lines Result Each segment of the solid becomes an independent line The 3D solid in no longer a solid Note Alternatively to perform a break command you can use the Break tool on the 7oo s toolbar amp 2 This is the same as choosing Specify from the Break sub menu To break using the Specify dialog 1 Select the object that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Specify Break x M Lines into lines Number of lines 4 W Break Line at vertices Wa Cicles inte lines MUTT Gt ates 4 Circes inta ares Stes tate lines Stes inte ares Set pieces ita lines Set pieces into faces lw Delete original objects Put new objects on current layer Cancel 3 Select the desired break type from the available options by selecting the appropriate check boxes Based on the object that you have selected to break these options vary 4 In the boxes at the top right corner specify the number of break lines or arcs if appropriate 5 Select the Delete original objects check box if you want the origi
372. point Notes m This button is enabled only if None is selected in the Camera drop down list You may need to click this button a few times to return the view point to its original setting To learn more about cameras refer to Drawing cameras on page 149 m You can also control the camera view point with the camera toolbar For details see Using the Camera toolbar on page 150 a Ambient Light Use the slider to increase or decrease the amount of ambient light level shown in the shaded view 7 Background Color Modifies the background color used in the shaded view This color Is visible when you zoom far enough away that you can see beyond the venue n Beam Simulation Quality Choose one of the following beam simulation qualities Wireframe An outline of the footprint is shown and the beam is drawn based on the outline Regular The true footprint is shown but objects are not illuminated Light Up Objects in the path of the beam are illuminated and a full footprint is shown WYSIWYG Reference Guide 75 WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 The figures below illustrate the different levels of beam quality Wireframe Regular Light Up m Display Target Select the check box to show the focus point of the selected camera in the shaded view Choose the color of the displayed target by clicking the Color box and then selecting the color from the resulting palette The target is visible in shaded views onl
373. ppropriate cell 2 Right click and choose Pick value from the list Result This action opens a dialog with a drop down menu listing all of the values currently used in your file for you to choose from 3 To make a new selection click Library to open the appropriate library Note This feature is only available in certain fields Tip This feature is especially useful for fields such as color gobo or other parameters that reference library items for which you do not know the exact value Find and replace tool The find and replace tools are used for locating and modifying data and are column specific The tools only search for data in the column where the tool was activated and not throughout the entire spreadsheet To use the find tool 1 Select a cell in the column in which you want to use the Find tool 2 From the Edit menu choose Find Tip You can also use the Find tool on the Data toolbar gi 3 Type your search criteria a Select the Match whole word only check box to search for data matching exactly what you have typed as opposed to data containing parts or all of what you have typed Select the Match case check box to enable a case sensitive search where uppercase and lowercase letters will affect the results 4 Click Find Next Result Cells that match your search criteria are highlighted with the first match active To use the replace tool 1 Select a cell in the column in which you want to use the Find and Repla
374. pted to select the fixtures from the WYSIWYG library 14 If you chose Select Basepoint with mouse in step 4 click to place the drawing Importing scenario You do not need to import everything in your file at once You can import items one by one or separately to ensure accuracy The following scenario may help you when importing DWG DXF files into WYSIWYG 1 After choosing to open a DWG DXF file switch to the Layers tab on the Select DWG Settings dialog box In this tab you can deselect the layers that you do not want imported in the first round For example you may only want to import the venue and all the layers related to it In the case of a 2D CAD drawing it is easier to extrude lines into walls and do everything else needed to complete the virtual venue It will also be quicker as WYSIWYG will have a lot less objects with which to work 2 Once you have completed working on the venue you may want to merge in the hang structures if they exist in the CAD file Using the Merge command from the File menu you can open the same CAD file once again and choose the appropriate layer s from the Layers tab When WYSIWYG asks you to pick the insertion point make sure you select Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint This will ensure that everything in the new layer is placed accurately in the WYSIWYG plot March 2007 CAD mode 3 Continue in the same manner with fixtures and the other objects Note that if in the CAD file the fixtures exist on differe
375. ptions 2 Click the Display tab 3 Adjust the Column Width Slider to the preferred size 4 Click OK Show Details tab Options on the Show Details tab define the information to be shown in the tooltips when tooltips are enabled WYSIWYG Reference Guide 253 Data mode View Options il Inverze Dis lay Show Details To Unit FM Channel Spot E Cocu WP Lamp PO Focus Ti Gobo creut FF Patch WD Postion IO Purpose I PansTiilt Lens TS Notes WU Spit E Dimmer Cancel Release 19 0 m Use User Details Select this check box to reference the settings in User Options under the Options menu Click to clear the check box and specify the tooltips that you want displayed 254 wysiwyg gt March 2007 b gt t Errors Introduction Data mode WYSIWYG sports an on the fly error checking engine This means that as you are putting your lighting design together WYSIWYG is continually checking for data errors such as multiple dimmers in one circuit multiple channels in one dimmer and various missing information At any time you can view the error reports that are available on the rrors shortcut bar Error reports that have errors displayed will have an exclamation mark after their name You can edit fix these errors on the spot editing data on the error reports works the same way as the data spreadsheets explained in the previous section As soon as you fix an error in an error spreadsheet the en
376. r 8 Select all the objects on the Press and hold CTRL and type A or use screen the Se ect Alltool on the Se ection toolbar HLL Select all the objects on one or From the Edit menu choose Select more layers Special and then choose Specify layers to select You can also use the Specify Layers tool on the Se ection toolbar E a To select multiple layers press and hold CTRL while selecting the layers Set beam display for selected w Set the Show beams for selected fixtures fixtures option For more information on this option refer to the Show Details tab on page 72 Undo Redo If you discover that you have made an error while editing an object you can easily reverse the error by using the Undo tool available in WYSIWYG The name of the Undo tool changes based on what the last action was for example if the last action was a Paste operation the Undo tool will be Undo Paste You can use Undo to reverse the last series of actions until the tool is greyed out If you decide that you did not want to undo an action use the Redo tool Similar to the Undo tool the name of the Redo tool changes based on what the last undo action was 152 wysiwyg amp March 2007 CAD mode To use the Undo tool From the Edit menu choose Undo Tip You may also use the Undo tool on the Edit toolbar 3 Result The last action you performed is reversed To use the Redo tool From the Edit menu choose Redo Tip You ma
377. r texture and material the transparency options vary as follows a Use Material Transparency All materials in WYSIWYG specify a level of transparency that varies from one material to the next For example glass is more transparent than brick The transparency level of the selected material appears beside this option button with 0 being completely opaque If you select Defau t the transparency level is set to 0 Opaque To customize the transparency level click the Use Custom Transparency option button and then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value m Use Custom Transparency Click this option button if you want to set a transparency level for the color or texture that you have chosen or if you want to override the default transparency level of the selected material Then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value Click Apply Click OK Applying a material to a Library item element You can apply different materials to each element of Library objects using the Appearance tab in the Properties dialog box To apply a material to a Library item element 1 2 3 Right click the library item to which you want to apply material and then choose Properties Click the Appearance tab Properties Me E General Appearance Light Emission Sidedness Elements Color Texture Legs Use Layer Rendering Color
378. r a jpeg 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the image that you want to export From the File menu choose Export Use the browser to select a destination and a name for the image file that you want to export Ensure that either bitmap bmp or jpeg jpg is selected in the Save As Type box Click Save 343 Presentation mode Release 19 0 y Worksheets I ntroduction The Worksheet tab contains a spreadsheet much like many other spreadsheet programs You can enter data and create mathematical functions here as well as import and export data to other spreadsheet programs This functionality is useful when you are creating spreadsheets for crew requirements schedules budgets or any other show specific data For more information on using variables in worksheets refer to Using variables in reports on page 301 To import data Right click on the Worksheets shortcut tab and then choose New Worksheet Type the name of your worksheet Click OK From the File menu choose Import Use the browser to find the file containing the data that you want to import Click Open o o A O N To export data 1 Select the worksheet that you want to export From the File menu choose Export Use the browser to select a destination and a name for the worksheet file that you want to export Ensure that the desired export file type is selected in the Save As Type box 4 Click Save 344 wysiwyg S March 2007 Pres
379. r in the list Click Delete Click OK Tips WYSIWYG Reference Guide a The Layer toolbar gives you quick access to all existing layers and the Layers database Click the tool on the left end of the Layer toolbar to access the Layer database Wii 173 CAD mode Release 19 0 a Use the layer list in the Layer toolbar to quickly set the current layer If objects are selected when you do this those objects are moved to the selected current layer Scenes Scenes are collections of layers used to organize the plot A scene may contain one or more layers Hiding a scene hides all the layers assigned to that scene By organizing the layers and scenes in your plot you can quickly perform set changes By default WYSIWYG creates two initial scenes Current Layer Only and All Layers You cannot delete these scenes To create a new scene 1 From the Edit menu choose Scenes Result The Scene Database dialog box Is displayed Scene Database Current Layer Only Clone Rename Delete Curent Scene A Layers Set Current Layers Out Layers In LLES BR B Cancel i Click New to create a new scene Type the name of the new scene and then click OK Result The layers associated with the scene are displayed in the Layers Out and Layers In boxes 4 Select the layers that you want to include in the scene and then use the arrow buttons to move the layers accordingly The layers that are available in a sc
380. rch 2007 Presentation mode 3 Select the direction in which you want to rotate the hang structure In the Rotation Angle box type the angle by which you want to rotate the hang structure 5 Click OK Result The hang structure is rotated on the plot As an example you may have three booms on your plot that you want to rotate After you rotate the hang structures 90 degrees to the right the following is displayed a ee Attribute layout You can easily modify the layout of fixture attributes in a New Plots view by simply moving rotating or otherwise manipulating the appearance of the attribute In a New Plots view you can only manipulate the layout you cannot modify the data contained within the attribute To modify the data you will need to go to CAD or Data mode and make the modifications Fixture attribute values that are changed in CAD or Data mode are reflected in all New Plots views WYSIWYG Reference Guide 311 Presentation mode 312 Release 19 0 The attributes that are displayed in a New Plots view are determined by the options you set on the Fixture Details tab For more information refer to Fixture Details tab on page 308 To manipulate the attribute layout for an individual symbol 1 Select the attribute whose layout you want to manipulate 2 Drag the attribute to the desired location on the page and then release the mouse button Note This action breaks the attribute link As an e
381. red m Pending messages are generated at the time of the error m Cleared messages are generated when an error has been corrected Pending and Cleared messages are paired so that when an error state has been corrected the appropriate Pending message is cancelled You have the option of viewing all Pending and Cleared messages or only Pending messages for error states that have not been corrected Note WYSI Link defaults to displaying only Pending Messages To change this setting refer to Message Log options on page 372 E unen wpap i perform Ple WYSTLInk Options Hel TEW oh e Message Log Special circumstances arise when errors are generated when WYSILink is offline If an error is generated and corrected while WYSILink is offline these messages will not appear in the Message Log If an error has been generated when WYSI Link Is offline and the message is not cleared the Pending message will appear in the Message Log when WYSI Link comes online WYSIWYG Reference Guide 371 WYSILink Link mode Release 19 0 Errors are indicated not only in the Message Log but also in the Wireframe and Data views Fixtures assigned to dimmers that have an error are highlighted in red in the spreadsheet and by a red symbol in Wireframe views Message Log options Message log options affect how messages are processed and received To access message log options 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Message Log Opti
382. removed from all concepts that include that fixture 4 When you replace a fixture using the Replace Fixtures menu option any concepts referring to that fixture are updated to refer to the fixture replacement 5 Any fixture added to a document will not initially be part of any concept WYSIWYG Reference Guide 269 Design mode Palettes 2 0 Release 19 0 Introduction You can create palettes of color to facilitate color selection A palette is a reference to a specific color and can be used on all color changing fixtures and scrollers Creating palettes Creating a Palette shortcut is helpful if you want to save your favourite CMY color mixes for later use Note You can create palettes in Design mode only To create a palette 1 Select the fixture from which you want to capture the color Note You can create a palette from only one fixture Right click on the Pa ette shortcut bar and then choose New Palette Type the name of the palette and then click OK Result The CMY value is saved as a palette in the Palette shortcut bar This value can be a CMY mix a color from the color wheel or scroll or a combination of color sources Updating palettes You can modify a Palette shortcut by modifying or replacing colors as required To update a palette 1 Select the fixtures from which you would like to record the palette 2 Right click on the Pa ette shortcut that you want to modify and then choose Update Result The
383. ress ENTER 2 0 3 To move an object using distance and direction 1 Select the objects to be moved 2 From the Edit menu choose Move Tip You may also use the Move tool on the oo s toolbar e 3 Type the distance that you want to move the object the lt sign and the direction as an angle positive or negative to move the object and then press ENTER For example to move an object 3 6 to the left type the following and then press ENTER 3 6 lt 180 Rotating You can rotate objects around a base point to place them on angles in your drawing wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode To rotate an object 1 Select the object s to be rotated 2 From the Edit menu choose Rotate Tip You may also use the Rotate tool on the 7oo s toolbar at 3 Click to set the center point for the rotation or type in the coordinates of the center point and then press ENTER 4 Type the rotation angle and then press ENTER or drag the mouse and click to type the rotation angle For example to rotate an object 45 degrees type 45 and then press ENTER Mirroring The Mirror command duplicates and reverses an object inserting it the same distance from an axis line as the original object To insert a mirrored object 1 Select the object s to be mirrored 2 From the Edit menu choose Mirror Tip You may also use the Mirror tool on the 7oo s toolbar ad 3 Click on the drawing to enter the first axis point Click on
384. ription Thiz component contains all nf the program executables j Document Files Library Files Sample Files Protocol Drivers MIDI Drivers hae o Texture Files 0 00 MB of space required on the C dive 399 76 MB nf space available on the C drive InstallShield lt Back Next gt Cancel Click to place a check mark beside Texture Files and then click Next Result The program installs the textures When the Maintenance Complete window appears click Finish Start WYSIWYG wait for the library to be updated with the new texture files and then apply textures to objects For details see To apply a texture to a surface on page 163 To install the Texture Pack from the Web If you installed WYSIWYG by downloading the installation file from the WYSIWYG web site the texture files are not included in the installation In this case you must download and install the Texture Pack separately as detailed below 1 2 If WYSIWYG is running close the program Navigate to the WYSIWYG web site www wysiwygsuite com 167 CAD mode 168 Release 19 0 In the Download section of the site locate and click the Texture Library link for the current Release of the program At the prompt click Save and save the install file on your desktop Once the download is complete double click the file to install the textures When the installation is complete start WYSIWYG wait for the library to synchronize w
385. rt Ist file that is created in the Library folder usually C Program Files WYSIWYG Library once the first fixture Is set to be remembered for future imports Note WYSIWYG creates a pipe for every imported fixture since fixtures in WYSIWYG need to hang on a hang structure If however fixtures are on a straight pipe represented by a straight line in the CAD file WYSIWYG will convert the entire line into a pipe After you have made your selection click OK If you decided to substitute fixtures for blocks in step 9 you are prompted to select the fixtures from the WYSIWYG library Merging a DWG DXF document To merge a DWG DXF document This procedure inserts the imported DWG DXF file into an existing WYSIWYG document in the location of your choice wysiwyg gt gt CAD mode March 2007 5 6 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the File menu choose Merge From the Files of type drop down list select the DWG or DXF type Files of this type appear in the browser window Click the file name in the browser and then click Open Result The Merge dialog box opens Herge x Basepoint Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint Select Basepoint with mouse Cancel Choose the basepoint Result The Select DWG Settings dialog box is displayed Select DXF DWG Settings For Import a 2 x Scale Layer OMG DF iz in Meters Millimeters Gee ee ewyn Ii DxFUmtTe fl fet y Select the unit type used in t
386. russ to select multiple fixtures press Ctrl and then click on each one 2 From the Tools menu click Distribute gt In a direction Click to set the starting point on the pipe truss from which you want to distribute the selected fixtures 4 Click on one side of the point either to the left or right of it to choose the direction in which the fixtures will be distributed Result The Distribute In a direction window appears 5 Type the desired distance between each fixture and then press OK Note The value that you type must allow the selected number of fixtures to be evenly distributed over the remaining length of the pipe truss Result The selected lights are evenly spaced between the two points To distribute fixtures around a central point In this procedure you choose a point on the pipe truss and then distribute selected fixtures along the pipe truss using this point as the center You specify the spacing of the fixtures 1 Click to select the fixtures that you want to distribute on the pipe truss to select multiple fixtures press Ctrl and then click on each one From the Tools menu click Distribute gt Center Click on the pipe truss to set the point around which the selected fixtures will be centered Result The Distribute Center window appears 4 Type the desired distance between each fixture and then press OK Note The value that you type must allow the selected number of fixtures to be evenly distri
387. s 330 If you chose fixed or variable scaling on the CAD Printing tab or if you inserted a New Plots item you can further set up how the item will appear within the placeholder by modifying the open contents wysiwyg gt March 2007 Presentation mode To adjust the contents 1 With the item selected from the Edit menu choose Open Contents Tip You can also click the Open Contents tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar ra Result A new window opens displaying your drawing and the item placeholder PlotObject Al x 2 Adjust the positioning of the placeholder as desired 3 Close the window New Plot items New Plot items are inserted into your layout using the options specified when you created the item You might want to modify these options if you wish to display or print the New Plot item in black and white for example To modify content properties of New Plot items 1 Select the New Plot item on the layout 2 From the Edit menu choose Content Properties Tip You can also click the Content Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar Es Result The View Options dialog box is displayed For an explanation of the options that are available refer to Modifying the properties of a plot on page 305 Note Any options that you modify here are also updated in the New Plots view that you inserted Image items Special considerations should be given to printing images on layouts To maintain the integrity of
388. s CAD mode operates like many other CAD programs so many of the concepts will be familiar to those who have used a computer aided drafting program before WYSIWYG adds features that are specific to the entertainment industry such as a comprehensive 3D library containing truss lighting eguipment and accessories as well as props musical instruments and various human figures In WYSIWYG Report you are limited to 2D views of your plot In Design and Perform 3D isometric and shaded views are available WYSIWYG Reference Guide 51 52 WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 Data mode As you draw in CAD mode all of your show information is compiled into spreadsheets that you can access in Data mode In this mode you can view and edit the data for all your fixtures Data mode operates like many other spreadsheet programs so many of the concepts will be familiar to those who have used a spreadsheet program The CAD and Data modes remain completely interactive and any information modified in either mode is updated in the other Design mode Design mode was created to provide lighting designers with an avenue for experimentation Design mode can be used as a troubleshooting tool or as a creative tool to help you come up with cue concepts In Design mode you can create static lighting looks using the design tools and then save and render those looks to output photo realistic pictures You can turn on and control fixtures without having to patch
389. s You connect the Motion Control Console and motion control systems in much the same way as you connect consoles For details see To connect to a console on page 350 3 To change the settings of a patched movement axis highlight the axis in the left pane and then choose from the following settings ID box To change the ID of the movement axis type the new motion control ID m Travel box Type the distance in meters for linear axes in degrees for rotational axes that you want the object to travel along or around the axis This can be the full length angle of the axis or only a portion of it if you do not want the object to travel along around the full path For linear axes If you type wysiwyg gt March 2007 Live mode a value that is longer than the actual axis the object stops at the end of the physical axis mu Type If you change the axis type so that it does not match the axis that you have drawn for example if the actual axis is linear but you choose rotational here the cell in patch view turns to red m n the Mode area select the type of movement for the object mu Static Select this option if you want to specify the precise location of a static object on the movement axis You can then use the position slider at the bottom of the window to adjust the position and control the movement of the object manually Bounce Select this option if you want the object to move forward and backward in a co
390. s here affect the outline and fill color of the placeholder CAD items You can modify or edit CAD items to meet printing requirements Their content properties are detailed below To modify content properties of CAD items 1 2 3 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the CAD item right click and then choose Content Properties or click the appropriate tool on the Layout Edit toolbar Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options x General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View type Showy Details Mame Follow User Scene Scene All Layers Modify options as desired When finished click OK 327 Presentation mode 328 General tab Release 19 0 Options on the Genera tab affect the scene that is displayed in the CAD item Only fixtures and objects on the active layers are displayed in the layout m Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the scene that is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Click to clear the check box and then select the desired scene from the Scene drop down list For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 174 CAD Rotation tab Options on the CAD Rotation tab affect the angle at which the CAD item is printed View Options General DAD Rotation CAD Printing View type Show Details Angle E degrees m Angle Type an angle value in degrees if you want the drawing in the CAD item to be printe
391. s option to configure the program with the default working directory and network port settings nu Advanced Click this option to specify the working directory and network port settings for the program 4 Click Next If you chose 7ypical in the previous step proceed directly to step 9 If you chose Advanced the following window appears Background Rendering Manager Configuration Wizard TH E X Specify Working Directory 4ll render jobs that are sent to the Background Rendering Manager are stored in one working directory For your convenience Specify the working directory that will be used to store all render job Files It is recommended that you choose an empty Folder C Documents and Settings Joe 4pplication Data CAST Lighting Browse lt Back Cancel 5 The working directory is used to store files that the render engine requires to generate renderings To change the default working directory shown for example If you have run out of space on the default drive type the path and new folder name in the box provided or click Browse to locate the folder It is recommended that the folder be new and empty ln 286 wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode 6 Click Next Background Rendering Manager Configuration Wizard E id X Specify Network Port The Background Rendering Manager can communicate with WYSIWYG when it is installed on this computer and on any other computers on your network However this confi
392. s placed at the midpoint of the line Notes a This procedure can be repeated for vertices within a line The marker points will always be placed at the mid point of the vertices a Marker points can be dragged out to re shape the line m If the line is deleted the marker points are also deleted a Alternatively to perform a divide command you can use the Divide tool on the Tools toolbar f This is the same as choosing Specify from the Divide sub menu To divide using the Specify dialog 1 Select the object you want to divide 2 From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Specify Divide x Lines into points Number of divide points a for number of segments 1 Circles inte patits Grcles inta lines fio Ares into pointe pod Aes intolines Cinders tate lines elinders inte cicles Delete original objects lw Put new objects on current layer Cancel 3 Select the desired divide type from the available options by selecting the appropriate check boxes 4 Select the Delete original objects check box if you want the original object to be deleted when the new ones are created 5 Select the Put new objects on current layer check box if you want the new objects to be placed on the current layer as opposed to the selected object s original layer if different 6 Click OK Extrude The Extrude command allows you to turn a 2D object like a line or an arc into a surface or turn a surface into
393. s that are created by sunlight The softer the Shadow the less sharp the resulting shadow PREVIEW When you click Next in Step 6 the Render Wizard calculates a small preview of the rendering and shows it in the right hand view It will always zoom to fit the full size of the rendered view first but you can click in the view and zoom in and out using the PAGE UP PAGE DOWN keys Use the preview to fix any glaring errors in your rendering before you continue on to the final rendering WYSIWYG Reference Guide 291 Design mode Release 19 0 Step 7 Make Final Picture Adjustments M Picture Adjustments Saturation is comparable to the exposure on a camera it determines Saturation which pixels are represented as pure white Adjust the amount of light using the Brightness slider Brightness adjusts all pixels equally Brightness lt Back Add Shortcut Finish ZOOM OFF 405 100 x 75 y7 Options in Step 7 affect the quality of your final image a Saturation This is comparable to the exposure on a camera it determines which pixels are represented as pure white b Brightness This slider adjusts all pixels equally Step 8 Use Anti Aliasing to Smooth or Sharpen Rough Edges Re ih OXI r Antialiasing Options The Fast method works C None quickly but does not Fast produce the highest quality Click Finish to start the final rendering process Depending on the
394. s tool on the Draw toolbar to place truss ER Navigate through the library to find the type of truss you want to use Double click on the truss name Result A piece of truss attaches to the cursor Click on the drawing to place the first piece of truss Continue placing pieces of truss as needed Note To change the truss type return to the library double click on the name of the new desired truss type and continue placing truss pieces as normal Tip You can also use Truss shortcuts 6 Right click and choose Finish Placing Truss 7 Right click on the truss that you have just inserted and then click Properties 8 Click the Hang Structure tab 9 From the Name drop down list select the name for this new truss If the name is not already in the list use the Position Manager to enter the new name 10 Click OK To insert a shortcut for truss objects Refer to To create a new shortcut on page 56 Using Assembly snap with truss Assembly snap assembles truss pieces together as you insert them ensuring proper structural assembly This is especially useful for long or complex structures made up of many individual pieces of truss As with all snap functions discussed in Snaps on page 109 you can select Assembly Snap in mid command or as a running snap type To select Assembly snap as a running snap type Enable Assembly snap before inserting truss to assemble and group all subseguently inserted pieces of truss T
395. s using the design tools For more information refer to Using the Design tools on page 263 To use the Autofocus menu commands Right click on a selected fixture or fixtures to open a menu with the following Autofocus commands WYSIWYG Reference Guide At Level and Focus Sets the intensity of the selected lights on the connected Autofocus compatible console to the level last specified by the Intensity command and then launches the Focus command Focus When you click in a Wireframe view the selected automated fixtures will focus if they can to that point Click and drag to position them in real time Change the missing focus coordinate to alter the height at which you want to focus the fixtures Intensity Reveals a sub menu where you can specify the level to set the intensity for the selected fixtures The first option in the list is the last level you specified and by default is set to Full You can also set the level to half and out Iris Sets the iris to either tight or wide There is also a Specify option where you can set the iris to any percentage The Specify value is retained for the session Color Fixtures that can mix color can be directed to either a palette color or an approximation of a manufacturer s gel color You can specify and save palette colors using the custom color creator or Palette shortcuts You can repeat Autofocus commands by touching the Space bar This way you can select one fixture adjust it sele
396. se the Move Job Up button to move it back into the active queue instead you must use the Queue button to place the job back into the queue The job will be processed when it reaches the top of the queue 1 In the Background Rendering Manager window highlight the Stopped job that you want to move back into the queue 2 Press the Queue button amp Result The job moves to the active gueue To move render jobs up or down in the gueue When you have multiple jobs that are either Oueued or Stopped you can move jobs up or down within their current status level For example you can use this feature to arrange the order in which the Background Rendering Manager will process gueued jobs or you can move a queued job to the top of the queue so that it is processed immediately ln wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode In the Background Rendering Manager window highlight the Oueued or Stopped job that you want to move Press the Move Job Up or Move Job Down button repeatedly until the desired position is reached in the queue y To export rendered images from the Background Rendering Manager To use the rendered images that you create with the Background Rendering Manager you must export them to a folder of your choice in a graphic format like bmp jpg or olf 1 Oo fF o N In the Background Rendering Manager window highlight the Completed job that you want to export Click the Save Rendering button ie Browse t
397. ser interface Release 19 0 To modify a shaded view 1 From the Options menu choose View Options Result The View Options window is displayed View Options E E General Options w Folow User Scene Scene Lighting Tip You can also use the View Options tool E on the Standard toolbar to open the view options Modify options as desired Click OK General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the scene that is displayed in the shaded view m Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the scene that is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Click to clear the check box and then select the desired scene from the Scene drop down list To learn more about scenes refer to Scenes on page 174 Tip You can also change the current scene at any time by using the Scene toolbar 74 wysiwyg 2 March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface Options tab Options on the Options tab affect the view point beam quality and ambient light levels View Options x General Options Set to Default Ambient Light Background Colour Oe 1002 Beam Simulation Quality Wire Frame Regular Light Up Target lw Display Target Colour _ Camera lw Pan tool moves objects lw Fast Background Rendering m Camera Select a camera to change the point of view Click Set to Default to remove any previous association with a camera and to display the original view
398. someone other than yourself the cost entered in that person s document is used a The cost entered in this tab is displayed in WYSIWYG reports For more information on the display of this data refer to page 241 m Catalog The code that is used by the manufacturer to identify the fixture m Manu The manufacturer s code for those fixtures that are Autofocus compatible Conventional fixtures do not have a manufacturer s code The default value is O u Prod The product code for those fixtures that are Autofocus compatible Conventional fixtures do not have a product code The default value is O m Use default Select this check box to indicate that the default settings for Prod and Manu 0 0 are to be used m URL The internet address of the manufacturer m Open If an internet address is shown click this button to open the Web page of the manufacturer wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Options tab The boxes on this tab indicate various options about the selected fixture such as the number of channels and the available channels Based on the fixture selected the options shown on this tab vary For example if you choose a light like the Vari Lite VL5 the options on the left side of the window affect those on the right side In this case based on the options that you select on the left side the hookup for this fixture may differ EE Mode 4 Circuits Control Dimmer Estemal Number of Channels IE
399. splay the edit bar at the top of the spreadsheet The Filter section has the same functionality as the data filters discussed in Data filters on page 244 Select the Group By check box to divide the spreadsheet into sections pages one section page for each value in the Key 1 field 245 Data mode Release 19 0 Creating a new spreadsheet To create a new sheet In the shortcut bar click the Co umns tab Right click in the shortcut bar and choose New Spreadsheet Type a name for the new spreadsheet and then click OK A Oo N a Scroll to the bottom of the list of Column shortcuts Your new spreadsheet name should be at the bottom of the list Click on the shortcut to view your spreadsheet Note It may be easier to clone an existing spreadsheet and modify it than to start a new one from scratch See To clone a shortcut on page 57 for more details 246 wysiwyg e March 2007 Data mode amp Patch Introduction The Patch view is a graphical representation of the patch field It is used for two purposes m to create and or edit a patch for the lights video or moving scenery in your drawing u to monitor incoming DMX levels when using WYSIWYG Perform for simulation ce Theatre Dance plot wysiwyg File Edit Library Options Help Dah Ra Bw P Bt BAK oe He nO M2 o Views now BY x er r e al ajo immer A aA letsgenta Colour Whe Diffusion Strobe Beam Ready P
400. ssive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation wysiwyg March 2007 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Modes The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Perform BI CAD i DATA Bi DESIGN a PRES a LIVE Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 21 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 19 0 b WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition 22 Introduction WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition is a version of WYSIWYG Perform intended for distribution with a specific console or family of consoles Users purchasing a compatible console will receive this edition of WYSIWYG Perform to create shows and begin pre cueing activities The Console Edition of WYSIWYG Perform includes most of the functionality of Perform with certain features restricted or removed Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Perform other than printing or exporting in any format 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Live mode is restricted to visualizing one patch universe at a time
401. st Code GREY SEBCOM Registration Validation Code Example GEGHS6y N MF Cancel Follow the instructions in the dialog Type your validation code and then click Register A successful registration completes the registration and activation process If you selected have my validation code in step 2 the nsert Registration Code dialog box appears Please enter your code HGSCGESPF Type your validation code and then click OK A successful registration completes the registration and activation process 43 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 19 0 y o t Upgrades I ntroduction An upgrade code enables you to run the advanced features of a higher level product either Design or Perform using the same dongle that you already own Contact your local WYSIWYG dealer to purchase an upgrade You will be given an upgrade code at the time of purchase To upgrade the level of your WYSIWYG product 1 Start WYSIWYG 2 From the Help menu choose Upgrade Upgrade x How to Upgrade your WYSIWYG software lf ynu have already purchased an upgrade and have an Upgrade Code enter the code in the Upgrade Code field below Werlfy that you have entered the correct information Click an the Upgrade button You will need to exit WYSIWYG and restart the software for the upgrade to become Current Level TEME Perform 500 Serial Code BWEFST 3F Upgrade Code Es
402. sword protect your dongle select the No password check box 47 Installation configuration activation and registration 48 Release 19 0 wysiwyg gt gt Chapter 4 WYSIWYG user interface All of the WYSIWYG levels use the same set of screens The user interface was designed to facilitate smooth transitions from mode to mode and to keep the data organized and easy to find In this chapter Navigation and screen set up 51 Shortcut bars 55 Toolbars 59 Status bar 66 Wireframe views 68 Shaded views 73 WYSIWYG Reference Guide WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 a wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface 2 Navigation and screen set up Welcome window When you start WYSIWYG the We come window appears The application level is shown in the upper right corner of the window File Options Help From the File menu you can choose to open an existing file or create a new file A list of template files are shown on the left and a list of recently saved files are shown on the right Click a file name to start working with WYSIWYG Modes The mode buttons located along the top of the user interface are used to access the different working modes available within the WYSIWYG levels Click the appropriate mode button to change modes CAD mode CAD mode is where you create your show drawings This includes drawing your venue set pieces lighting positions focus positions and lighting fixture
403. t For more information on displaying the target refer to Modifying shaded views on page 73 or see Using the Camera toolbar on page 150 Using the Camera toolbar After you have drawn a camera you can use the Camera toolbar in Shaded views to view your drawing through the camera of your choice You can also use this toolbar to guickly access the camera properties page and change properties such as the camera name and field angle To use the Camera toolbar 1 In CAD Design or Live mode click the Ouad or Shaded tab 2 Right click in the toolbar area and select Camera Result The Camera toolbar appears Click to reset Select the the camera Camera from when you this list choose None Mone Click the Properties button to change the camera properties 3 From the drop down list select the camera through which you want to view your drawing Note To switch back to the default view click None and then click the far right button to reset the view To change the camera properties select the camera from the drop down list and then click the properties button Drawing a compass You can add a compass to a drawing to define the direction that is north This definition is important to set the position of the sun and or moon for renderings that use environmental options Note There can be only one compass in a file we wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode To draw a compass 1 From the Tools menu
404. t The Grid Array window appears 2 xX Horizontal Humber of Columns 3 Spacing Ea Fill Direction f To the right To the left Vertical Humber of ows 3 Spacing f 317 16 Fill Direction f To the bottom To the top Cancel 3 Type the number of columns in the grid Note This value includes the original object s as the first column of the grid For example if you type 3 the object is copied and pasted twice beside the original object in the direction and at the distance that you specify Type the distance between each horizontal object in the grid Select the direction in which you want the object s to be arrayed horizontally in the grid either to the right or left of the original object 6 Type the number of rows in the grid Note This value includes the original object s as the first row of the grid For example if you type 3 the object is copied and pasted twice above or below the original object at the distance that you specify 7 _ Type the distance between each vertical object in the grid wen wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode 8 Select the direction in which you want the object s to be arrayed in the grid vertically either above or below the original object 9 Click OK Distance The distance tool enables you to measure the distance and angle from one point to another To measure a distance 1 From the Tools menu choose Distance Tip You can also use
405. t X 0 Fixtures on the Balcony Rail will then report where they are relative to the theatre rather than the beginning of the pipe This offset methodology can be extended to box booms as well For example a boom in the first box which is 10 above the deck can be drawn as a vertical pipe and have its offset to be based about Z 10 A fixture s offset will then tell you how high from the bottom of the box to hang it In WYSIWYG set the offset mode that you want to use The choices are a Normal which indicates that the offset is based on the pipe mode a X Y and Z which calculates the offset based on the specified coordinate If you have selected an X Y or Z offset type then you must specify a coordinate on the axis from which offset values will be calculated m Length Type new text to change the length of the selected pipe m Trim Height Type new text to change the trim height If the pipe is vertical this value determines the lowest Z value of the pipe ad wysiwyg gt March 2007 CAD mode Hanging truss Truss is a hang structure with multiple hanging members Truss differs from pipes in that it is built from library objects instead of being drawn WYSIWYG contains an extensive library of different truss types from many different manufacturers The truss library also contains floor mounts booms and ladders To hang truss 1 Open the Library Browser and then click the 7russ tool Tip You can also click the 7rus
406. t a time When you merge documents it enables you to add the contents of the DWG or DXF file to the contents of the current document 3D solids contained within an AutoCAD file are automatically placed inside blocks by AutoCAD When you import any file that contains a block WYSIWYG will automatically explode the blocks in the DXF or DWG files for you if you decide to do this before opening them in WYSIWYG AutoCAD files saved as Release 13 or higher generally yield the best results Entities that can be imported The DWG DXF entities that can be imported are detailed in the following table The resulting WYSIWYG objects are also shown DWG DXF entity Circle Point Arc Line 2D Polyline 3D Polyline Mline Spline Text MText Polyface Mesh PFACE Polygon Mesh 3D Surfaces Face 3D Face Aligned dimension WYSIWYG Reference Guide WYSI WYG object Circle Point Arc Line Line Line Line Spline Text Text Set piece Set piece Surface Dimension 117 CAD mode Release 19 0 118 Entities that can be imported as a library item Circle Arc Line 2D Polyline 3D Polyline Polyline Mline Polyface Mesh PFACE Polygon Mesh 3D Surfaces Face 3D Face Limitations Multilines becomes single lines Multiline text becomes single line text Segments that are not straight for example arcs become straight line segments A spline must contain fit data for it to be imported Stretched sc
407. t angle for the selected fixture m Quick Channel enters a channel number in the Channel box m Quick Patch enters a patch universe assignment in the Patch box u Ouick Dimmer enters a dimmer number in the Dimmer box m Quick Circuit enters a circuit name and number in the Circuit Name and Num boxes m Quick Color enters a gel color number for the selected fixtures m Quick Gobo enters a gobo number for the selected fixtures m Other enters an accessory type for the selected fixtures Notes 1 When typing values type the exact value or use the browse button to open a selection dialog 2 The entry in the patch box must fulfill the requirements of patch notation which is universe For more information regarding patch notation refer to Reading the patch on page 251 For more information about the data fields refer to Data fields on page 240 When using the quick tools to insert a color or gobo WYSIWYG automatically inserts a default color frame or gobo holder which is already defined in the fixture Remove the default frame and add a new one using Add Accessory For information on adding accessories refer to To insert an accessory on page 219 5 When you are applying a color to a multi source fixture a dialog appears listing the circuit names to which you can apply the Quick Tool color selection To apply the same color to multiple circuits listed in this dialog press CTRL and then select the desired circui
408. t refer to Information layout on page 216 a wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode Point of view tab Options on the Point of View sub tab affect the orientation of the fixture Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to pan and tilt the light This sub tab is not available if a fixture is articulable that is if any accessories in the fixture tree have a moving head or moving mirror modifier Properties E 21 x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture Ex 6 Axial General Point of View Patch Shutters Gwe ab m Pan Type a value for the pan and view the result in the window to the left m Tilt Type a tilt value and view the result in the window to the left Patch tab Options on the Patch sub tab affect the circuit channels and patch universe for the selected fixture Properties es E x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture ee E x E Axial General Point of view Patch Shutters Control Circuit Channel jo Mang Dimmer Mei be Patch w Use DM address Universe las Gwe aeb m Control Circuit and Patch Refer to Data fields on page 240 for a description of these boxes WYSIWYG Reference Guide 211 CAD mode Release 19 0 m Use EDMX address Select this check box to use the EDMX address for the patch universe This check box is enabled if you select EDMX from the Universe drop down list EDMX is an Ethernet protocol developed by ETC
409. t rotates around the center point 147 CAD mode 148 Release 19 0 1 In Wireframe view select the view in which you want to draw the axis plan front back side or isometric Click Draw gt Axis gt Rotation Axis In the window that appears type a name for the axis and then click OK In your drawing click in the position where you want the axis to appear Note The circle that appears when you draw a rotation axis is only a visual cue to show you the direction in which the object rotates it does not affect the size of path on which the object rotates The circle is given a default size but you can change it to suit your needs To attach a movement axis to a DMX patch universe To move the object with a DMX control you first have to attach the movement axis to a named DMX patch universe that you have created in Data mode Note For information on creating a patch universe see To create a new patch universe on page 247 Click to select the axis that you want to attach to the patch universe Right click and select Properties Click the Axis tab Click the DMX Patch option button From the Un verse drop down box select the DMX patch universe to which you want to attach the axis o mB Oo N In the Address box type the starting DMX address 7 Click OK To attach a movement axis to a motion patch universe To move the object with a motion control system you first have to attach the movement axis to a name
410. t this check box to enable facet splitting in shaded views Facet splitting splits objects in a plot into small triangles for a smooth beam fallout during simulation in a shaded view m Facet Resolution Type the size of the triangles The more triangles you have the more realistic the cosine distribution will be However this also decreases the simulation speed Note that this is applicable to Direct 3D only m Segments Type the number of segments into which you want to break a cylinder or sphere Report tab Options on the Report tab affect the default values for empty or non applicable cells in spreadsheets WYSIWYG Reference Guide 93 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 Show Options x Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Field Empty MAR Unit H Spot H Position H Purpose H Colour pw H ba H Gwo Af d Circuit H NA z Patch H Pa E Channel H Pa k las Af a A Cancel Data Error tab Options on the Data Error tab control what types of data errors trigger notification boxes and status bar notifications Show Options x Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Error Status Motification Trigger Reflect in Notification Status Bar Dialog Indicator Dimmers gt Circuit Fatches gt Circuit Channels gt Circuit Fatches gt Dimmer Channels
411. t type of the active view WYSIWYG Reference Guide 71 72 WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 View Options x General Draw Options View type Show Details okeane fe Fler C Side 2 Front W Scrollbars On Right Front Back sometric m View Type The view types available are as discussed in Plot types on page 108 Tip The view type can be toggled using the tools on the CAD Options toolbar m Scrollbars On Select this check box to display the scrollbars on the bottom and left side edges of the wireframe view Click to clear this check box to turn the scrollbars off Show Details tab Options on the Show Details tab affect what and how fixture truss text and point information is displayed This tab is similar in function to the Show Details tab available in User Options For more information on the Show Details tab refer to Show Details tab on page 98 Yiew Options p E General Draw Options View Type Show Details Fixture data shown on plot fw Unit W Channel W Spot I Color MW Lamp w Focus Gobo Circuit Patch Position Purpose Lens Notes Dimmer Intensity lw Show Test Labels Point Size fV Enable Tooltips 19 M Draw Symbols W Show beams for selected fixtures 7 Show truss croass members Fixture tooltips lw Unit lw Channel Tw Spot D Color l Lamp Focus Gobo Circuit Patch Position
412. tation mode 2 From the Design menu choose Render Tip You can also click the Render Wizard tool in the Design toolbar Note For more information see Rendering on page 274 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 235 CAD mode Release 19 0 Es wysiwyg Chapter 7 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Data mode familiar to those who have used a spreadsheet program In this chapter Layout tabs Spreadsheets Patch Errors 239 240 247 259 Data mode enables you to view and edit the data for all your fixtures Data mode operates like many other spreadsheet programs so many of the concepts will be 23 7 Data mode Release 19 0 i wysiwyg March 2007 y ae Layout tabs Data mode Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These layouts provide various configurations of the views you are working with To change layouts click the tab that corresponds to the layout you wish to use The Data mode contains the following layouts Spreadsheet The work area contains a spreadsheet of data currently in the show database H Select The work area is split horizontally with a wireframe view above and a spreadsheet view below V Select The work area is split vertically with a wireframe view on the left and a spreadsheet view on the right Patch The work area is split with a wireframe view above and the patch window below Errors The work area contains a spreadsheet displaying fixtures wi
413. textures that have been applied to the object in SketchUp or accept the default location shown Note If a default path is not shown you must click Browse and navigate to the desired folder By saving textures to a folder outside of WYSIWYG you can use them repeatedly instead of only applying them to the surfaces that are within the current WYSIWYG document If there is already a texture with the same name saved in the location specified WYSI WYG will prompt you to save the file with a new name 8 Click OK Result The Block Load window appears Block Found chair halt Would you like to perform one of the following actions to the block Explode Do for all f Convert into Library Item Replace with Fixture Ignore block Cancel 9 Blocks in SketchUp are called components If you have components in your drawing you have the option to explode them convert them into a library item or substitute WYSI WYG fixtures for the existing components See below for details Note You will be prompted to determine what action to take for each component To avoid this prompt and apply the same treatment to each component in the drawing select the option and then click the checkbox beside Do for all Exploding the component Exploding the component breaks it into its sub components You must be careful of components that are made up of other components as WYSIWYG will only explode down one level WYSIWYG Reference Guide 113
414. th any of the aforementioned keys rotates you around your drawing Holding down the middle mouse button will allow you to drag the drawing around the window Alternatively the Pan tool on the View toolbar also enables this type of movement 4 At any time you can use the SHIFT key in combination with any of the movement keys to move in smaller increments In shaded views the mouse can substitute all key strokes Click and drag to pan around and use the mouse wheel for zooming Zoom tools Zoom tools allow you to view smaller or larger sections of a plot or drawing There are seven zoom tools available in WYSIWYG Note The zoom tools are not applicable in the Shaded view to zoom in or out in this view use the arrow keys or the roller wheel on your mouse instead To access the Zoom tools 1 From the Zoom menu choose one of the Zoom tools Tip You may also use the Zoom tools on the View toolbar Result The viewpoint is adjusted accordingly The Zoom tools that are available are listed in the following table Zoom tool Description Zoom In oN Moves your viewpoint closer to the center of the view Zoom Out Er Moves your viewpoint farther away from the center of the view wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface Zoom tool Description Zoom Fit cf Adjusts the viewpoint so that the extremities of the drawing fit into the current view Zoom Fit All only available on For Quad layout adjusts the the Zoom men
415. th errors Note The wireframe views in Data mode are used for fixture selection only Any selections made in the spreadsheet are visible on the CAD drawing and vice versa However to make any drawing modifications you must return to CAD mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 239 Data mode b o t Release 19 0 Spreadsheets 240 I ntroduction The Data mode displays your fixture information in spreadsheet format WYSIWYG compiles many spreadsheets that are accessible from the columns shortcut bar All of these spreadsheets contain the same information but are sorted and filtered differently Each column in the spreadsheet represents one fixture attribute The following information is compiled Data fields Note Data fields identified with an asterisk are non editable fields Spot This is an assigned identifier number usually used for automated fixtures A spot number is required for automated fixtures when using AutoFocus Channel This is the assigned control channel number you will use at your control console to control the fixture For moving lights the channel number recorded in WYSIWYG is the starting channel number Position This is the hanging position for the fixture Positions must be entered in the Position Manager Unit The unit number identifies the fixture s location on its respective hanging position Type This is the fixture name Lens This is the lens type Hookup This identifies
416. the contents of the library in the Library Browser choosing from a multitude of 3D objects to add to your plots Working with the Library Browser The Library Browser is dockable which means that it has a grab bar on the top that is used to move it around the screen You can place it on the edges of the work area at the top bottom left or right You can also drag it off the edge of the work area and into its own window This window remains on top of the WYSIWYG screen and may be dragged anywhere on your display Note If you experience difficulty undocking the browser hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the grab bar To open the Library Browser 1 2 From the Library menu choose Browse Library Tip You can also click the L brary tools on the Draw toolbar Note You can also access the Library Browser from the Options menu on the Welcome window when a document is not opened EEO Objects all o Architecture E Atmospheric H Banquet i H Consoles H Decor E Electrical Equipment E Furniture l Ladders gft Ladder oft Ladder ee d12ftLadder E Musical Instruments i E Outdoors E Rigging Equipment Al Road Cases E Security Items E Sound Reinforcement i H Speakers i E Stairs Fl H vehicles All qe Geo 0 Click any of the tools along the bottom of the browser window to view the contents of different sections of the library The library is divided into the f
417. the Change Symbol button is disabled for one of the view types Click either of the other two view types to choose a new symbol Result The symbol selection window is displayed Select the new symbol and then click Se ect Close the fixture property box Note Your changes are stored in the file Default ldb which is stored in the WYSIWYG Library folder in the location where you installed WYSIWYG If you need to upgrade or reinstall WYSI WYG and you want to keep the changes you have made to symbols first make a backup of Default ldb file Then once the upgrade or reinstallation is complete paste the backed up copy of the Default Idb file into the WYSIWYG Library folder replacing the existing file 215 CAD mode Release 19 0 Information layout You can place the following attributes around fixture symbols in WYSIWYG focus lamp lens notes position purpose spot unit channel circuit color gobo patch and dimmer The position visibility color and justification of these attributes can be set by editing the Label Layout Just like symbols label layouts can be edited at an application level document level or selected fixture only level To change the Label Layout The following procedure changes the label layout for all instances of the selected fixture type in the document Similar procedures change the symbol at an application level or selected fixture only level 1 From the Library menu choose Browse Library
418. the Distance tool on the Tools toolbar s Pick the starting point for the measurement Pick the end point of the measurement Result The length and angle of the specified trajectory is displayed in the bottom left corner of the status bar Tip When selecting the starting and end points for the measurement use the snap tools for precision WYSIWYG Reference Guide 185 CAD mode Release 19 0 lt gt o t Hang structures Introduction Hang structures are a very important part of creating a lighting plot in WYSIWYG All fixtures must be placed on a hang structure either a pipe or a truss This includes fixtures on set mounts or floor mounts Hang structures are not only a place to hang fixtures but also a means to organize your paperwork Some general facts about hang structures m Hang structures can be pipes or trusses Pipes are drawn trusses are placed from the truss library There are many different types of truss pieces in the truss library including box triangle and curved Truss includes floor mount boom and ladder positions as well m AutoUnit will assign and adjust unit numbers for fixtures on a pipe as you add move or delete them m Hang structures can have the same name even if they are not connected For example you can use this feature for set mounts where you have many small pipes attached to the same piece of scenery Position Manager The Position Manager organizes all the available positi
419. the Network Learn Client 1 Insert the installation CD into your PC s CD drive OR double click the install file if you have downloaded the software Result The WYSIWYG Install panel appears E WYSIWYG Install wysiwyg production design suite 2 Click nstall WYSIWYG Result The CAST license screen appears 3 If you accept the terms of the license click Yes to continue The installation begins Click FINISH to complete the installation WYSIWYG Reference Guide 39 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 19 0 b ae Configuration activation and registration Introduction After installing the product when you launch WYSIWYG for the first time the Product Configuration Wizard appears enabling you to choose the product level that you want to run You can choose from standard product levels Such as Design and Report Network products or you can run the Demo or Viewer versions of WYSIWYG Note To run any of the products listed in the Wizard you must first have the appropriate dongle installed on your computer to run a network product you must have a network dongle installed on a computer that is accessible from your PC After you proceed through the steps of the Wizard you are prompted to activate your product only if you are upgrading from version 3 X to the latest version and then you are prompted to register the software You must activate and register the WYSIWYG software
420. the New Plots view H Some objects may not be visible if they are on a layer that is not in the current scene Relationship between objects in CAD mode and New Plots Objects are transposed to a New Plots view from CAD mode and can be manipulated independently of the original object in CAD This means that in a New Plots view objects can be deleted copied moved and have their properties modified without affecting the original object in CAD mode For example moving a pipe does not cause the same pipe to also move in CAD mode You can easily create your lighting plot in a New Plots view independently of the drawing or model in CAD mode In contrast changes made to the original model in CAD mode are reflected in all New Plots views Objects that are deleted in CAD mode are also deleted from all New Plots views Similarly objects added in CAD mode are also added to all New Plots views provided the layer they are on is visible The same logic applies to objects that are moved in CAD mode moving an object causes the object to also move in all New Plots views as long as the relationship between the object in CAD mode and New Plots is intact To achieve a relationship between objects in CAD mode and objects in New Plots views various types of links are available These links track the position and properties of the original CAD object in New Plots and are referred to as the positional and properties links respectively For more inf
421. the drawing to set the second axis point Result The mirrored object is copied reversed from the origin based on the axis drawn Modifying object shapes You can change the shape of certain objects after they are drawn The objects that you can change include lines risers cameras surfaces spheres and arcs Modifying the Shape changes one or more of the parameters of the object such as its width height or radius Note If you are changing the shape of a sphere when you click and drag one of its vertices it will be resized proportionately if the Lock ratio checkbox is checked for the sphere s properties Click Properties gt Sphere tab and then ensure the Lock ratio check box is checked To resize the sphere in a disproportionate manner deselect this checkbox and then click and drag one of its vertices To modify the shape of an object 1 Select the object whose shape you want to modify Result You will notice that several white boxes will appear at the vertices of the object These boxes are referred to as markers 2 Move your cursor to a vertex Result The cursor changes to an arrow Note If you see a grey dotted box beside your mouse cursor the object will be moved instead of reshaped Move your cursor so that only the arrow appears 3 Left click to grip one of the markers While holding down the left mouse button click and drag the object until it reaches the desired shape WYSIWYG Reference Gui
422. the error and then click OK to close the notification b Acknowledge the error and then click Show Me to open a new window that automatically navigates you to the appropriate error report c Acknowledge the error and then click Options to reset the error notification triggers as described above Error spreadsheet properties Error spreadsheets may be sorted and modified in a similar manner as other Spreadsheet views To modify an error sheet 1 2 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Click the Errors layout tab From the Options menu choose View Options Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options E x General Data View Options Data Error Options Follow User Scene Scene All Layers z For information on the General and Data View Options tab refer to Customizing Spreadsheets on page 244 On the Data Error Options tab set triggers for the error that is displayed in the Name box on the General tab For more information on triggers refer to To set error triggers on page 256 297 Data mode Release 19 0 ave wysiwyg WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 8 Design mode Design mode was created to provide lighting designers with an avenue using the design tools and then save and render those looks to output photorealistic pictures In this chapter Layout tabs Design tools Concepts Palettes Creating looks Rendering Background Rendering Manager for 261
423. the following dialog box appears Edit Symbol 7 Use custom name Cancel Symbol Hame USITT Par 64 w wattage Count 10 Use custom count Notes a Use custom name By default the name displayed in the Symbol Name box is used unless otherwise modified To enter an alternative name select the Use custom name check box and then type the name b Wattage The wattage in volts for the lamp Use custom count By default the value displayed in the Count box is used unless otherwise modified This value includes only hung fixtures in your show file To enter an alternate count select the Use custom count check box and then type the value d Notes Type any pertinent notes for the symbol 3 When you are finished editing the symbol information click OK Result The Legend Symbols Editor dialog box is redisplayed 4 Finish entering all relevant information and then click Finish Result The Wizard shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar with the name you specified in the Title box Editing a legend 394 To make changes to the information that is displayed in the legend open the Legend Wizard by double clicking on the legend shortcut and then make any necessary modifications Once a legend has been defined it does not change until you make modifications to its settings If any new fixtures with different symbol types are added to the file since you last made changes these additions will be available i
424. the image WYSIWYG can maintain the aspect ratio of the image so as not to distort it To maintain aspect ratio 1 Select the image item on the layout 2 From the Edit menu choose Item Properties P Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar WYSIWYG Reference Guide 331 Presentation mode 332 3 4 Worksheet Report and Spreadsheet items Click the mage tab Properties x General Image Image Image view Internal Lago Image File External ma lw Keep Aspect Ratio Cancel Select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box Release 19 0 Result When this box is checked the height versus width relationship of the original image is maintained regardless of how you resize the placeholder Worksheet Report and Spreadsheet items are inserted into your layout at a set scale 100 regardless of the paper size For readability purposes you can readjust this value To adjust the scale of Worksheet Report and Spreadsheet items 1 Select the worksheet report or spreadsheet item on the layout 2 From the Edit menu choose ltem Properties 3 Click the Worksheet Report or Soreadsheet tab as appropriate Properties kita General Report Report Print Options l Gridlines Scale 190 4 contents Legends Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar a In the Sca e box type a percentage value to incre
425. ther computer you free up CPU capacity on your own computer Configuring the Background Rendering Manager When you open the Background Rendering Manager for the first time the Configuration Wizard appears prompting you to choose settings such as the network port the Startup options and the folder where all renderings are stored This Wizard appears automatically when m You click Start gt All Programs gt WYSIWYG gt WYSIWYG Background Rendering Manager to open the program for the first time m You click Finish in the Render Wizard after setting up a rendering and choosing to send it to the Background Rendering Manager for the first time WYSIWYG Reference Guide 285 Design mode Release 19 0 To configure the Background Rendering Manager 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt WYSIWYG gt WYSIWYG Background Rendering Manager 2 In the Welcome window click Next Background Rendering Manager Configuration Wizard Be k E x Specify Configuration Type Select the configuration method that you would like to use Click this option to configure the Background Rendering Manager with the default working directory and network pork settings Advanced Click this option iF you want bo specify the working directory and network port settings of the Background Rendering Manager lt Back Cancel 3 Select whether you want the program to use the default settings or custom settings that you specify m Typical Click thi
426. ther screen options such as the status bar and tooltips To hide and display toolbars using the Options menu 1 2 3 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Options menu choose Application Options Click the 7oo Dars tab Application Options My E x Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars View Selection Layout Format l ComEdit Design F Layout Edit Scene F Live Layout Ingert T Layer Data T Layout View Universe T New Plot Options WwySILink M CAD Options D New PlotView D Message Log Opt Show statusbar panes lw Selected objects W Coordinates lw Snap M Autofocus fw Ortho lw Channel Over lw Absolute lw Error Checking Missing Coordinate Unit Type w Statusbar Select the check boxes of the toolbars that you want to display Note Since toolbars are mode sensitive certain toolbars are disabled based on the mode that you are currently in 65 WYSIWYG user interface Release 19 0 Status bar 66 Introduction The status bar is displayed along the bottom of the WYSIWYG screen below the layout tabs The status bar displays the prompt line the number of unused channels WYSIWYG Perform selected object information and tracks the status of the snap ortho and absolute coordinates commands It also tracks and displays the coordinates of the cursor Ready O O F o c 0 ABS xn 9B y 2 3 1516 2 0 0 Missing Coord z 0
427. ting images from 293 Moving dequeued jobs back into queue 292 Moving jobs to top of queue 292 Moving jobs up or down in queue 292 Pausing 292 Removing jobs from queue 292 Resuming 292 Taskbar icons 288 Backup files 86 Backup looks 379 Barndoors 219 Baud rate 85 Beam angle 208 361 Beam simulation quality 75 Beams 98 Big Layouts 320 Bind to console 350 Bitmaps 343 Black Box 135 Blocks Custom library items 151 Groups 153 Booms 191 Borders and legs 144 Break tool 177 Budget Cost 206 241 Bulb Lamp 207 241 C CAD environment 104 CAD items 327 CAD Options toolbar 60 Camera 75 149 Camera toolbar using 150 Center line 138 Channel count 66 Channels Simulation 66 Circle 139 Circles 313 Circuit Name data field 240 Circuit Number data field 240 Circuit Type data field 241 Circus tents 136 Close the show document 82 Color Inserting 220 Inserting multiple 243 403 Index Color data field 240 Color Mode 159 Color wheel 264 Column Width Size 253 Columns in Data mode 240 ComEdit toolbar 60 Compass 150 Concept shortcuts 268 Connecting 350 console 350 Console data field 241 Consoles connecting 350 Content properties 326 Convert tool 177 Co ordinate display 86 Coordinate notation 104 Coordinates 67 104 Copy 314 Cost data field 241 Count column 299 Creating a new DMX universe 247 Creating a new spreadsheet 246 Cross fading be
428. tioning of the fixture within the yoke wysiwyg 2 March 2007 Data mode m Spin A focus attribute measured in degrees defining the fixture s yoke positioning in relation to the hang structure where O is down hung 90 is side hung and 180 is over hung for example m Weight This is the fixture s weight A fixture s weight can only be modified through the Library Browser H Lamp Type This is the lamp type m Notes This is a custom notes field m Footnotes This feature is currently disabled m of Data Channels This is the total number of DMX channels required by the fixture of Color Frames This is the number of color frame slots that the fixture has m ff of Lamps This is the number of lamps required by the fixture a Circuit Type This describes what type of device the unit should be plugged into for example regular dimmer scroller power supply E Wattage This is the wattage in watts of the lamp 7 Model This is the fixture type m Cost This is the fixture s cost or rental cost This field is used to estimate a Show budget A fixture s cost can only be modified through the Library Browser For more information on setting costs refer to page 206 a Status This is the fixture s status relative to your drawing If the fixture is HUNG it is in your drawing If a fixture is UNHUNG it is in the flight case In fixture count reports all fixtures are counted regardless of t
429. to work on the same file in multiple modes at the same time You can close additional main frames using the C ose tool at the top right corner of the screen Only the initial main frame triggers a file closure when this button is pressed For increased flexibility WYSIWYG supports multiple monitors You can carry main frames and popup frames across monitors To open a new main frame 1 From the Options menu choose New Window 2 Drag the title bar of the new window to place it where you want it To make the window bigger or smaller use the resize tab in the lower right corner of the window or the minimize and maximize tools in the top right 3 Repeat to open more new windows as required While each window or main frame functions independently all the show drawings and data are fully integrated wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface Shortcut bars Introduction Shortcuts are created for quick access to library items and view types among other things The shortcut bars are located on the left side of your screen Shortcut bars are mode and layout specific Each layout has designated shortcut bars Navigation Fixtures Accessores Concepts In general there are three types of shortcuts E navigation 7 library m views tools Navigation shortcuts The first type of shortcut is used for navigation purposes The navigation shortcuts are Navigation Views Navigation shortcuts st
430. tries are disabled to show that it has been fixed An indicator on the status bar signals you when your document contains errors This feature can be turned on or off WYSIWYG is also set up to trigger an error notification when errors are detected Error notifications can be turned on or off Errors WYSIWYG checks for the following errors Error Dimmers gt Circuit Patches gt Circuit Channels gt Circuit Patches gt Dimmer Channels gt Dimmer Channels gt Patch Spots gt Patch Missing Position Missing Unit Missing Circuit Name Missing Circuit WYSIWYG Reference Guide Definition Fixtures assigned to the same circuit have been assigned different dimmer numbers Fixtures assigned to the same circuit have been assigned different patch addresses Fixtures assigned to the same circuit have been assigned different channel numbers Fixtures assigned to the same dimmer have been assigned different patch addresses Fixtures assigned to the same dimmer have been assigned different channel numbers Fixtures assigned to the same patch address have been assigned different channel numbers Fixtures assigned to the same patch address have been assigned different spot numbers The position field is empty The unit field is empty The circuit name field is empty The circuit number field is empty 255 Data mode 296 Error Missing Dimmer Missing Patch Missing Channel Missing Spot
431. ts Center Ortho X Ortho Y Ortho Z New Plots View a a A Scenes toolbar oom fit Loom in o0om out oom window Pan Current scene Standard toolbar 3 New document i Open Li Save i Print preview Print E View options WYSIWYG user interface 63 WYSIWYG user interface 64 Tools toolbar Group Ungroup H Move Rotate Mirror ab me 6 gt Break Uw Convert 2 Divide B7 Extrude Ny Fillet Distance s Origin O Quick tools ES Quick focus tj Quick light emission 1 Dimension Universes toolbar Universe View toolbar Zoom fit oom in 00m out 0om window Pan Left Right Up Down Previous Next Render Wizard SS Pease Sure Refresh Frame popup Ud WYSI Link toolbar Current device Node manager Monitor All ae FA About Error dimmer About mode rack Release 19 0 wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface To hide and display toolbars using the toolbar list 1 Right click in the toolbar area Result The toolbar list is displayed Click on the name of the toolbar that you wish to display A check mark to the left of the toolbar name indicates it is currently displayed Repeat to display or hide multiple toolbars Tip From the toolbar list select 7oo bars to open the Application Options dialog box In this box you can choose multiple toolbars and configure o
432. ts Cylinders can be used for creating platforms columns or any other cylinder shaped objects There are two ways in which you can draw cylinders m non interactive mode in which you type the exact height and diameter of the cylinder H interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the dimensions of the cylinder To draw a cylinder 1 From the Draw menu choose Cylinder Tip You can also click the Cylinder tool on the Draw toolbar a In the Height box type the height for the cylinder The default value is 8 0 In the Width box type the width for the cylinder The default value is 8 0 Click OK Result The cylinder is attached to the cursor 5 Drag the new cylinder to its position and then click to place the object in the drawing 142 wysiwyg March 2007 CAD mode To draw a cylinder in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar From the Draw menu choose Cylinder Click to place the center of the bottom surface of the cylinder Click to set the radius for the cylinder In the dialog box that opens type the desired height or length for the cylinder Click OK Oo Ff o N e Drawing spheres Spheres are solid 3D circular or oval objects There are two ways in which you can draw spheres m non interactive mode in which you type the exact horizontal and vertical diameter of the sphere m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the dimens
433. ts Press Se ect when you are finished Fixture specific properties Customize the properties of a fixture by assigning specific attributes such as point of view patch information and lens type WYSIWYG Reference Guide 209 CAD mode Release 19 0 To edit view fixture attributes 1 Select the fixture that you want to view or edit 2 Right click and select Properties Tip At any time to access an object s properties you can click on the Properties tool on the Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Based on the type of fixture that you have selected the Properties dialog box varies An example is shown in the graphic below Properties E i a General Appearance Light Emission Fixture is PAL 1200 ColGobo 8o Options General Control Moving Mirror Position E Edit Layout Spot jo Pan non Unit ft TR so Oise 23110 5 16 Spin oop Purpose fC O Focus Position Noes Lamp MSRI200 Angle non Lens None Angle non Carcel Ae Fixture tab Options on the Fixture tab affect the fixture properties and their accessories On the left side of the dialog box is a list of the selected fixtures and their accessories Click on a list item to obtain further details about the item Refer to Data fields on page 240 for a description of the fields m Edit Layout click to edit the text label layout for the selected fixture For more information on layou
434. ts the entire drawing View prints the currently displayed view in the active window Window allows you to draw a window around the area you wish to print Last Window prints the portion contained in the last window you drew for a Window print If you have not used or previewed a Window print yet this option is unavailable Scaling options a Fit will print the drawing to the scale required to fill the available print area based on the selection in the Print What group box When you select this check box the drawing will print to fit a If the Fit check box is deselected you must choose the scale from the drop down list Standard scales are displayed in this menu If the scale you want to use IS not displayed choose Custom a When Custom is selected you must enter the ratio Type the ratio in the On Paper and Real World boxes The value in the On Paper box is the scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the document The value in the Rea World box is the real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On Paper box For example you may want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of your document This one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet The value in the Point Size box is the size at which points are printed While it is possible to print your drawing directly from the CAD mode it is preferable to print plots from the Presentation mode Presentatio
435. ture from the library to the selected element s In the resulting window navigate to and select the desired texture and then click Se ect Use Texture from File Click this option to apply to the selected element s a texture that you have created and saved in either bitmap or jpeg format In the resulting window navigate to and select the desired file Once you have chosen a texture option you can also set the properties of the texture as follows Tile Click this option button if you want to have the texture repeated over the selected element in a continuous series of Squares or rectangles and then type the size of the frame in which you want the texture to appear in the Width and Height boxes Based on the size that you enter WYSIWYG calculates how many times the texture is repeated or tiled to completely cover the selected element Stretch To have the texture stretch over the entire element surface click this option button Based on the aspect ratio and the rotation angle WYSIWYG evaluates the surface with all of its edges and stretches the texture so the best fit is used Texture Rotation If the texture has text or another recognizable image in it you might need to rotate the image to get it right side up Type the rotation angle in this box Note that since most library objects are quite small with complex Surfaces this option is not applicable because textures containing text or other recognizable images will not be legib
436. tware Result The WYSIWYG Install panel appears E WYSIWYG Install wysiwyg production design suite 2 Click NSTALL WYSIWYG to install the software Follow the steps in the Installation Wizard as prompted Note If you are installing WYSIWYG on a computer that will act as a combined Learn Network Server and Client after completing the WYSIWYG installation simply attach the network dongle to it to activate the Server functionality Note If you have an installation CD and the installation Wizard does not automatically open when you insert the CD into your computer a Access the CD ROM drive of your computer b Double click the icon for the Wyginstall program c Follow the steps in the Installation Wizard Installing an I n Place update If you already have a previous release of WYSIWYG installed on your computer you can easily update to the current release by installing an in place update This update allows you to enhance a version of WYSIWYG that is a maximum of two releases back from the current release You do not have to uninstall the previous version of WYSIWYG to perform the update WYSIWYG Reference Guide 33 Installation configuration activation and registration 34 To install an in place update 1 From the WYSIWYG Install window select nstall WYSIWYG Release 19 0 Result If you have more than one release installed on your computer the following dialog box is displayed If you have only
437. tween lighting looks 271 Current Set current layer 171 Custom 223 Custom color scroll 221 Custom color wheels 221 Custom fixtures 197 Custom gobo wheels 221 Custom gobos 223 Custom library items 131 151 Custom settings 85 Customizing spreadsheet views 241 Cut 314 Cylinders 142 D Data error tab 94 Data fields 240 Data filters 244 Data toolbar 60 Decimal display 86 Delay buffer 86 Delete 315 Design toolbar 61 Design tools 262 Designer s Remote 363 Detail level 299 Device Manager 350 Dimension line 141 Dimmer data field 240 Dimmer information 376 Dimmer rack information 377 Direct 3D tab 87 Display Log 373 Distance tool 185 Distributing fixtures 195 Divide tool 179 DMX 350 356 404 Release 19 0 Document summary 91 Dot line 138 Draw defaults 96 Draw toolbar 61 Drawing movement axes 146 Drawing aids 133 Drawing pipes 188 Drawing tips 133 DWG 79 DWG DXF files importing 117 DXF 79 DXF DWG files 117 Edit Pres toolbar 62 Edit toolbar 61 Editing a key 339 Editing a legend 334 Editing objects 152 Editing symbols 334 EDMX 90 EDMX address 212 Entering data in the spreadsheet 241 Environmental options 281 Errors 255 ETC interface tab 90 ETCLink 376 ETCLink functions 376 Ethernet 362 Exit WYSIWYG 84 Export to DWG DXF 123 Exporting to 2D DWG DXF 123 to 3D DWG DXF 123 Extrude 181 F Facet resolution 93 Facet splitting
438. ty level is displayed in the Intensity box as you move the mouse Alternatively you can enter a specific percentage by typing the number in the ntensity box and then clicking App y If multiple fixtures are selected the intensity level entered is assigned to all fixtures If you select multiple fixtures that have varying intensity levels N A appears in the ntensity box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 263 Design mode 264 Release 19 0 Zoom and iris tools To use the zoom and iris tools The zoom and iris design tools both work the same way Use the buttons for the extreme settings of tight or wide Use the dial to achieve any of the settings in between To use the dial click and hold the dial while you move the mouse up or down Gobo and prism tools To use the gobo and prism tools The gobo and prism tools work the same way Specify the fixture type if you have more than one selected or the specific wheel to control if that fixture type has multiple wheels using the drop down menu Note that only fixtures with gobo or prism parameters appear on the list Use the gobo prism wheel scroll arrows to select the desired gobo prism from the wheel If no gobo prism is desired leave the wheel in the open slot The dial will rotate this gobo if a rotating gobo is selected Wheel selection drop down list Dial Gobo Display Color tool To use the color tool The color tool offers many options for color selection
439. u viewpoint so that the extremities of the drawing fit into the three Wireframe views simultaneously In Wireframe view adjusts the viewpoint so that the extremities of the drawing fit the window Zoom Previous a Resets the view to the previous pan and zoom settings Zoom Next ae If you used the Zoom Previous tool Zoom Next sets the view to the next pan and zoom settings Allows you to specify the area of the drawing to be viewed For more information on using this tool refer to the procedure below Z00m Window aU To use the Zoom Window tool 1 In Wireframe view from the Zoom menu choose the Zoom Window tool 2 Click the left mouse button and drag a window around the area into which you want to zoom 3 Click the left mouse button again to capture the second point of the window Result The view changes to the area that you have selected View shortcuts View shortcuts record the plot type as well as the zoom and pan settings of a specific point of view You can use the shortcut to get back to that exact view point the next time you need to To record a view shortcut 1 Set up the active window for the plot type zoom and pan settings you wish to record Right click on the Views shortcut bar and then choose New View Type a name for the new shortcut and then click OK Result The shortcut is recorded and available on the Wews shortcut bar WYSIWYG Reference Guide 69 WYSIWYG user interface 70 Release 1
440. ue Um eu MM ann eeu daey i y o Gw dd ING AWN eee A dd WW doo ee owed 17 WYSIWYG Design 2 22 lt 4045 456 Guo ee OE eo eee eee ee OR ew ee ee ee ee OS 18 WYSIWYG Perform a ae oe oo meee Bede aOR dw ee W M WLR O eas OS DE wen 20 WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition a 22 WYSIWYG Learn ooh baw ee ee ee ee hw ONN GWR Tl G0 ee ee ee ee UO AA 8 ee oe eee ee 24 UN CCD ans 6 2 e60 lt 4 bee Shee te eee ee te tee eee eee ees Eee eee Oe 26 VIYVSILWGs 264 e409 e965 dw y ho i y ddir dy Bo fo rd ee Fic do dd oa eat dd ooo be dds ho 27 3 Installation configuration activation and registration 29 OSTA lla ie 2 4 amp oak oo 6 oye eee tee EG ee Sa Le eee ee eee eG ee SS 31 Configuration activation and registration aoaaa e a a a 40 UPOO S ou Ge eG One Se oy bab wae oe BER SSE Ee eee oe eee ae Ee E 44 Memberships a 66065 6 kk wb ORES REECE Aw HEED EEG AE HEBER GU O ESE Ue EDS 45 PaSSWOLdS Gascegewhatnesd Seabees Br dh bc Pod b bee ide babe O R WL BYN es 47 4 WYSIWYG user interface 49 Navigation and screen Set UP 1 yg 51 SMOMCUl DAs aee kane eee wea tees Bae ee ae eee Pe ee ae A a Sy ae NY 55 WOOWOls 2 4 64 64 ORCA ARR FA FARN CA FYR ARC FEN OF NF FAU AEF AH 59 ss a i i pa CN CN AR NR E e Pees NY EYN 66 Wireframe VIEWS FF a a 68 Shaded VIEWS us beat ue Yd RW dete eR GR O UG AGO HES EE EK OER HES a 73 5 Managing your WYSIWYG document 77 File MENU i une Ge See ea eee ea ee ee ee ee ee ee ore Ge NF 79 ODUONS MENUS de eres ee
441. uirements WYSI Link requires a few additional pieces of hardware to perform system diagnostics For more information on hardware reguirements refer to Installation on page 31 Upgrading to WYSI Link WYSI Link is an optional feature set for WYSIWYG You can upgrade your dongle for WYSI Link operation by calling your WYSIWYG dealer Once you have purchased the upgrade you will be provided with an upgrade code To learn how to upgrade to WYSILink refer to Upgrades on page 44 ETCNet2 compatibility WYS Link supports ETCNet2 version 2 1 1 and version 3 0 0 networks WYSILink can only monitor one ETCNet2 version at a time By default WYSI Link will monitor an ETCNet2 version 2 0 0 network To set the version that is monitored refer to ETC Interface tab on page 90 as wysiwyg March 2007 WYSILink Link mode ce WYSI Link mode I ntroduction WYSI Link mode is accessed through the NK mode button at the top of the WYSIWYG screen You can view the WYSILink Message Log and configure your WYSILink settings from LINK mode Note If you cannot see the L NK mode button then you are not running WYSIWYG with a WYSI Link enabled dongle Contact your dealer or Cast Software Technical Support for further information Message Log The Message Log provides a spreadsheet view of ETCLink error messages As error states occur messages are logged in the Message Log and classified as either Pending or Clea
442. ult The light emitting surface attaches to your cursor Click to place it in your drawing in the desired location 231 CAD mode Release 19 0 lt gt The Flight Case Introduction The Flight Case is a special view used to hold unhung fixtures hang structures and focus positions created or inserted in Data mode but not yet placed on the drawing This is an ideal way to work from a set inventory as you can add all of your fixtures in Data mode and then click and drag the fixtures out of the Flight Case until you have exhausted your stock To open the Flight Case 1 From the Tools menu choose Flight Case Note You can open the Flight Case only in a wireframe view Tip The Flight Case layout is preconfigured with the flight case and a wireframe view Ss Unassigned Fixtures Focus Positions How objects get into the Flight Case As you enter fixtures in the Data mode spreadsheets they appear in the Flight Case under the Unassigned Fixtures branch When you type position names in the Position Manager the individual positions appear under the Position branch As you assign fixtures to those positions they will move from the Unassigned branch to under the proper position All fixtures that appear in the Flight Case are unhung fixtures which means they are not in your drawing regardless of whether they have been assigned a position or not If you create focus positions in the Data mode by typing labels in the focus b
443. ument Defaults Select this check box if you want to reference the object settings that are saved in Show Options For more information on object settings refer to the Object Settings tab on page 92 Deselect this option to set object specific facet options m Facet Splitting Select this check box to ignore the document defaults and set object specific facet properties Specify the size of the triangles in the Facet Resolution box The more triangles you have the more realistic the cosine distribution is However this also decreases the simulation speed Object specific properties As explained above objects also have properties that are particular to the type of object For example fixtures have unit numbers but do not have a radius When an object is selected and its properties are displayed a tab appears in the properties dialog box for that type of object When you select multiple objects of different types tabs appear for each type of object selected The following objects are defined m points 5 lines m text labels m dimensions 7 library items For all other types of objects venues circles arcs risers cylinders spheres and cameras refer to Drawing objects on page 133 In these cases the properties dialog offers the same options that were given when the object was initially drawn Hanging structures properties pipes truss floor mounts and so on are fully defined in Hang structures on page 186
444. unctions I ntroduction WYSILink enables you to use many of the ETCLink features commonly found on ETC consoles These features allow you to get information about your Sensor dimming system You can access information about individual dimmers and about entire dimmer racks You can also record dimmer loads and record and playback backup looks from within WYSI Link The WYS I Link toolbar The WYSILink toolbar provides guick access to the ETCLink functions described below Current device Node manager Wor SlLink E Monitor All Gl amp About ay dimmer About HI rack Error Mode toggles between the currently selected node and all connected nodes Node Selection enables you to view only the channels owned by that node Node Manager refer to Node Manager on page 378 About Dimmer see About Dimmer below About Dimmer Rack see About Dimmer Rack on page 377 About Dimmer The About Dimmer dialog box provides specific information about an individual dimmer such as the rack number slot number and type of dimmer The name of the connected node EDMX source and the source for setting the level are also displayed Pe wysiwyg March 2007 WYSILink Link mode To access dimmer information 1 From the WYSILink menu choose About Dimmer Tip You can also use the About Dimmer tool on the WYSILink toolbar oe Result The About Dimmer dialog box is displayed Dimmer i Status aK View Error
445. ure to enforce the interval selectively Pipe Snap will disengage after you place the next fixture To use pipe snap 1 From the Tools menu choose Snap and then choose Pipe Snap Tip You can also click the Pipe snap tool on the CAD Options toolbar 2 Insert fixtures as described above With pipe snap active the fixtures are automatically hung at the pre defined interval To set the snap interval 1 From the Options menu choose Show Options 2 Click the Object Settings tab Show Options E x Document Summary Shaw Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Hang Options Tw AutoLnit lw Snap Interval jie lw Enforce Spacing fro Minimum Spacing Symbol Alignment T Line up symbols ra Line eight Emission poe Manu Joos O15 ua ga Weight Prad Shading Options Facet Splitting Facet resolution prse We git Cylinder Sphere Segments hs Segments js Cancel 3 Select the Snap check box if it is unchecked and then type the new value in the Interval box 4 Click OK 198 wysiwyg March 2007 To CAD mode set an interval for a specific pipe Right click the pipe Click Properties Click the Hang Structure tab Properties Se 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Hang Structure Fipe Frosimity Alerts Name Ja W AutoL nit Hang Options M Shap Interval fi ish W Use Document Defaults Number of f
446. using the distribute feature For details see Distributing fixtures on page 195 1 From the Library menu choose Browse Library 3 In the tree menu that is now visible click on the sign beside Manufacturer to select fixtures by manufacturer name Type to select by fixture type or A to see all the fixtures in alphabetical order Click the Fixture tool at the bottom of the browser 4 Double click on the name of the fixture that you want to insert Result A fixture with default settings for this type attaches to the cursor Note You can change the fixture frame size using the Add Accessory option For more information on adding accessories refer to To insert an accessory on page 219 5 To change the properties of the fixture before inserting right click on the fixture name and then click Property Result A dialog box opens with a shaded view of the fixture on the left and an image of its symbol on the right Use the Photometrics tab to change the lamp and lens settings for the fixture if applicable For more information on the Photometrics tab refer to Photometrics tab on page 207 Click nsert and the dialog will close 6 Move the mouse over a hang structure and then click to place the fixture Continue placing this type of fixture by clicking on the other hang structures as desired 7 Finish placing this fixture type by right clicking and then choosing Finish placing fixtures from the resulti
447. ve walls center pole extends above the height of the walls The diameter of the tent Diameter measured from pole to opposite pole CAD mode WYSIWYG Default Value 20 0 80 O 70 0 10 O 20 0 WYSIWYG Default Value 6 20 0 10 O 70 0 137 CAD mode Release 19 0 Drawing lines Lines are 2D objects Lines are drawn continuously allowing you to create shapes made up of multiple vertices Lines come in four styles a Solid m Center m Hidden a Dot Line styles determine how line objects appear on your plot and can be modified at any time They look similar to the following Solid Center ee eee Hidden 9 You can make a multi vertex line appear as a spline or french curve by selecting the option in the properties box You can then drag the markers around to adjust the curves Alternatively you can choose to draw a spline directly Splines have the same line style options as regular lines Lines can be extruded into surfaces For more on extruding lines refer to Extrude on page 181 To draw a line 1 From the Draw menu choose Line 2 From the sub menu select Solid Dot Center Dashed or Spline Tip You can also use the appropriate line tool on the Draw toolbar The available line tools are as follows Solid u n Dot B E X Center ate Dashed a a Spline Click on the drawing at the starting point of
448. w the Library Browser contains only the Symbol library Editing objects 314 A number of tools are available in the New Plots view to help you manipulate objects Note Orthographic mode is available in New Plots from the Edit menu and also from the New Plots Options toolbar When ortho mode is active you can manipulate objects either vertically or horizontally For more information on this mode refer to Ortho on page 109 Selecting objects Objects are transposed from CAD mode and can therefore be selected independently of that mode for example moving a pipe in New Plots will not cause it to also move in CAD mode Fixture symbols are grouped with the hang structure to which they are mounted Selecting and moving the hang structure will also move the mounted fixture symbols Similarly accessories are grouped with the fixture symbols to which they are attached and will also move with the fixture symbols You can also select an individual fixture symbol separately from the hang structure if you want to move or modify it independently The methods for selecting an object are similar to those for selecting an object in CAD mode For more information on these methods refer to Selecting on page 152 Copy When you copy and paste an object in a New Plots view a second representation of that same object is created If you subseguently update the data for this object in either CAD or Data mode for example gel color or cha
449. window should display ntensity Full in the bottom left hand corner Note Even before you click Full you should see various codes MIDI data displayed in MIDI OX s Output Monitor if everything was set up according to the instructions above 6 You can now minimize not close MIDI OX and start programming your show using WYSIWYG s AutoFocus features wysiwyg March 2007 Index Symbols Assistant variable 301 Data variable 301 Designer variable 301 File variable 302 Group variable 301 Headings variable 301 Scene variable 301 Show variable 301 Title variable 301 Venue variable 301 NOW variable 302 A Absolute coordinates 67 153 Acceleration 87 Accessory 219 Activating WYSIWYG 42 Activation 44 Adding floorplans 126 Aiming fixtures 199 Alias definition 206 Ambient light 75 Antialiasing options 282 Aperture 277 Application Options 85 Arc 139 Arcs 313 Arena 135 Arranging shortcuts 57 Array 183 Grid pattern 184 Using to hang fixtures 195 Aspect ratio 332 Assembly Snap 110 191 Atmospheric options 278 Attribute layout 311 Attributes Data fields 240 Auto load 86 Auto save 86 Autofocus 362 399 Auto increment 208 AutoPatch 357 AutoUnit 93 186 187 Axes drawing 146 Back view 108 Background Rendering Manager About 285 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Index Buttons 290 Configuring 285 Deleting jobs from 293 Expor
450. wing options are available Application Options Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface General File Options Direct3D OpenGL Toolbars a a Acceleration Colour Hardware Full i Emulation Ramp WYSIWYG Reference Guide Specify Hame Acceleration Colour Ramp Emulation Emulation Fi amp AGB Emulation Emulation Auto Detect WYSIWYG attempts to find a DirectX driver that corresponds to the options you have set for Acceleration and Color The driver that it chooses is highlighted in the list of available drivers below Acceleration Enables either hardware or software emulation acceleration Hardware acceleration uses the capabilities of the graphics hardware of the computer to display graphics Emulation uses the emulation library or software components to display graphics Color Enables either full or ramp color 87 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 19 0 88 Full displays the full color content of the fixture sources and the material of the object being lit This is the default option Ramp displays only the grey component of each fixture specified in a scene The color components of the fixtures are ignored You can also manually select a DirectX driver from the list of drivers The list changes based on the current video card and mode OpenGL tab Options on the OpenGL tab affect the type of simulation that you want to use Application Options Compatibility Render Opti
451. wing steps Set the first channel to a value between 128 255 above 5090 Set the second channel to a value between 84 1 between 33 and 190 oo Slide the third channel up and down to control the progress of the video forward and backward To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console After you have patched a movement axis in Data mode you can use the applicable console device in Live mode to control the movement of any objects that are attached to the axis To control the object the DMX patch is allocated two channels with the following controls WYSIWYG Reference Guide First channel Move The first channel is for coarse movement and can be used to advance the object quickly to any position along the entire path from start to finish Second channel Move Fine The second channel is used for further refining the object s position that you set with the first channel Adjust the slider on the second channel to move the object very slightly either forward or back from its current position The movement achieved with this channel ts so fine that it is best viewed on linear axes that are quite long Note that for rotation axes the movement is so slight that you may not be able to see it 353 Live mode 354 Release 19 0 1 Ensure that the console device is connected to the patched movement axis For details on connecting a console see To connect to a console on page 350 2 To move the object quic
452. xample you may wish to move the channel attribute the red 2 shown on the plot below Motorcycle Z After you select and drag the attribute to the desired location the following is displayed Motorcycle wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 Presentation mode Drawing objects You can add objects to the plot for notation Objects that you can draw include lines arcs circles and text labels You can also insert symbols from the Library Browser Drawing circles Drawing circles in a New Plots view is similar to drawing circles in CAD mode You can access the Circle tool from the Draw menu or from the New Plot Options toolbar 3 For more information on drawing circles refer to Drawing circles on page 139 Note When you add objects such as circles to your plot they are not added to your drawing in CAD mode Drawing arcs Drawing arcs in a New Plots view is similar to drawing arcs in CAD mode You can access the Arc tool from the Draw menu or from the New Plot Options toolbar For more information refer to Drawing arcs on page 139 After you have drawn an arc you can choose to add arrows to one or both ends of the arc The default is none For more information on adding arrows refer to page 319 Drawing lines Drawing lines in a New Plots view is similar to drawing lines in CAD mode For more information refer to Drawing lines on page 138 You can also use the appropriate line tool from th
453. xis from start to finish and then start over again at the beginning in a continuous forward loop Backward Select this option if you want the object to move backwards along the axis from finish to start and then begin over again in a continuous backwards loop If you have chosen any moving Mode value that is any value except Static you can specify the length of time in seconds over which you want the full range of motion to take place Type this value in the Duration box The larger the number you type in this box the slower the object moves Click New Axis to add the axis information to the axis list box wysiwyg March 2007 10 Click Save to save your settings Note If you make any changes to the axis settings and save the changes you can revert to the previous settings by clicking Load 11 To see the object moving along the axis you must first ensure that the Motion Data mode Control Console or the motion control system that you are using is connected and that the patched axis Is bound For details see To connect to a console on page 350 and To control a motion control patched movement axis with a motion control system on page 354 Reading the patch Each box in the patch universe represents one DMX channel Fixtures are represented by colored bumps or bars that span the number of reguired DMX channels The color of the bar is the same as the fixture s CAD layer The number in the top left cor
454. xisting WYSIWYG gobo to be visible in wireframe views The associated gobo is used in lieu of the bitmap or jpeg image In shaded views and renderings only the custom gobo footprint is visible Custom gobos do not break up the cone of light To create a custom gobo 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Library menu choose Gobo Wizard General gobo details x Enter general information for this gobo and specify paths where you can later find it Custom gobo name Add Modify Pelete W Make this item available to other documents 4 Pack Cancel Type the custom gobo name Add or modify the path Note The path is the location in the library where the gobo will be stored A gobo assigned to the path Custom Corporate_Logos would be available in the custom section of the gobo library in a sub category named Corporate Logos To make this gobo available to other documents check the appropriate box 223 CAD mode 224 10 11 Release 19 0 Click Next Type the path to the custom artwork file or use the browser to open the image The image file must be in either bitmap or jpeg format Result A preview of the image appears in the pane on the right and the image s attributes are recorded in the box on the left Click Next Result A short description of the next step appears You will need to choose an existing library gobo to be displayed when the custom artwork cannot be displayed Click
455. xture m Flood vs Soot Beam Displays a graphical representation of the ratio between the flood and spot for the fixture s beam angle m Flood vs Spot Field Displays a graphical representation of the ratio between the flood and spot for the fixture s field angle Field The measurement in degrees from the center of the beam to where the light level drops off to 10 percent of the peak Beam The measurement in degrees from the center of the beam to where the light level drops off to 50 percent of the peak Quick tools Quick tools allow you to quickly assign data accessories and other attributes to fixtures without having to switch to the Data mode or open the Properties box for each individual fixture Quick tools will enter repetitive information as well as incremental information for each fixture as you click on it There is also a Ouick Light Emission Tool that helps you assign and patch light emitting properties for virtually any object in WYSIWYG For details see Ouick Light Emission Tool on page 160 To use Ouick Tools 1 208 From the Tools menu choose Guick Tools te Tip You can also click the Quick Tools tool on the Tools toolbar Quick Fixture Tool x Fixture Spot az Auto lnerement Unit fo JP Auto Irerenment mi Pupos Focus Pan Bo Tilt jo Data Channel i iM Auto Wherenent Patch fel IM Auto Wherenent T Dimmer fo iM Auto Wherenment Circuit Name Im Mum IM sutol
456. y m Pan tool moves objects Select this check box if you want to rotate the model on the target Click to clear the check box if you want the pan tool to rotate the camera around the target You can use the right left up and down arrow keys in addition to the mouse button to pan to the desired location m Fast Background Rendering Select this check box if you want to render the beams and not the background The background is displayed as a pasted image and the beams are rendered on top of the background 76 re V WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 5 Managing your WYSI WYG document This chapter provides information on how to work with your WYSIWYG document In this chapter File menu 79 Options menu 85 WYSIWYG Viewer 100 17 Managing your WYSIWYG document 78 Release 19 0 wysiwyg gt gt March 2007 Managing your WYSIWYG document y o t File menu I ntroduction The File menu contains the basic commands required to manipulate your WYSIWYG document The File menu is the same in all the modes New command The New command creates a new show document If another show document is currently open you will be prompted to save changes to that document before a new untitled file is created Only one show document may be open at a time To create a new document From the File menu choose New Tip You can also use the New tool on the Standard toolbar C Open command The Open command op
457. y also use the Redo tool on the Edit toolbar Result The last undo action you performed is reversed Grouping ungrouping Grouping objects together ensures that they will always be selected as one For example you may want to group an object and its corresponding focus position If you relocate the object in the drawing the focus position will automatically follow as will all the light beams pointing at it saving you time and work To group objects 1 Select the objects to be grouped 2 From the Edit menu choose Group Tip You may also use the Group tool on the 7oolstoolbar ws To ungroup objects 1 Select the grouped objects 2 From the Edit menu choose Ungroup Tip You may also use the Ungroup tool on the 7oo s toolbar Mt Note You can group together objects located on different layers but the resulting group can only exist on one layer To change or view the layer of a group 1 Select the object s for which you want to view the grouping 2 Right click and select Properties Tip At any time to access an object s properties you can click on the Properties tool on the Edit toolbar P 3 Click the Group tab Result The layers for the objects in the group are listed with the layer for the group highlighted Note By default the group assumes the current layer when initially created To group the objects on a different layer select the layer from the list Click OK Moving WYSI WYG supports two types of mov
458. y of modes The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Report m CAD 2D m DATA m PRES 2D The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Design E CAD 7 DATA a DESIGN E PRES The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Perform CAD wysiwyg March 2007 WYSIWYG user interface 7 DATA E DESIGN m PRES m LIVE Note Emphasis adds the mode button Emphasis WYSILink adds the mode button Link Layouts Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs A layout Is a configuration of work views Views and layouts are mode specific The layouts are not editable and there are no options for saving custom layouts To this end WYSIWYG Supports pop out frames and has multi monitor functionality thus providing alternative tools for customizing your work environment These features are discussed below Click the appropriate layout tab to change layouts Views Views are the windows in the work space The windows are pre configured on the screen based on the layout as discussed above The WYSIWYG views include wireframe wireframe selection only flight case shaded Spreadsheet patch error report image plot and worksheet The layouts and views available in each mode are discussed at the beginning of each chapter For more information see Wireframe views on page 68 and Shaded views on page 73 Popup frames You can place a view in a popup frame so that it re
459. yg March 2007 CAD mode Options tab Options on this tab affect the mode selection for the fixtures The options vary according to the fixture that you have selected Properties __ 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture General Contral Moving Head 1 Static Colour 2Gobo1 3Gobo2 2FX Options Protocol TEN Software Curent Slot 1 fi Colour Mix Slot 2 E Dual lt Gobos gt Slot 3 fi Gobo lris Gwe oo E Mode Sets the mode for the selected fixture E Software The software version that is loaded on the selected fixture m Slots The mechanical components that are present in the selected fixture m Control Simulates the lamp control channel on the selected fixture Since you can physically turn a fixture on or off WYSIWYG enables this action in the software Control tab Options on the Control tab enable you to set the channel circuit and patch universe information for the fixture Properties ae a General Appearance Light Emission Fixture 1 Static Colour 2Gobo1 3Gobo2 2FX Options General Contral Moving Head Control Circuit Channel jo fob Dinmer fo Z Fatch Use EDM address Universe Mone OF Cancel Apply m Channel Type the channel number for the selected fixture m Dimmer The dimmer number for the selected fixture WYSIWYG Reference Guide 213 CAD mode 214 Release 19 0 m Use EDMX address
460. you set looks in Design mode and while you precue in Live mode To do so you must first use CAD mode to draw the screen upon which the video will play Once you draw the screen you can leave it blank assign a static image or you can assign a video source to it using the Video Manager You can select a video file or you can capture a live video stream from an external source such as a web cam or a video capture device that is installed on your computer provided that you have WYSIWYG Perform For video files you must select one of the following video file formats for playback s Motion Picture Experts Group MPEG m Audio Video Interleaved AVI us wysiwyg gt March 2007 CAD mode Note If you cannot view these file types you may not have the proper decoder installed on your PC Install the appropriate decoder and then try viewing the file again For help on installing the decoder consult the developer of the video file type For live video streams your capture device must be using WDM drivers After you draw the screen and attach the video source you use the Video Designer Tool in Design mode to start the playback or stream For more information see To use the Video tool on page 265 You can view the video in any of the shaded views using the controls on the Video designer tool to pause fast forward rewind or stop the video You can also patch the control of the video source to a console device This means that y
461. you specify in the On paper box For example you may want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of your layout This one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet m Point Size The size at which points are printed m Hide Zero Intensity Fixture Select this check box to hide any fixtures with an Intensity set to zero so they do not print View type tab Options on the View type tab affect the view type of the CAD item View Options General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View type Show Details Wy OTe ene f Plan Side Front Right i Scrollbars On Front Back sometric m View Type The view types available are those discussed in Plot types on page 108 a WorkPlane The workplanes available are those discussed in Plot types on page 108 m Scrollbars Select this check box to display the scrollbars on the bottom and left side edges of the layout Click to clear this check box to turn the scrollbars off Show Details tab Options on the Show Details tab affect the amount of fixture information that is shown in the CAD item WYSIWYG Reference Guide 329 Presentation mode General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View Type Show Details Fixture data shown on plot lw Unit W Channel Tw Spot I Colour I Lamp I Focus Ti Gobo Circuit Patch Position Purpose T Lens Notes Dimmer Intensity View Options E x lw Show Test Labels Pai
462. you to create virtual lighting looks without an external control console You can rough in static looks and render them for design presentations Though the Design mode looks a lot like the CAD mode you cannot draw anything within the Design mode If you need to make changes to your drawing you need to switch over to the CAD mode You can see the output of fixtures in the wireframe and shaded views within the Design mode However you can only select fixtures within the wireframe views unless you use Concept shortcuts as discussed in the next section The design tools are individual toolbars that enable you to control certain parameters for selected fixtures Currently there are nine design tools a Intensity E Focus E Iris E Zoom a Color m Gobo a Prism a Video m Moving Scenery To turn the design tools on 1 From the Design menu choose the tool name to activate or deactivate the desired design tool 2 _ You can also toggle the tools on the Design toolbar Focus oom Gobo Video Wipe Ao o HWD Intensity Iris Color Prism Moving Scenery Note Design tools have the same properties as other toolbars and can be rearranged on the screen to improve the layout of the working area You can also resize design tools by stacking them into columns so that they take up less space on the screen wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode To rearrange and resize design tools 1 Open the desired design tools using the
463. yout that you want to use Presentation mode contains the following layout tabs m Reports The work area displays reports formatted for printing E New Plots The work area displays plots m Layouts The work area displays layouts formatted for printing m Images The work area displays bitmap or jpeg images that are stored with the show file m Worksheet The work area contains spreadsheets that the user can edit WYSIWYG Reference Guide 297 Presentation mode b a Reports 298 Release 19 0 Introduction The Reports layout tab opens a series of pre formatted reports that are generated by WYSIWYG containing all data entered in CAD and Data modes These reports are available for you to use as is or to modify to suit your needs Unlike the spreadsheets in Data mode you cannot edit fixture data here Reports are designed to be printed documents You can however modify their setup and layout Working with reports To modify a report 1 From the Options menu choose View Options Result The View Options window is displayed View Options FR General Report T Follow User Scene Scene All Layers Tip You can use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar fal Modify options as desired Click OK General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the scene that is displayed in the report Follow User Scene Select this check box to filter the report according to the current scene Th
464. ype the name of the concept and then click OK Result The concept is saved on the Concept shortcut bar Updating concepts You can modify a Concept shortcut by adding or removing fixtures as required To update concepts 1 Select the set of fixtures that you want to include in the concept 2 Right click on the Concept shortcut that you want to update and then choose Update Result The Concept shortcut is modified to include only the fixtures that you selected Working with concepts When you select a Concept shortcut any currently selected objects are deselected and the Concept set is selected instead If you press the CTRL key while selecting concepts the concept is added to the current selection set If you press the CTRL and SHIFT keys while selecting concepts the concept is removed from the current selection set oe wysiwyg March 2007 Design mode Notes 1 Ina Concept shortcut multi cell fixtures such as cyc lights can be selected either by cell or fixture If the concept was created in Design mode using cells the entire fixture is selected in the other modes If the concept was created using fixtures all cells are selected when in Design mode 2 When you replace a multi cell fixture that is selected by circuit with a different multi cell fixture that has a different number of circuits the replacement fixture is selected by fixture and not by circuit 3 When you delete a fixture the fixture is
465. ywhere in the drawing to finish adding the text To insert image items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Image Tip You can also use the mage tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar 323 Presentation mode 324 Release 19 0 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect mage View to be referenced dialog box appears Select Image iew tyybe referenced Ei x Cancel 3 Select the image that you want to add to the layout and then click Select Result The image appears within the placeholder as drawn To insert CAD items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose CAD Tip You can also use the CAD item tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The CAD item which is referenced from CAD mode appears within the placeholder as drawn By default CAD items appear in plan view and at a scale of 1 16 1 To insert data items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Data Tip You can also use the Data tool from the Layout Pres nsert toolbar 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Data View to be referenced dialog box appears Select Data Yiew to be referenced fs E Ed All Data Sortable Focus Channels Eenes Dimmers Hanging

Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents